fakulti teknologi kejuruteraan academic handbook 20112012

UNIVERSITI TEKNIKAL MALAYSIA MELAKAACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012

FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY (FTK)

UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012

2

FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012

UTeM

3

2

Welcome to FTK 5 UTeM Mission 6 UTeM Vision 6 UTeM Motto 6 UTeM Objectives 7 UTeM Administration 8 FTK Mission 10 FTK Vision 10 FTK Motto 10 FTK Objectives 11 FTK Programme Educational Objectives 11 FTK Administration 12 Courses Offered 13 Course Duration 14 Grading System 14 Academic Classification 15 Academic Advisory System 15 GPA & CGPA Calculation 18 Award 19 Curriculum Structures 22 Summary of Subjects 54 Faculty Staffs 206 Maps & Locations 219 Credits 223

CONTENTS


4


UTeM

5

3

WELCOME TO FTK

Assalamualaikum & Salam 1Malaysia, Welcome to the Faculty of Engineering Technology (FTK)! It is my pleasure to welcome you as a student of this

faculty. You are joining a multidisciplinary community of more than 70 staffs comprising of administrative staffs and academicians.

Joining FTK, you will benefit immensely from an academically rich environment supported by advanced equipment technology and assisted by highly technical trainers and teaching engineers. As graduates from FTK, you will be equipped with sound knowledge and skills relevant to the needs of multi-faceted industries, such as manufacturing, construction, industrial, maintenance and management. Graduates can also work in entry-level positions such as product design, testing, development, system developments, field engin-eering, technical operations, and quality control.

FTK aims to support the nation’s need for highly skilled workforce towards achieving the vision to be a high-income nation by year 2020. It is a unique faculty since all the programs offered are application oriented based on current industrial needs and taught by lecturers with industrial experiences. The faculty’s strong link with industries will also be beneficial for the students to be exposed to the actual industrial environment. The ready- to-practice engineering technologists are not only trained to be creative and innovative with high ethical values but with emphasis on the soft skills such as communication, team work and leadership as required by the industries. This handbook is designed to provide valuable information about our academic programs and we hope that you find it useful. It is important that you consult regularly with your academic advisor particularly when it is time to register for your courses. An education in any area is a challenging prospect, but developing your creativity, skills and resour- cefulness in such a fast changing discipline in this new millennium has many benefits in technological practices and many other future careers.

At FTK, we are committed to creating a productive, efficient and friendly atmosphere within the faculty and welcome your partnership in this noble endeavor. We are pleased that you have chosen FTK and we are committed to the notion that you will continue to strive towards excellence throughout your tenure at FTK.

Associate Professor MOHD RAHIMI BIN YUSOFF Dean, Faculty of Engineering Technology

Assalamualaikum & Salam 1Malaysia,

Welcome to the Faculty of Engineering Technology (FTK)! It is my pleasure to welcome you as a student of this faculty. You are joining a multidisciplinary community of more than 70 staffs comprising of administrative staffs and academicians.

Joining FTK, you will benefit immensely from an academically rich environment supported by advanced equipment technology and assisted by highly technical trainers and teaching engineers. As graduates from FTK, you will be equipped with sound knowledge and skills relevant to the needs of multi-faceted industries, such as manufacturing, construction, industrial, maintenance and management. Graduates can also work in entry-level positions such as product design, testing, development, system developments, field engin-eering, technical operations, and quality control.

FTK aims to support the nation’s need for highly skilled workforce towards achieving the vision to be a high-income nation by year 2020. It is a unique faculty since all the programs offered are application oriented based on current industrial needs and taught by lecturers with industrial experiences. The faculty’s strong link with industries will also be beneficial for the students to be exposed to the actual industrial environment. The ready-to-practice engineering technologists are not only trained to be creative and innovative with high ethical values but with emphasis on the soft skills such as communication, team work and leadership as required by the industries. This handbook is designed to provide valuable information about our academic programs and we hope that you find it useful. It is important that you consult regularly with your academic advisor particularly when it is time to register for your courses. An education in any area is a challenging prospect, but developing your creativity, skills and resour-cefulness in such a fast changing discipline in this new millennium has many benefits in technological practices and many other future careers.

At FTK, we are committed to creating a productive, efficient and friendly atmosphere within the faculty and welcome your partnership in this noble endeavor. We are pleased that you have chosen FTK and we are committed to the notion that you will continue to strive towards excellence throughout your tenure at FTK.

ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR MOHD RAHIMI BIN YUSOFFDEAN, FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY3

WELCOME TO FTK


6

4

To produce highly competent professionals through quality and world class technical university education based on application-oriented teaching, learning and research with smart university-

industry partnership in line with the national aspiration.

To be one of the world’s leading innovative and creative technical university.

Excellence Through Competency

UTeM MISSION

UTeM VISION

UTeM MOTTO

4

To produce highly competent professionals through quality and world class technical university education based on application-oriented teaching, learning and research with smart university-

industry partnership in line with the national aspiration.

To be one of the world’s leading innovative and creative technical university.

Excellence Through Competency

UTeM MISSION

UTeM VISION

UTeM MOTTO


UTeM

7

5

To become a creative and innovative learning and knowledge organization that offers practice and application oriented academic programmes in the fields of engineering and technology.

To lead in research, development, innovation, commercialisation and consultancy activities based on the needs of the industry.

To produce competent graduates with high moral values who will be the preferred choice by the industry.

To have competent and highly qualified staff with vast practical experiences.

To play an effective role as the main impetus to the industrial development of the nation.

To establish cooperation and smart partnership between the university and the industries.

To provide infrastructure and conducive environment to generate and maintain excellence.

To implement comprehensive and extensive usage of ICT in both academic activities and management of the university.

UTeM OBJECTIVES


8

6

PROF. DATUK DR. AHMAD YUSOFF BIN HASSAN

VICE CHANCELLOR

DATO' PROF. DR. MOHD NOR BIN HUSAIN

DEPUTY VICE CHANCELLOR (ACADEMIC & INTERNATIONAL)

PROF. DATO' DR. MOHAMAD KADIM BIN SUAIDI

DEPUTY VICE CHANCELLOR (RESEARCH & INNOVATION)

UTeM ADMINISTRATION

Senior Management

6


VICE CHANCELLOR





UTeM ADMINISTRATION

Senior Management

6


VICE CHANCELLOR





UTeM ADMINISTRATION

Senior Management


UTeM

9

7

ENGR. PROF. DR. MARIZAN BIN SULAIMAN

ASSISTANT VICE CHANCELLOR (STUDENT AFFAIRS & ALUMNI)

PROF. DR. MUHAMMAD GHAZIE BIN ISMAIL

ASSISTANT VICE CHANCELLOR (INDUSTRY & COMMUNITY NETWORK)

HASAN BIN SIRUN

Registrar

KHAIRUL BIN TAIB

Bursar

FARIDAH BINTI HJ MD AMIN

Chief Librarian

REGISTRAR BURSAR CHIEF LIBRARIAN


10

8

To provide quality programmes in engineering technology that will drive students toward achieving their educational objectives, professional goals and an engagement to life-long learning.

Our vision is to be one of the best engineering technology educational providers, well recognized locally, nationally and internationally for its achievements.

Towards Engineering Technology Educational Excellence

FTK MISSION

FTK VISION

FTK MOTTO


UTeM

11

9

1. To provide high quality and demanding engineering technology programme that meet current need of industry and society.

2. To produce highly skilled and competence workforce that is recognized by professional bodies nationally and internationally.

3. To implement modern and innovative approaches in our teaching and learning environment. 4. To establish network, good relationship and collaboration with universities and industries. 5. To participate in activities that supports the intellectual and economic development of

business, industry, government and stakeholders.

1. To produce engineering technologist who is competent and able to apply principles of science and engineering for solving current problems in engineering technology fields.

2. To produce engineering technologist who is responsible to the Creator, nation and society, ethical in discharging their duties and have high moral values.

3. To produce engineering technologist who is creative and innovative in research and development to meet the needs of the nation.

4. To produce engineering technologist who can function in team environments, communicate effectively and demonstrate leadership qualities.

5. To produce engineering technologist who is able to exhibit a desire for life-long learning through continuous technical training and professional development.

FTK OBJECTIVES

FTK PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEO)


12

10

ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR MOHD RAHIMI BIN YUSOFF

Dean

AHMAD ZUBIR BIN JAMIL

Deputy Dean (Academic)

ROHANA BINTI ABDULLAH

Deputy Dean (Research & Industry Network)

ENGR. ASRI BIN DIN Head of Department

(Electric)

ROSTAM AFFENDI

BIN HAMZAH Head of Department

(Electronic &

NUR RASHID BIN MAT

NURI @ MD DIN Head of Department

(Mechanical)

ENGR. ZOLKARNAIN

BIN MARJOM Head of Department

(Manufacturing)

AZHAR BIN MOHD

SALLEH Principal Assistant

Registrar

FTK ADMINISTRATION

ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR MOHD RAHIMI BIN YUSOFFDEAN


UTeM

13

11

Computer)

FTK currently offers the following Bachelor’s Degree programmes:

No Programme Name Short Code 1 Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology

(Industrial Power) with Honours BTEK

2 Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Automation & Robotics) with Honours

BTEA

3 Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Telecommunications) with Honours

BTNT

4 Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Industrial Electronics) with Honours

BTNE

5 Bachelor's Degree in Computer Engineering Technology (Computer Systems) with Honours

BTCS

6 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Automotive Technology) with Honours

BTMA

7 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Systems) with Honours

BTMH

8 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Maintenance Technology) with Honours

BTMT

9 Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Process and Technology) with Honours

BTPP

10 Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Product Design) with Honours

BTPD

COURSES OFFERED

11

Computer)





BTEA


BTNT


BTNE


BTCS


BTMA


BTMH


BTMT


BTPP


BTPD

COURSES OFFERED

11

Computer)





BTEA


BTNT


BTNE


BTCS


BTMA


BTMH


BTMT


BTPP


BTPD

COURSES OFFERED


14

12

The Bachelor’s Degree duration is within minimum of 4 years and up to maximum of 6 years.

A student’s achievement for each subject is based on the grades which are illustrated in Table 1.

Marks Grade Points Achievements

80 – 100 75 – 79 70 – 74 65 – 69 60 – 64 55 – 59 50 – 54 47 – 49 44 – 46 40 – 43 0 – 39

A A- B+ B B- C+ C C- D+ D E

4.0 3.7 3.3 3.0 2.7 2.3 2.0 1.7 1.3 1.0 0.0

Distinction Distinction

Merit Merit Merit Pass Pass

Conditional Pass Conditional Pass Conditional Pass

Fail

Table 1: Marks, Grades and Points Awarded

COURSE DURATION

GRADING SYSTEM

12

The Bachelor’s Degree duration is within minimum of 4 years and up to maximum of 6 years.

A student’s achievement for each subject is based on the grades which are illustrated in Table 1.

Marks Grade Points Achievements

80 – 100 75 – 79 70 – 74 65 – 69 60 – 64 55 – 59 50 – 54 47 – 49 44 – 46 40 – 43 0 – 39

A A- B+ B B- C+ C C- D+ D E

4.0 3.7 3.3 3.0 2.7 2.3 2.0 1.7 1.3 1.0 0.0

Distinction Distinction

Merit Merit Merit Pass Pass

Conditional Pass Conditional Pass Conditional Pass

Fail

Table 1: Marks, Grades and Points Awarded

COURSE DURATION

GRADING SYSTEM


UTeM

15

13

A student’s achievement is evaluated based on Grade Point Average (GPA) and Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA). A student’s academic status will be provided at the end of each semester based on CGPA as shown in Table 2.

STATUS CGPA

Good (KB) CGPA ≥ 2.00

Conditional (KS) 1.70 ≤ CGPA < 2.00

Fail (KG) CGPA < 1.70

Table 2: Academic Status Classification

(Note: KB = Kedudukan Baik, KS = Kedudukan Bersyarat, KG = Kedudukan Gagal)

Students are free to take subjects offered by the faculty at any semester based on their capability, as long as it complies with the rules and regulations set up by the faculty and university academic board. Students need to plan their own study carefully and the faculty shall appoint an academic advisor to guide them during their duration of study in the university.

Characteristics of the Semester System: Students are free to take any subjects offered in each semester based on their ability; and

conditions of subject selection are determined by the faculty and university’s academics regulations.

Students should plan their study and learning appropriately or as advised by their academic advisor.

ACADEMIC CLASSIFICATION

ACADEMIC ADVISORY SYSTEM


16

14

The Importance of Academic Advisor: Students need to be guided in term of subjects taken under the semester system, where they are

free to determine the number of subjects to be taken based on their capability or in case the student obtained a Conditional Position (KS) in the previous semester. They need to plan carefully to take subjects which are suitable for them to carry and fully aware on its implication to their whole study period in the university.

Semester system is a flexible system for a student with high, moderate or less capability to complete their study based on their own capability whilst complying with the maximum study period set up by the university.

The academic advisor is able to provide an advice not only in the academic matter, but also in the aspects of how the students can adapt themselves to the semester system, culture shock of studying in the university, time management and private matters that may affect the students’ study performance.

In the condition where the student is not with the same batch of other students during the study period due to difference in the subjects taken, difficulty may be expected for him/her to discuss on the matter of study with the others. Thereby, the role of academic advisor is important.


UTeM

17

15

Roles and Responsibilities of student and academic advisor in the Academic Advisory System are as follows:

Academic Advisor Student

Conduct a meeting with students at least twice every semester.

Always be open-minded when meeting with the academic advisor.

Make sure to student understand the academic system in UTeM.

Attend meetings conducted by the academic advisor.

Guide and make sure student’s subjects registration is based on his/her current academic result.

Regard the academic advisor as a mentor and seek advice on the academic matters from them.

Supervise the student study progress and provide guidance in making a good study planning.

Learn to have a good understanding of the academic system.

Inspire students so that they will always be motivated in their study.

Provide a copy of examination result to the academic advisor for each semester.

Ensure the student’s record and file is always updated – make sure no subject is missed to fulfill the requirement for the award of a Bachelor’s Degree.

Get the certification of registration form, copy of certificates and reference letter from the academic advisor.

Refer the student to certain department/centre for further action if necessary.

Keep records on all subjects that have already been taken during the period of study to prevent missed subject and fulfill the requirement for degree award.

15

Roles and Responsibilities of student and academic advisor in the Academic Advisory System are as follows:

Academic Advisor Student

Conduct a meeting with students at least twice every semester.

Always be open-minded when meeting with the academic advisor.

Make sure to student understand the academic system in UTeM.

Attend meetings conducted by the academic advisor.

Guide and make sure student’s subjects registration is based on his/her current academic result.

Regard the academic advisor as a mentor and seek advice on the academic matters from them.

Supervise the student study progress and provide guidance in making a good study planning.

Learn to have a good understanding of the academic system.

Inspire students so that they will always be motivated in their study.

Provide a copy of examination result to the academic advisor for each semester.

Ensure the student’s record and file is always updated – make sure no subject is missed to fulfill the requirement for the award of a Bachelor’s Degree.

Get the certification of registration form, copy of certificates and reference letter from the academic advisor.

Refer the student to certain department/centre for further action if necessary.

Keep records on all subjects that have already been taken during the period of study to prevent missed subject and fulfill the requirement for degree award.


18

16

A student’s overall achievement is based on Grade Point Average (GPA) obtained for a particular semester and Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) for the semesters that have been completed. Grade Point Average (GPA): GPA is the grade point average obtained in a particular semester. It is based on the following calculations:

Total Points, JMN = k1m1 + k2m2 + ........knmn

Total Calculated Credits, JKK = k1 + k2 + ........kn

GPA = JMN / JKK = [k1m1 + k2m2 + ........knmn] / [k1 + k2 + ........kn]

Where : kn = Credit for n subject

mn = Points from the n subject Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) : CGPA is the cumulative grade point average obtained for the semesters that have been completed. It is based on the following calculations:

CGPA = [JMN1 + JMN2 + ........JMNn] / [JKK1 + JKK2 + ........JKKn] Where : JMNn = Total points obtained in n semester JKKn = Total credits in n semester

GPA & CGPA CALCULATION


UTeM

19

17

A Bachelor’s Degree shall be awarded if all the following conditions are fulfilled by the student: 1. Must get Good (KB) status in the final semester. 2. Pass all the subjects required as listed in the course curriculum. 3. Apply for the award of the degree, approved by the faculty and certified by senate. 4. Pass MUET according to the university directive. 5. Meet all the other university requirements.

AWARD

17

A Bachelor’s Degree shall be awarded if all the following conditions are fulfilled by the student: 1. Must get Good (KB) status in the final semester. 2. Pass all the subjects required as listed in the course curriculum. 3. Apply for the award of the degree, approved by the faculty and certified by senate. 4. Pass MUET according to the university directive. 5. Meet all the other university requirements.

AWARD


20

CURRICULUM STRUCTURE


22

19

SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-

REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1

BTES 1113 Linear Algebra P 3

BTEU 1114 Digital Electronics & Systems K 4

BTEU 1112 Computer Aided Design K 2

BTEU 1123 Electric Circuit I K 3

BTEA 1113 Measurement K 3

BLHW 1013 Foundation English

W 3

OR

BLHL 1xx2 Third Language

BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum I W 1

TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19

SEMESTER 2

BTES 1213 Calculus P 3

BTEU 1231 Engineering Seminar I P 1

BTEU 1211 Electrical Workshop I K 1

BTEP 1213 Electric & Magnetism K 3

BTEE 1213 Electronic Devices K 3

BTEU 1213 Electric Circuit II K 3

BTIG 1213 Computer Programming K 3

BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2



BTEK Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Power) with Honours

19


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1






BLHW 1013 Foundation English

W 3

OR

BLHL 1xx2 Third Language



SEMESTER 2







BTIG 1213 Computer Programming K 3




BTEK Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Power) with Honours


UTeM

23

20


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 3

BTES 2313 Engineering Mathematic P 3

BTEU 2312 Electrical Workshop II K 2

BTCG 2313 Static & Thermodynamic K 3

BTEP 2314 Electrical Technology K 4

BTEE 2313 Analog Electronics K 3

BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3

BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum II W 1


SEMESTER 4

BTES 2413 Statistics & Applications P 3

BTEA 2424 Embedded System K 4

BTEE 2413 Electric Machine K 3

BTEP 2413 Power Engineering I K 3

BTEA 2413 Instrumentation System K 3

BLHW 1732 Malaysian Sosio-Economic Development

W 2

OR

BLHW 1722

Philosophy of Science & Technology


SEMESTER 5

BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication

W 3

BTEA 3513 Control System I K 3

BTEE 3513 Power Electronics K 3

BTEP 3513 Power Engineering II K 3

BTEA 3524 PLC & Application K 4

BTEP 3523 Power Distribution System Design K 3

BTEU 3531 Engineering Seminar II P 1



24

21


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 6

BTEU 3612 Industrial Safety & Health K 2

BTEU 3613 Final Year Project I K 3

BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2

BLHC 4032 Compulsory Elective Subject W 2

BTEE 3613 Electrical Actuators & Drives K 3

BTEP 3613 Energy Efficiency K 3

BTEU 3513 Communication System K 3


SEMESTER 7

BTEU 4713 Engineering Ethics P 3

BTEP 4713 Power System Operation & Automation

E 6

OR

BTEU 4733 Quality Improvement Tools

OR

BTEP 4733 High Voltage Technology

BTEU 4725 Final Year Project II K 5

BPTU 1032 Techno Entrepreneurship W 2

BLHC 4062 Project Management W 2


SEMESTER 8 BTEU 4810 Industrial Training K 10

BTEU 4812 Industrial Training Report K 2


TOTAL CREDITS 143


UTeM

25

22


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1

BLHW 1013 OR

BLHL 1xxx

Foundation English OR Third- Language THIRD LANGUAGE

W 3








SEMESTER 2








BTIG 1213 Computer Programming K 3 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19

BTEA Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Automation & Robotics) with Honours

22


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1

BLHW 1013 OR

BLHL 1xxx

Foundation English OR Third- Language THIRD LANGUAGE

W 3








SEMESTER 2








BTIG 1213 Computer Programming K 3 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19

BTEA Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Automation & Robotics) with Honours


26

23


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 3



BTES 2313 Engineering Mathematic P 3

BTEU 2312 Electrical Workshop II K 2

BTEE 2313 Analog Electronics K 3

BTEP 2314 Electrical Technology K 4

BTCG 2313 Static & Mechanics K 3


SEMESTER 4

BLHW 1732 OR

BLHW 1722

Malaysian Socio-Economic Development OR Philosophy of Science & Technology

W 2

BTES 2413 Statistics & Applications P 3

BTEA 2424 Embedded System K 4 BTEA 2413 Control Systems I K 3 BTEE 2413 Electrical Machines K 3

BTCG 2413 Fluid Mechanics K 3 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18

SEMESTER 5


W 3

BTEU 3531 Engineering Seminar II P 1 BTEA 3513 Control Systems II K 3

BTEU 3523 Data Communications & Computer Network

K 3

BTEA 3524 PLC & Application K 4 BTEA 2413 Instrumentation Systems K 3

BTEP 3513 Power Engineering I K 3 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20


UTeM

27

24


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 6


BLHC 4xxx Compulsory Elective Subject W 2

BTEU 3612 Industrial Safety & Health P 2

BTEA 3613 Industrial Robotic K 3 BTEE 3613 Electrical Actuators & Drives K 3

BTEA 3623 Pneumatic & Hydraulic K 3 BTEU 3613 Final Year Project I K 3


SEMESTER 7

BPTU 1032 Techno-Entrepreneurship W 2

BLHC 4062 Project Management W 2 BTEU 4713 Engineering Ethics P 3

BTEA 4713 OR

BTEA 4733

Flexible Manufacturing System OR Industrial Process Control

E 3

BTEA 4723 OR

BTEA 4743

Machine Vision OR Distributed Control System

E 3

BTEU 4715 Final Year Project II K 5 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18

SEMESTER 8 BTEU 4810 Industrial Training K 10

BTEU 4812 Industrial Training Report K 2 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12

TOTAL CREDITS 143


28

25


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1

BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3

BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2



BTNH 1263 Algebra & Calculus P 3

BTNH 1123 Technical Physics P 3

BTNT 1013 Electric Circuit I P 3

BTNE 1013 Engineering Workshop I P 3


SEMESTER 2


BTNH 1273 Differential Equation P 3

BTCS 1213 Programming Fundamentals P 3

BTNE 1023 Engineering Workshop II P 3 BTNE 1013

BTNT 1023 Electric Circuit II P 3 BTNT 1013

BTNE 1113 Electronic I P 3

BTNE 2323 Electrical Technology P 3


BTNT Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Telecommunications) with Honours

25


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1







BTNT 1013 Electric Circuit I K 3

BTNE 1013 Engineering Workshop I K 3


SEMESTER 2


BTNH 1273 Differential Equation P 3 BTNH 1263

BTCS 1213 Programming Fundamentals K 3

BTNE 1023 Engineering Workshop II K 3 BTNE 1013

BTNT 1023 Electric Circuit II K 3 BTNT 1013

BTNE 1113 Electronic I K 3

BTNE 2323 Electrical Technology K 3


BTNT Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Telecommunications) with Honours


UTeM

29

26


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 3



BTNE 1123 Electronic II K 3 BTNE 1113

BTCS 2134 Digital Electronic K 4

BTNE 2223 Control Principles K 4

BTNT 2033 Continuous Signal & System K 3


SEMESTER 4

BTNH 2123 Statistics & Numerical Methods P 3

BTNE 2114 Electronic III K 4 BTNE 1123

BTCS 2113 Fundamental of Microprocessor & Microcontroller

K 3

BTNT 2084 Data Communication & Networking K 4

BTNT 2053 Communication Principle K 3

BTNT 2063 Discrete Signal & System K 3


SEMESTER 5


W 3

BLHC 4052 Technopreneurship P 2

BTNE 4713 Quality Management P 3

BTNT 3073 Telecommunication System K 3

BTNT 3043 Telecommunication Electronic K 3

BTNT 3093 Digital Signal Processing K 3

BTNT 3103 Electromagnetic K 3



30

27


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 6

BLHL xxxx Third Language W 2

BLHC 4062 Project Management P 2

BTNT 3123 Digital Communication K 3

BTNT 3113 Telecommunication Switching System

K 3

BTNU 3804 Final Year Project I K 4

BTNT 3134 RF Technique & Microwave K 4


SEMESTER 7

BLHW 4032 Critical & Creative Thinking W 2

BTNU 4843 Engineering Technology Ethics P 3

BTNU4814 Final Year Project II K 4

BTNT xxxx Elective I* E 3

BTNT xxxx Elective II* E 3

BTNT xxxx Elective III* E 3


SEMESTER 8 BTNU 4826 Industrial Training P 6

BTNU 4836 Industrial Training Report P 6


TOTAL CREDITS 146

*For Elective I, II and III students may choose any 3 subjects from the list below:

No. Subject Code Subject Name 1 BTNT 4403 Satellite Communication 2 BTNT 4413 Mobile Communication 3 BTNT 4423 Optical Communications & Optoelectronic 4 BTNT 4433 Antenna Engineering


UTeM

31

28

SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT HOUR

PRE-REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1









SEMESTER 2

BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum II W 1

BLHH 1032 Industrial Psychology & Organisation W 2





BTCS 1213 Programming Fundamental K 3


SEMESTER 3


BTNH 2123 Statistics & Numerical Methods P 3 BTNH 1273

BTCS 1223 Advanced Programming K 3



BTNE 2033 Engineering Drawing K 3


BTNE Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Industrial Electronics) with Honours

28


PRE-REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1









SEMESTER 2

BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum II W 1

BLHH 1032 Industrial Psychology & Organisation W 2







SEMESTER 3



BTCS 1223 Advanced Programming K 3 BTCS 1213



BTNE 2033 Engineering Drawing K 3


BTNE Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Industrial Electronics) with Honours


32

29


PRE-REQUISITE

SEMESTER 4



BLHH 1032 Project Management P 2


BTNE 2114 Electronic III K 4 BTNE 1123

BTNE 2224 Control Principles K 4



SEMESTER 5

BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication W 3

BTNE 3234 Industrial Control K 4

BTCS 3134 Microprocessor & Microcontroller Technology

K 4

BTNE 3454 Process Instrumentation K 4

BTNE 3714 Data Acquisition & Sensors K 4


SEMESTER 6



BTNE 3424 Industrial Pneumatics K 4

BTNE 3724 Embedded System K 4


BTNE xxxx Elective I* E 4


SEMESTER 7



BTNE 4434 Industrial Automation K 4

BTNE 4713 Quality Management K 3

BTNU 4814 Final Year Project II K 4 BTNU 3804

BTNE xxxx Elective II** E 4



UTeM

33

30


PRE-REQUISITE


BTNU 4836 Industrial Training Assessment P 6


TOTAL CREDITS 146

*For Elective I students may choose any ONE (1) subject from the list below:

No. Subject Code Subject Name 1 BTNE 3354 Power Electronic 2 BTCS 4324 Computer Interfacing

**For Elective II students may choose any ONE (1) subject from the list below:

No. Subject Code Subject Name 1 BTNE 4344 Electric Drives & Control 2 BTNE 4454 Industrial Robotic


34

31


PRE-REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1




BTNH 1123 Technical Physics P 3 BTCS 1113 Basic Electronics K 3

BTCS 1003 Computer Engineering Workshop I K 3



SEMESTER 2





BTNT 1013 Electric Circuit K 3

BTCS 1013 Computer Engineering Workshop II K 3 BTCS 1003

BTCS 1313 Database Management System K 3



BTCS Bachelor's Degree in Computer Engineering Technology (Computer Systems) with Honours

31


PRE-REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1




BTNH 1123 Technical Physics P 3 BTCS 1113 Basic Electronics K 3

BTCS 1003 Computer Engineering Workshop I K 3



SEMESTER 2





BTNT 1013 Electric Circuit K 3

BTCS 1013 Computer Engineering Workshop II K 3 BTCS 1003

BTCS 1313 Database Management System K 3



BTCS Bachelor's Degree in Computer Engineering Technology (Computer Systems) with Honours


UTeM

35

32


PRE-REQUISITE

SEMESTER 3




BTCS 2223 Data Structure & Algorithm K 3 BTCS 1223


BTNT 2143 Signal & Systems K 3



SEMESTER 4


BTCS 2313 Computer Organization & Architecture K 3

BTCS 2173 Computer Network & System K 3

BTCS 2123 Internet Technology & Multimedia K 3

BTCS 2213 Operating Systems K 3

BTCS 2134 Digital Electronics K 4


SEMESTER 5

BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication W 3

BLHC 4072 Engineering Management P 2

BTCS 3123 Discrete Mathematics K 3 BTNH 2123

BTCS 3323 Computer System Engineering K 3

BTCS 3423 Computer Network & Security K 3 BTCS 2173

BTCS 3134 Microprocessor & Microcontroller Technology

K 4 BTCS 2134



36

33


PRE-REQUISITE

SEMESTER 6



BTCS 4213 Software Engineering K 3

BTCS 3133 Digital Signal Processing K 3 BTNT 2143

BTCS xxxx Elective I* E 4

BTCS xxxx Elective II* E 4


SEMESTER 7



BTNU 4814 Final Year Project II K 4 BTNU 3804

BTNE 4713 Quality Management K 3

BTCS 3313 Embedded System K 3

BTCS xxxx Elective III* E 4



BTNU 4836 Industrial Training Assessment P 6


TOTAL CREDITS 146

*For Elective I, II and III students may choose any 3 subjects from the list below:

No. Subject Code Subject Name 1 BTCS 4314 Real Time Systems 2 BTCS 4324 Computer Interfacing 3 BTCS 4334 VLSI Design & Fabrication 4 BTCS 4344 Image & Video Processing


UTeM

37

34


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1

BTMU 1132 Physics P 2

BTMU 1142 Chemistry P 2

BTMU 1172 Mechanical Engineering Mathematics

P 2

BTMU 1213 Engineering Graphics P 3

BTMU 1323 Materials Science P 3

BTMU 1543 Principle of Electric And Electronic P 3


BLHL xxx2 Third Language W 2

BKKX xxx1 Co-Curriculum 1 W 1


SEMESTER 2

BTMU 1162 Numerical Method P 2

BTMU 1223 Engineering Design P 3

BTMU 1313 Statics P 3

BTMU 1413 Technology Workshop P 3

BTMU 1512 Experiment Method P 2


BLHW 1732 Malaysian Socio-Economic Development

W 2

BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum 2 W 1


BTMA Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Automotive Technology) with Honours

34


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1




P 2



BTMU 1543 Principle of Electric And Electronic P 3



BKKX xxx1 Co-Curriculum 1 W 1


SEMESTER 2





BTMU 1512 Experiment Method P 2



W 2



BTMA Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Automotive Technology) with Honours


38

35


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 3

BTMU 2123 Microprocessor Technology P 3

BTMU 2423 Manufacturing Process P 3

BTMU 2613 Thermodynamics P 3

BTMU 2623 Fluid Mechanics P 3 BTMU 1313




SEMESTER 4

BTMU 2113 Computer Programming P 3

BTMU 2142 Statistics P 2

BTMU 2152 Differential Equation P 2

BTMU 2233 Modeling & Computer Analysis P 3 BTMU 1213

BTMU 2333 Solid Mechanics P 3

BTMU 2523 Dynamics & Mechanics of Machine P 3 BTMU 1313

BLHL xxx2 Compulsory Elective Subject W 2


SHORT SEMESTER 1

TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER

SEMESTER 5

BTMU 3523 Control & Instrumentation P 3 BTMU 1543

BTMA 3714 Engine Technology K 4

BTMA 3723 Automotive Electric & Electronic System

K 3 BTMU 1543

BTMA 3733 Vehicle Dynamics K 3

BTMA 3813 Vehicle Brake System K 3

BTMA 3823 Vehicle Design and Testing K 3 BTMU 2523



UTeM

39

36


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 6

BTMA 3743 Automotive HVAC K 3

BTMA 3754 Vehicle Engine and Transmission System

K 4 BTMA 3714

BTMA 3763 Powertrain Management System K 3

BTMA 3833 Automotive Ergonomic K 3

BTMA 3883 Automotive Project 1 K 3


W 3


SHORT SEMESTER 2

TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER

SEMESTER 7

BTMU 4922 Engineering Ethics & OSHA P 2

BTMU 4952 Techno Entrepreneur P 2

BTMA 4843 Vehicle Suspension System K 3

BTMA 4854 Vehicle Transmission System K 4

BTMA 4863 Automotive Safety & Comfort System

K 3 BTMA 3723

BTMA 4873 Design And Simulation Vehicle System

K 3

BTMA 4893 Automotive Project 2 K 3 BTMA 3883


SEMESTER 8 BTMU 4936 Industrial Training K 6

BTMU 4946 Industrial Training Report K 6


TOTAL CREDITS 142


40

37


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1




P 2

BTMU 1213 Engineering Graphic P 3


BTMU 1512 Experimental Method P 2





SEMESTER 2

BTMU 1162 Numerical Methods P 2




BTMU 1543 Principle Of Electric & Electronic P 3



W 2


BTMH Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning Systems) with Honours

37


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1




P 2

BTMU 1213 Engineering Graphic P 3







SEMESTER 2

BTMU 1162 Numerical Methods P 2




BTMU 1543 Principle Of Electric & Electronic P 3



W 2


BTMH Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning Systems) with Honours


UTeM

41

38


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 3

BTMU 2123 Microprocessor Technology P 3

BTMU 2423 Manufacturing Process P 3

BTMU 2523 Dynamics & Mechanics Of Machine P 3 BTMU 1313


BTMU 2623 Fluid Mechanics P 3 BTMU 1313

BLHW 2403 Technical English P 3



SEMESTER 4

BTMU 2113 Computer Programming P 3 BTMU 2142 Statistics P 2 BTMU 2152 Differential Equation P 2 BTMU 2233 Modeling & Computer Analysis P 3 BTMU 1213 BTMU 2333 Solid Mechanics P 3

BTMH 2713 Fundamental Of HVAC & Refrigeration

K 3

BLHL xxx2 Compulsory Elective Subject W 2 BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum 2 W 1


SHORT SEMESTER 1


SEMESTER 5

BTMU 3523 Control & Instrumentation P 3 BTMU 1543

BTMH 3723 Basic Components of Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration

K 3

BTMH 3733 Classification of Air Conditioning System

K 3

BTMH 3753 Heating & Cooling Load K 3 BTMH 3813 Maintenance Of HVAC System K 3


W 3



42

39


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 6

BTMH 3623 Heat Transfer K 3

BTMH 3823 Air Distribution System K 3

BTMH 3773 Transportation Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration

K 3

BTMH 3763 HVAC Software & CFD K 3

BTMH 3883 HVAC Project 1 K 3


SHORT SEMESTER 2


SEMESTER 7



BTMH 4893 HVAC Project 2 K 3 BTMH 3883

BTMH 4843 Green Technology HVAC K 3

BTMH 4863 Applied Acoustic & Vibration for HVAC

K 3

BTMH 4873 Electrical & Control System for HVAC K 3 BTMG 1543 BTMU 3523





TOTAL CREDITS 136


UTeM

43

40


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1




P 2



BTMU 1543 Principle of Electric and Electronic P 3




SEMESTER 2









W 2


BTMT Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Maintenance Technology) with Honours

40


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1




P 2



BTMU 1543 Principle of Electric and Electronic P 3




SEMESTER 2









W 2


BTMT Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Maintenance Technology) with Honours


44

41


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 3

BTMU 2333 Solid Mechanics P 3 BTMU 2423 Manufacturing Process P 3 BTMU 2623 Fluid Mechanics P 3 BTMU 1313 BTMT 2433 Machine Tool Technology K 3 BTMT 2553 Dynamic K 3 BTMU 1313 BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3 BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2


SEMESTER 4

BTMU 2142 Statistics P 2 BTMU 2152 Differential Equation P 2

BTMT 2443 Fundamental of Machine Components

K 3

BTMT 2533 Basic Control Engineering Technology

K 3

BTMT 2633 Pneumatic & Hydraulic Technology K 3 BTMT 2643 Basic Tribology K 3

BTMT 2712 Introduction To Maintenance K 2 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18

SHORT SEMESTER 1


SEMESTER 5

BTMT 3723 Maintenance Technology & Asset Management

K 3

BTMT 3813 Transmission Technology K 3

BTMT 3823 Maintenance Diagnostic and Troubleshooting

K 3

BTMT 3833 Industrial Motor K 3 BTMT 3843 Mechanical Machine Maintenance K 3


W 3




UTeM

45

42


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 6

BTMT 3733 Condition Based Maintenance K 3

BTMT 3743 Vibration Analysis And Monitoring K 3

BTMT 3863 Instrument Calibration K 3

BTMT 3873 Plant Inspection K 3

BTMT 3883 Maintenance Project 1 K 3

BLHL xxx2 Compulsory Elective Subject W 2



SHORT SEMESTER 2


SEMESTER 7



BTMT 4763 Reliability, Maintainability & Risk K 3

BTMT 4773 Building Maintenance K 3

BTMT 4783 Oil & Wear Debris Analysis K 3

BTMT 4852 Maintenance Awareness in Design K 2

BTMT 4893 Maintenance Project 2 K 3 BTMT3883





TOTAL CREDITS 143


46

43


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1



BTPM 1113 Engineering Mathematics P 3

BTPU 1123 Engineering Statics P 3

BTPU 1114 Engineering Drawing & CAD P 4

BTPU 1133 Manufacturing Practices P 3


SEMESTER 2


BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum I W 1

BTPM 1213 Differential Equation P 3

BTPU 1213 Strength of Materials P 3

BTEG 1213 Principles of Electric & Electronic P 3

BTIG 1213 Computer Programming P 3

BTPU 1223 Manufacturing Processes P 3


SEMESTER 3

BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3 BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2 BTPM 2113 Statistics & Probabilities P 3 BTPU 2133 Engineering Materials P 3 BTPU 2144 Product Design & Development P 4 BTPU 2123 Mechanics of Machine P 3 BTPU 2112 Occupational Safety & Health

Management P 2


BTPP Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Process & Technology) with Honours

43


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1



BTPM 1113 Engineering Mathematics P 3

BTPU 1123 Engineering Statics P 3

BTPU 1114 Engineering Drawing & CAD P 4

BTPU 1133 Manufacturing Practices P 3


SEMESTER 2


BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum I W 1

BTPM 1213 Differential Equation P 3

BTPU 1213 Strength of Materials P 3

BTEG 1213 Principles of Electric & Electronic P 3

BTIG 1213 Computer Programming P 3

BTPU 1223 Manufacturing Processes P 3


SEMESTER 3

BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3 BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2 BTPM 2113 Statistics & Probabilities P 3 BTPU 2133 Engineering Materials P 3 BTPU 2144 Product Design & Development P 4 BTPU 2123 Mechanics of Machine P 3 BTPU 2112 Occupational Safety & Health

Management P 2


BTPP Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Process & Technology) with Honours


UTeM

47

44


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 4

BLHC 4032 Critical & Creative Thinking W 2 BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum II W 1

BTPU 2213 Quality Control P 3

BTPU 2223 Control Systems P 3

BTPP 2214 CAD CAM K 4

BTPP 2233 Material Selection K 3

BTPP 2223 Measurement & Instrumentation K 3


SHORT SEMESTER 1


SEMESTER 5


W 3

BTPU 3114 Industrial Engineering P 4

BTPU 3123 Thermo Fluid P 3

BTPP 3114 Advanced Machining K 4

BTPP 3123 Materials Testing & Fracture Analysis K 3

BTPP 3133 Advanced Manufacturing Processes K 3


SEMESTER 6

BTPU 3214 Bachelor Degree Project I P 4

BTPG 3212 Technopreneurship P 2

BTPP 3213 Jigs & Fixtures K 3

BTPP 3223 Plastics Technology K 3

BTPP 3233 Joining Technology K 3

BTPP 3243 Lean Manufacturing K 3


SHORT SEMESTER 2



48

45


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 7

BLHL xxx2 Third Language W 2 BTPU 4134 Bachelor Degree Project II P 4

BTPU 4112 Engineering Ethics P 2

BTPU 4123 Sustainable Development P 3

BTPP 4113 Sheet Metal Technology K 3

BTPP 4xx4 Elective K 4


SEMESTER 8 BTPU 4246 Industrial Training P 6

BTPU 4256 Industrial Training Report P 6


TOTAL CREDITS 143


UTeM

49

46


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1

BTPM 1113 Engineering Mathematics P 3 BTPU 1123 Engineering Statics P 3 BTPU 1114 Engineering Drawings & CAD P 4 BTPU 1133 Manufacturing Practices P 3 BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3 BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2


SEMESTER 2

BTPM 1213 Differential Equation P 3 BTPU 1213 Strength of Materials P 3 BTEG 1213 Principle of Electric & Electronic P 3 BTIG 1213 Computer Programming P 3 BTPU 1223 Manufacturing Processes P 3 BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2 BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum I W 1


SEMESTER 3

BTPM 2113 Statistics & Probabilities P 3 BTPU 2133 Engineering Materials P 3 BTPU 2144 Product Design & Development P 4 BTPU 2123 Mechanics of Machine P 3 BTPU 2112 Occupational Safety & Health

Management P 2

BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3 BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2


BTPD Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Product Design) with Honours

46


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 1

BTPM 1113 Engineering Mathematics P 3 BTPU 1123 Engineering Statics P 3 BTPU 1114 Engineering Drawings & CAD P 4 BTPU 1133 Manufacturing Practices P 3 BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3 BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2


SEMESTER 2

BTPM 1213 Differential Equation P 3 BTPU 1213 Strength of Materials P 3 BTEG 1213 Principle of Electric & Electronic P 3 BTIG 1213 Computer Programming P 3 BTPU 1223 Manufacturing Processes P 3 BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2 BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum I W 1


SEMESTER 3

BTPM 2113 Statistics & Probabilities P 3 BTPU 2133 Engineering Materials P 3 BTPU 2144 Product Design & Development P 4 BTPU 2123 Mechanics of Machine P 3 BTPU 2112 Occupational Safety & Health

Management P 2

BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3 BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2


BTPD Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Product Design) with Honours


50

47


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 4

BTPU 2213 Quality Control P 3 BTPU 2223 Control System P 3 BTPD 2213 Computer Aided Manufacturing K 3 BTPD 2224 Advanced Engineering Graphics &

CAD K 4

BTPD 2233 Ergonomics Design K 3 BLHC 4032 Critical & Creative Thinking W 2 BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum II W 1

TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19 SHORT

SEMESTER 1


SEMESTER 5

BTPU 3114 Industrial Engineering P 4 BTPU 3123 Thermo Fluid P 3 BTPD 3113 CNC Technology K 3 BTPD 3123 Design for Manufacturing &

Assembly K 3

BTPD 3133 Rapid Manufacturing K 3 BLHW 3403 English for Professional

Communication W 3


SEMESTER 6

BTPU 3214 Bachelor Degree Project I P 4 BTPG 3212 Technopreneurship P 2 BTPD 3213 Production Tool Design K 3 BTPD 3223 Industrial Design K 3 BTPD 3233 Design of Machine Element K 3 BTPD 3244 Design Project K 4

TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19 SHORT

SEMESTER 2



UTeM

51

48


REQUISITE

SEMESTER 7

BTPU 4134 Bachelor Degree Project II P 4 BTPU 4112 Engineering Ethics P 2 BTPU 4123 Sustainable Development P 3 BTPD 4113 CAE K 3 BTPD 4xx4 Elective K 4 BLHL xxx2 Third Language W 2


SEMESTER 8 BTPU 4246 Industrial Training P 6 BTPU 4256 Industrial Training Report P 6

TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12 TOTAL CREDITS 143


52

SUMMARY OF SUBJECTS


54

50

SEMESTER 1 BTES 1113 LINEAR ALGEBRA LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe the graphs of linear equations and relate graphs of

functions to their equations. 2. express the system of linear equations into a matrix

system. 3. use the matrices methods in solving system of linear

equations. 4. solve the trigonometric equations. 5. apply the properties and the operations of complex

numbers. 6. apply the knowledge of algebra in solving engineering

problems. SYNOPSIS This course will discuss about the functions, graphs, analytic geometry, trigonometry, complex numbers and matrices. REFERENCES 1. Abd. Wahid et al, Intermediate Mathematics, UTM, 2009. 2. Robert Blitzer, Algebra and Trigonometry, Prentice Hall,

2001. 3. Earl W. Swokowski and Jeffrey A. Cole, Algebra and

Trigonometry with Analytic Geometry, 11th Edition, Brooks/Cole, 2005.

BTEU 1112 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. distinguish different engineering drawing format and types. 2. produce geometric, orthographic, isometric, section cut

and detail drawing by using CAD. 3. create in terms of 2D and basic 3D solid modeling using

standard CAD software command tool. 4. recommend an accurate engineering drawing based on

given problem. SYNOPSIS The course concentrates on Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) software. CAD software is being used to produce engineering drawing. The students will be exposed to CAD interface, editing commands, coordinate system, template preparation and layer in order to produce various types of engineering drawing. 3D drawing will also be covered. REFERENCES 1. Mohd Ramzan Zainal, Badri Abd Ghani dan Yahya Samian,

2000, Lukisan Kejuruteraan Asas, UTM, Skudai. 2. Yarwood, A., 2002, An Introduction To AutoCAD 2002,

Prentice Hall, London. 3. McFarlane, R., 1994, Introducing 3D AutoCAD, Edward

Arnold, London. 4. Mark Dix, Paul Riley, 2004, Discovering AutoCAD, Prentice

Hall, New York. 5. Mohd Rizal Alkahari, 2009, Modul Lukisan Berbantu

Komputer, Penerbit Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka, Melaka.

SUBJECT DETAILS FOR JTKE PROGRAMMES


UTeM

55

51

BTEU 1123 ELECTRIC CIRCUITS I LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. understand the fundamental Ohm’s Law and Kircchoff’s

Laws. 2. analyze DC and AC (Steady state) circuits using Mesh and

Nodal analysis. 3. analyze DC and AC (Steady state) circuits using

Superposition, Thevenin, Norton and Maximum Power Transfer Theorems.

4. simulate the operation of electric circuit using computer simulation software.

5. assemble electrical components correctly and measure electrical quantities for DC circuits.

SYNOPSIS This subject introduces the students to Ohm’s Law, Kircchoff’s Laws and use them to calculate current, voltage and power in DC / AC (steady state) circuits. Following this the students will learn the analytical methods namely mesh and nodal analysis. The use of theorems like Thevenin, Norton, Superposition and the Maximum Power Transfer will follow next. The applications of the above tools will cover both dc and ac circuits. This subject will be supported by laboratory works to impart to the students some basic practical skills. REFERENCES 1. K.A. Charles,N.O. Sadiku, Fundamentals of Electric

Circuits,3rd Ed. McGraw Hill 2. Robbins and Miller, Circuit Analysis and Practice, 3rd.Ed.,

Thomson and Delmar. 3. Nilsson and Riedel, Electric Circuits, Prentice Hall.

BTEU 1114 ELECTRONIC DIGITAL & SYSTEM LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completing this subject, students should be able to: 1. describe the common forms of number representation in

digital electronics circuits and differentiate between digital and analog representations.

2. implement simple logic operations using combinational logic circuits.

3. identify, formulate, and solve the logical operation of simple arithmetic and other MSI (Medium Scale Integrated Circuit).

4. apply the concepts of synchronous state machines using flip flop.

5. design and analyze sequential systems in terms of state machines

SYNOPSIS This subject discusses about number systems & codes, Boolean algebra, logic families and the characteristic of logic gates, combinational logic, analysis and design, MSI combinational logic circuit, flip-flops, counter and shif-register, synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuit. Analysis and design of adder, decoder, encoder, multiplexer and demultiplexer. PLD devices such as ROM, PAL, counter and register. REFERENCES 1. Thomas L. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, Prentice Hall, 8th

Ed. 2. Ronald J. Tocci, Neals Widmer & Gregory L.Moss, Digital

Systems: Principles and Applications, Prentice Hall, 9th Ed. 3. Michael A.M. Digital Devices and Systems with PLD

Applications. Delmar Publisher. 4. Terry L.M.Bartelt, Digital Electronics: An Integrated

Laboratory Approach, Prentice Hall.


56

52

BTEA 1113 MEASUREMENT LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. define various measurement and instrument applications

and standards. 2. use the dc/ac meter to measure current, voltage,

resistance, inductance and capacitance. 3. use the oscilloscope to display and calculate the waveforms

of electrical signals. 4. evaluate several functions of sensors/transducers for

instrumentation applications. 5. practice the knowledge profesionally and ethically SYNOPSIS This subject discusses about measurement standard and calibration, unit and dimension, measurement and error, use voltmeter and ammeter using PMMC, AC voltmeter design, analog and digital meters, measurement using oscilloscope, measurement using DC or AC bridges, sensors and transducers, signal and data acquisition. REFERENCES 1. David A. Bell, Electronics Instrumentation and

Measurements, Prentice-Hall, 1994. 2. HS Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill,

1995. Copyright 2004. 3. Thomas E. Kissell, Industrial Electronics, Prentice Hall,1997. 4. Stanley Wolf and Richard F.M Smith, Student Reference

Manual for Electronic Instrumentation Laboratories 2nd edition, Prentice-Hall, 2004.

BLHW 1013 FOUNDATION ENGLISH LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. infer information from various oral texts of different

complexity levels. 2. respond to stimuli and justify reasons individually and in

group discussions on a wide range of contemporary issues. 3. apply information in cloze texts based on passages from

various sources. 4. produce an extended writing and a report based from non-

linear sources.

SYNOPSIS This course is designed to help students improve their proficiency in English language and to communicate effectively in both spoken and written forms. It is tailored to the four components, namely Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing of the Malaysian University English Test (MUET). Grammar component is taught in an integrated approach to build confidence among the learners to become efficient speakers of English in their tertiary education and workplace environment. The Cooperative Learning approach is incorporated in this course. REFERENCES 1. Choo, W.Y., Yeoh, W.T., Yee, S.F. & Nyanaprakasan, S.

(2008). Ace ahead MUET. Selangor : Oxford Fajar. 2. Gaudart, H., Hughes, R., Michael, J. (2007). Towards better

English grammar. Selangor: Oxford Fajar Sdn. Bhd. 3. Koh, S. L (2009). MUET model tests. Selangor: Penerbit

Ilmu Bakti Sdn Bhd. 4. Ponniah, A.L.S.M., Foziah Shaari, Noraini Ahmad Basri,

Noor Azhana Mohamad Hamdan, Doreen Azlina Abdul Rahman.(2009). Stride ahead: Focus on English. Selangor: Pearson Malaysia Sdn.Bhd.

5. Richards, C., Kaur, B. , Ratnam, P. & Rajaretnam, T. (2008). Text MUET: A strategic approach. Selangor: Longman.


UTeM

57

53

BLHL 1012 BAHASA MELAYU KOMUNIKASI 1 LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. respond to information from oral texts and face-to-face

interactional activities. (P3) 2. relate the basic sounds of Bahasa Melayu in terms of

grammar, phonology and oral communication skills related to oneself, family, university and daily activities. (C4, CS)

3. discuss conversational topics in groups.(A2, TS) 4. construct sentences and communicate well in Bahasa

Melayu. (C3)

SYNOPSIS This course introduces the grammar of the language . Students will be exposed to the aspects of grammar, clause, terminology, sentence construction, collective nouns and literature. It is hoped that students will be able to use correct Malay grammar. REFERENCES 1. Daftar Ejaan Rumi Bahasa Malaysia, (2006), Kuala Lumpur,

DBP 2. Daftar Istilah Majlis Bahasa Indonesia-Malaysia, (2005),

Kuala Lumpur, DBP 3. Syed Hussin Al-Attas, (1986) Kesusasteraan Melayu dan

Islam, Kuala Lumpur, Sarjana Enterprise. 4. Umar Junus (1980), Perkembangan Puisi Melayu Moden,

Kuala Lumpur.

BLHL 1112 BAHASA ARAB 1 LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. respond to information from oral texts and face-to-face

interactional activities (P3). 2. relate the basic sounds of Arabic in terms of grammar,

phonology and oral communication skills related to oneself, family, university and daily activities (C3).

3. discuss conversational topics in groups (A2, CS, TS). 4. construct sentences and communicate well in Arabic (C3). SYNOPSIS This basic Arabic course adopts the communicative approach and introduces the phonology, grammar, vocabulary and writing system. Students will be exposed to basic reading materials in the languages. REFERENCES 1. Abdul Masih, G. M. (2001). Mu’jam Kawaid Al-Lugatul

Arobiah Fi Jadawal Walauhat.Maktabah Lubnan. 2. Abdul Rahim (2004). Pembelajaran bahasa Arab bagi

golongan yang bukan Arab, (NO. 1). Kuliah Bahasa Arab Universiti Islam Madinah, Saudi Arabia.

3. Mohd. Rejab I. (2000). Kursus bahasa Arab. Yayasan Dakwah Islamiah Malaysia (YADIM).

4. Yaakob, A. B. (2000). Mausuah An-Nahwu Wassorp Wali’raf. Beirut, Lubnan : DarulIlmi Lilmalayin.

5. Yaakob, M., Mohd Salleh, A. H. & Mahpol, S. (2003). Al-ibtikar, (NO. 1). Sepang, Selangor : Penerbitan Salafi.


58

54

BLHL 1212 BAHASA MANDARIN LEVEL 1 LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. master the Mandarin phonetics, vocabulary, basic

conversation, reading and writing skills and the basics of grammar (C3, CS).

2. respond to information from oral texts (P3). 3. communicate in groups based on daily topics and activities

(A2, CS, TS). 4. form and write simple sentences (C3). SYNOPSIS This course is designed for students who do not have any background in Mandarin. It provides students with the knowledge to enable them to understand and communicate in the oral and written forms. This course encompasses the listening, speaking, reading and writing components. This course aims to help students to obtain enough exposure of the Mandarin phonetics (han yu pin yin).The grammar introduced is related to the language used daily by Chinese. Particular care is also taken to ensure that the complexity of the dialogues is gradually developed using simple to complex sentences. REFERENCE 1. Ang Lay Hoon, Ooi Bee Lee(2008). Basic Chinese For

Everyone. Selangor: Pelanduk Publications.

BLHL 1312 JAPANESE LEVEL 1 LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. use grammar and be able to pronounce correctly and know

the features of Japanese phonology correctly (C3). 2. respond to information from oral texts and participate in

face-to-face interactional activities (P3). 3. communicate in groups based on daily topics and activities

(A2, CS, TS). 4. form and write sentences as well as the basic forms of

Japanese writing in printed form, i.e. Hiragana and Katakana (A3).

SYNOPSIS This course is designed for students who do not have any background in Japanese. It provides students with the knowledge to enable them to understand and communicate in the oral and written forms. This course encompasses the listening, speaking, reading and writing components. The grammar introduced is related to the language used daily by the Japanese. In addition, two types of Japanese language writing systems; Hiragana and Katakana are also introduced. Students are also exposed to elementary reading materials. REFERENCES 1. (1998), Minna no Nihongo 1, 3A Corporation. 2. (1998) Japanese for Young People 1 Kana Workbook,

Association for Japanese-Language Teaching. 3. (1998), Shin Nihongo No Kiso 1 English Translation Asian

Edition. Association for Japanese –Language Teaching. 4. Shin Nihongo No Kiso 1 Grammatical Notes in English (1992

Association for Japanese-Language Teaching.) 5. Srienetwork (1998), Minna no Nihongo 1, Translation &

Grammatical Notes, 3A Corporation, Tokyo. 6. The Association for Overseas Technical Scholarship (AOTS)

(1998), Shin Nihongo no Kiso 1-English Translation, Asian Edition.


UTeM

59

55

SEMESTER 2 BTES 1213 CALCULUS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. find derivatives of algebraic, trigonometric, logarithmic,

and exponential functions. 2. find integrals of some algebraic and exponential functions. 3. use derivative and integrals to solve engineering problems. 4. find the domain and range for multivariable function. 5. use partial derivative to solve mathematical problems. SYNOPSIS This course will discuss about Differentiation, the Application of Differentiation, Integration and Application of Integration, Multivariable function and Partial Derivative. REFERENCES 1. Cochran et. al, Calculus Early Transcendentals, Pearson

Education Inc., 2010. 2. Abd Wahid et. al, Calculus for Science and Engineering

Students, Penerbit UTHM, 2009. 3. Smith& Minton, Calculus (Basic Calculus for Science and

Engineering), Mc.Graw Hill, 2007. 4. Howard Anton et. al, Calculus 8th Edition, John Wiley &

Sons Pte. Ltd, 2006. 5. Ron Larson et. al, Calculus An Applied Approach,

Brooks/Cole Cengage Learning, 2009.

BTEU 1231 ENGINEERING SEMINAR I LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. adopt the nature of engineering technologists prior to the

commencement of engineering technology studies. 2. aware the important of engineering technologists in

industries. 3. aware current issue in electrical engineering industries. 4. contribute creative idea to the engineering technologists’

community. 5. exhibit good communication skills and engineering

conduct. SYNOPSIS In this subject, students will be equipped with several session of engineering seminar given by the industrialists as well as by professional member of engineering bodies. The context of the seminar will be the general engineering issues and career path for engineering technologists. REFERENCES None


60

56

BTEU 1211 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP I LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. familarise with basic electrical components and testing

equipments 2. explain basic concept of electrical wiring, contactor ,relay

and timer control. 3. read and construct circuit from a given domestic wiring and

relay control schematic drawing. 4. present the project results technically in written form or

verbally. 5. abide with the electrical regulation and safety in

performing task SYNOPSIS This subject is required students to carry out practical works in Electrical Workshop in order to gain learning experience in electrical installation works and electronic soldering works. Students will experience the electrical installation works such as constructing circuits layout drawing, electrical components, testing equipments, domestic wiring circuit, relay control circuit and soldering work as well as instilling the moral and ethical values throughout the practical works. Students are also emphasized on the safety and regulatory requirements. Assessment will be conducted on student ability in the functionality, wiring, testing, safety awareness, discipline while carry out the practical tasks. REFERENCES 1. Ir Md Nazri, Aminuddin Aman, Md hairul Nizam,

Engineering Practice: Wiring System & Motor Starter, 2007 2. Md Nasir, Panduan Pendawaian Elektrik, IBSbuku, 2006. 3. Mohd Nazi, Teknologi Pemasangan Elektrik, DBP 4. Akta Bekalan Elektrik (447 pindaan 2001) 5. Ahmad Zaki Shukor, Engineering Practice: Electronics, 2007

BTEE 1213 ELECTRONIC DEVICES LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. explain the concept of semiconductor devices such as

Diode, BJT, JFET MOSFET and Op Amp. 2. analyze and demonstrate the operation of Diode, BJT, JFET,

MOSFET and Op Amp. 3. simulate the operation of semiconductor devices using

simulation software. 4. demonstrate practical competence on semiconductor

devices application circuits. SYNOPSIS Semiconductor devices and pn junction like conductive characteristics, semiconductor carrier, p type, n type and pn junction biasing. Semiconductor diode characteristics, pn junction, Schottky diode, Photodiode, operation of bipolar junction transistor (BJT); common base, common collector and common emitter configurations. Transistor JFET and MOSFET characteristics and biasing. Oeprational amplifier; comparator,inverting, noninverting, summing, differential and integral. Simulation modelling of the diode, BJT, JFET using PSPICE. REFERENCES 1. Thomas Floyd, Electronic Devices, 6th, Edition Prentice Hall,

2005. 2. Bolysted, R., Nashelsky, L., Electronic Devices and Circuit

Theory, 9th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2005. 3. Ali Aminian,M Kazimierczuk, Electronic Devices A Design

Approach, Prentice Hall, 2004. 4. Dhir, S.M., Electronic Components and Materials:

Principles, Manufacture and Maintenance, McGraw Hill, 2000.

5. Reddy S.R., Electronic Devices and Circuits, Alpha Science, 2004.


UTeM

61

57

BTEU 1213 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT II LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completing this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe first order for RL and RC circuits transient

analysis. 2. describe second order for RLC circuits transient analysis. 3. convert time domain into s-domain using Laplace

transforms method and analyze its frequency response. 4. conduct experiments on frequency response of R,L and C

circuits and the characteristics of RLC filters. 5. determine the parameters of two-port network connected

in series, parallel or cascade. SYNOPSIS This subject exposes students to the application of several tools in analyzing electrical circuits, such as the Laplace transform and two ports network . The students are required to use the tools to analyze transient and frequency response in electrical circuit. REFERENCES 1. K.A. Charles, N.O. Sadiku, Fundamentals of Electrical

Circuits, 2nd Ed., McGraw Hill 2. Robbins & Miller, Circuit Analysis Theory and Practice, 3rd

Ed., Thomson & Delmar 3. Nilsson & Riedel, Electric Circuits, Prentice Hall.

BTIG 1213 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe and convert the problems into the appropriate

solutions 2. solve problems using software engineering principles 3. produce code by applying suitable programming structures SYNOPSIS Throughout the course, students will be introduced with basic principles of computers and software development methodology. The course also consists of basic programming principles such as syntax semantic, compiling, and linking. Programming techniques using C++ such as data type and operator, selection, repetition, function, array, file, and pointer are learnt towards the end of this course. REFERENCES 1. Daniel Liang, Y, (2007) Introduction to Programming with

C++, Pearson Education 2. Diane Zak, (2008), An Introduction to Programming with

C++, 5th Ed. 3. Malik, D.S, (2004), C++ Programming: From Problem

Analysis to Program Design, Thomas Online Technology 4. John R.Hubbard, (2007), Programming with C++, McGraw

Hill.


62

58

BTEP 1213 ELECTRIC & MAGNETISM LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. explain the basic concept and the engineering applications

of electromagnetic theory 2. explain the concepts of electrostatics, magnetostatics and

plane-wave propagation. 3. identify the characteristics of Maxwell Equation. 4. solve simple electromagnetic engineering problem. SYNOPSIS This course will discuss mainly about the theory and analysis of some basic electromagnetic waves and fields. It deals with topics regarding vector calculus including transformation of coordinate systems. It is then followed by electrostatics and magnetostatics characteristics such as their static equations, field, potential and boundary conditions. After that, it is continued with Maxwell’s equations and wave propagation; Faraday’s law, uniform plane waves, and skin depth. Finally, the course will be ended with some transmission line topics: Matching, transient, and Smith chart. REFERENCES 1. Ulaby, F., Electromagnetics for Engineers, Pearson

Education, 2005 2. Hayt, W. and Buck, J., Engineering Electromagnetics, 6th

Edition, McGraw Hill International Edition, 2001. 3. Sadiku, M.N.O., Elements of Electromagnetics, 3rd Edition,

Oxford University Press, 2001. 4. Raju, G.S.N., Electromagnetic Field Theory and

Transmission Lines, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2006. 5. Paul, C, Whites, K, and Nasar, S., Introduction to

Electromagnetic Fields, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill,1998.

BLHW 1702 ISLAMIC & ASIAN CIVILIZATIONS (TITAS) LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. explain the concept of civilization studies in order to face

global development in relation to religion, race and nation. 2. elaborate on issues related to world civilization via group

presentations. 3. interrelate the history of the advancement of world

civilizations like the Islamic, Chinese and Indian civilizations via group work.

SYNOPSIS This course provides knowledge on various civilizations. It introduces Islamic civilization as the basis for the Malay and Malaysian civilization. Additionally, issues related to the Chinese and Indian civilizations together with current and future issues of various world civilizations are also discussed. REFERENCES 1. Osman Bakar. (2009). Modul Pengajian Tamadun Islam &

Tamadun Asia. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbit Universiti Malaya. 2. Sazelin Arif, Ahmad Ridzwan Mohd Noor, Mahadi Abu

Hassan, Nooraini Sulaiman & Ali Hafizar Mohammad Rawi. (2007). Tamadun Islam dan Tamadun Asia. Kuala Lumpur: Mc Graw-Hill (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.

3. Hashim Musa. (2005). Pemerkasaan Tamadun Melayu Malaysia Menghadapi Globalisasi Barat. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbit Universiti Malaya. (TITAS)


UTeM

63

59

SEMESTER 3 BEKS 2313 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. find the multivariable function together with its domain

and range 2. evaluate the integrals of the function with double and

triple integral by using various techniques 3. use the techniques of integration to calculate the area and

the volume of the region 4. evaluate vector-valued function 5. apply the knowledge of vector-valued function in physical

and engineering fields SYNOPSIS This course consists of three chapters: Functions of Several Variables, Multiple Integrals and Vector-valued Functions. The syllabus is developed by introducing the concepts of the functions with severable variables, integration and also vector-valued function, followed by learning various techniques in solving the problems and its application in physical and engineering fields. REFERENCES 1. Finney R.L., Weir M.D. and Giordano F.R.,THOMAS’S

CALCULUS 10th Ed,Pearson 2001 Anton H., CALCULUS, 8th Edition, John Wiley 1992.

2. Smith R.T. and Minton R.B., MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS, McGraw-Hill 2002.

3. Steward J., CALCULUS- CONCEPTS AND CONTEXTS, Brooks/Cole, 2nd Edition, 2001

4. Stroud K.A., ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS, 5th Edition, Palgrave Macmillan 2001

5. Muzalna, et. al., ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS 2nd Ed, Pearson 2009

BTEU 2312 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP II LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. familarise with electrical components and testing

equipments 2. explain basic concept of electrical wiring and motor starter. 3. read and construct circuit from a given industrial wiring and

motor starter schematic drawing. 4. able to carry out troubleshooting procedure 5. present the project results technically in written form or

verbally. SYNOPSIS This subject is required students to carry out practical works in Electrical Workshop in order to gain learning experience in three phase wiring system and construct motor starter circuit. Students will experience in wiring and constructing circuit layout drawing, industrial wiring, motor starter and troubleshooting. Students are also emphasized on the safety and regulatory requirements. Assessment will be conducted on student ability in the functionality, wiring, testing, safety awareness, discipline while carry out the practical tasks. REFERENCES 1. Ir Md Nazri, Aminuddin Aman, Md hairul Nizam,

Engineering Practice: Wiring System & Motor Starter 2. Md Nasir, Panduan Pendawaian Elektrik, IBSbuku, 2006. 3. Mohd Nazi, Teknologi Pemasangan Elektrik, DBP 4. Akta Bekalan Elektrik (447 pindaan 2001) 5. Brian Saddan, IEE wiring regulations 3rd edition, Inspection,

Testing and Certification, Newnes, 2001.


64

60

BTEE 2313 ANALOG ELECTRONICS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain the concept of BJT amplifier, active filter, voltage

regulator, oscillator and power amplifier. 2. Analyze the operation and characteristics of BJT amplifier,

active filter, power amplifier and power supply. 3. Simulate the operation of BJT amplifier, active filter and

oscillator using simulation software. 4. Conduct experiments and analyze data of BJT amplifier and

oscillator. SYNOPSIS This course is about the basic principle of analog electronic circuits mostly performing the concepts of amplification. The course subjects contain the concepts of amplifier, BJT as one of devices usually used in amplifiers, small signal amplifier, power amplifiers (class A and class AB), oscillator, active filters and voltage regulators (shunt and series). REFERENCES 1. Bolysted, R., Nashelsky, L., Electronic Devices and Circuit

Theory, 8th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002. 2. Floyd, T., Electronic Devices, 6th, Edition Prentice Hall,

2002. 3. Aliminian, A., Kazimierczuk, M. K., Electronic Devices: A

Design Approach, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004. 4. Russell, L. M., Robert, D., Foundations of Electronics

Circuits and Devices, 4th Edition, Thomson Delmar Learning, 2003.

BTEP 2314 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe the principle of ac voltage and current generation,

RMS and Average values for single and three phases system.

2. explain and analyze the phasor representation for sinusoidal quantity for ac circuits in single and three phases system.

3. demonstrate leading, lagging and unity power-factor concepts through the resistive, inductive and capacitive elements.

4. utilize power-triangle concept in power measurement for balanced and unbalanced load in three phase power system.

5. apply the basic magnetic circuit properties in determining the parameters and performance of single-phase transformer

SYNOPSIS This subject introduces students to topics such as alternating current circuit analysis, phasor representation, RMS value, average power, reactive power, active power, apparent power power factor and power factor correction. Magnetic circuit, construction and operation of transformer, generation of three phase voltage, balanced and unbalanced three phase load and also voltage, current, power and power factor calculation. REFERENCES 1. Hughes, Electrical Technology, 10th ed., Prentice Hall,

2008. 2. Bird, J.O., Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology,

Newnes, 1997. 3. Huges, E.,Teknologi Elektrik, Longman Malaysia, 1994. 4. M.Hendra, Electrical Technology Solution Manual, UTeM,

2008


UTeM

65

61

BTCG 2313 STATIC & MECHANICS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. State the basic concept of force and material mechanics. 2. Analyze the force on a mechanical system. 3. Understand and elaborate the forces on a mechanical

system. SYNOPSIS Statics: Introduction to basic concepts in statics and mechanics as a study of physical sciences, system of units, scalars and vectors, free body diagram, forces system resultants and moments, equilibrium of a particle, equilibrium of a rigid body, structural analysis, center of gravity and centroid. Mechanics: Introduction to various type of structures, type of supports, concepts and definition of stress, strain, torsion, shear force and bending moment, theory on axial loading, torsion, pure bending and beam deflection, and combination of loads. REFERENCES 1. Hibbeler R. C., 2004, Statics and Mechanics of Materials, SI

Edition, Prentice Hall, New York. 2. Riley W. F, Sturges L. D. Morris, D. H., 2002, Statics and

Mechanics of Materials: An Integrated Approach, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York.

3. Hibbeler, R. C., 2004, Engineering Mechanics- Statics, 3rd SI Edition, Prentice Hall, New York

4. Meriam J.L and Kraige L. G., 2003, Engineering Mechanics-Statics SI Version, 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York.

5. Gere J. M., 2004, Mechanics of Materials, Thompson. 6. Hibbeler R. C., 2004, Mechanics of Materials, SI Edition,

Prentice Hall.

BLHW 2403 TECHNICAl ENGLISH LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. At the end of the course, students should be able to: 2. distinguish the use of tenses, run-ons, fragments, modifiers

and parallelism. 3. summarise and paraphrase main ideas. 4. write a proposal as well as progress and project reports in a

group. 5. organise and present project report in groups. SYNOPSIS This course is content-based in nature and aims to equip students with the necessary language skills required to write various reports. As this course prepares students for the mechanics of the different genres of writing, the emphasis is on proposal, progress and project reports by employing Student-Centred Learning approach. It also introduces students to the elements of presentation as well as provides them with the necessary grammar skills in writing. REFERENCES 1. Indra Devi, S. & Zanariah Jano. (2008). Technical report

writing. Kuala Lumpur: Pearson Prentice Hall. 2. Anderson, P.V. (2007). Technical communication: A reader-

centred approach (6th ed.). California: Wadsworth Publishing.

3. Finkelstein, L. J. (2007). Pocket book of technical writing for engineers and scientists (3rd ed.) New York: McGraw Hill.

4. Hart, H. (2008). Introduction to engineering communication (2nd ed.). London: Prentice Hall.

5. Krishnan, L.A., Jong. R., Kathpalia, S.S. & Tan, M.K. (2006). Engineering your report: From start to finish (2nd ed.). Singapore: Prentice Hall.

6. Sharimllah Devi, R., Indra Devi, S. & Nurlisa Loke Abdullah. (2011). Grammar for technical writing. Selangor:Pearson Hall.


66

62

SEMESTER 4 BEKS 2413 STATISTICS AND APPLICATIONS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Create and interpret different distribution graphs including

histograms, ogives, and scatter plots by using real data from engineering experiments.

2. Conduct hypothesis testing for population means and proportions for a single population.

3. Find the most suitable sample size that can be applied in order to test the reliability of a engineering product.

4. Find the relationship between independent and dependent variables that involve in engineering process using the concept of regression and correlation.

5. Construct the Control Charts for Variables and Attributes as one of the Statistical Process Control (SPC) tools.

6. Solve statistical problems that are involved in engineering field.

SYNOPSIS In this subject the connection between statistics and the distribution parameters can be used to solve problems in particle size distribution for missile fuel, measurement errors in engineering problems, time to failure for manufactured machines, the production of a products or the failure in systems of electronic components. The real data from the engineering experiments will be used to measure the reliability and capability of a product by using statistical approach for example SPC such as the measure of central tendency and the measure of dispersion. In the topic of regression and correlation, the nature of linear models can be applied to see the relationship between the parameters involve in engineering process. REFERENCES 1. K. M. Ramachandran and Chris P. Tsokos, Mathematical

Statistics with Applications, Elsavier Academic Press, 2009. 2. Dennis Wackerly, William Mendenhall, , Emeritus ,Richard

L. Scheaffer, Mathematical Statistics with Applications, International Edition 7e, BrooksCole, 2008.

3. Prem S.Mann, Introductory Statistics Using Technology, 5th Edition, John Wiley.

4. Johannes L., Robert V. Hogg, Applied Statistics for Engineers and Physical Scientists, 3rd Edition, Pearson, Prentice Hall.

BTEA 2424 EMBEDDED SYSTEM LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Describe and explain a microcontroller’s (PIC16F877A)

architecture, peripherals subsystem and its operations. 2. use programming software to modify internal registers,

perform input/output tasks and compile programming codes.

3. conduct and control mechatronic components such as DC Motor and sensors.

4. simulate the programs built with a simulation software and determine the success of the program

5. develop a microcontroller based system and integrate the program with hardware and troubleshoot the software and hardware issues.

6. function in team effectively as well as leadership knowledge

SYNOPSIS Basic concept of microcontroller and the difference between microcontroller and microprocessor. Microcontrollers memory map, compiler, programming language and software. Stack, subrutines, interrupt and reset. Application of programming with input and outputs such as switches and ‘Light Emitting Diodes’, DC motors, stepper motors and photosensors. Students will apply microcontroller with simple mechatronic system. REFERENCES 1. Peatman, J.B., Design with PIC microcontrollers, 8th ed.,

Prentice Hall, 1998. 2. http://www.mikroe.com/eng/chapters/view/1/introductio

n-world-of-microcontrollers/ (online PIC book) 3. Milan Verle., PIC Microcontroller, Mikroelektronika 4. Milan Verle., PIC Microcontroller – Programming in C,

Mikroelektronika 5. Iovine, J.,PIC Microcontroller Project Book, McGraw-Hill,

USA 2000. 6. Mazidi, A. M., McKinlay, R. D. and Causey, D., PIC

Microcontroller and Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C for PIC18, Pearson Education, 2008

7. Datasheet PIC16F877 & PIC16F877A available at www.microchip.com


UTeM

67

63

BTEA 2413 CONTROL SYSTEM I LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe the basic features and configuration of control

systems. 2. apply the mathematical model for electrical, mechanical

and electromechanical linear time invariant systems. 3. apply appropriate techniques to perform block diagram

reduction of multiple subsystems in order to obtain its transfer function.

4. Analyze the transient and steady state performance in time domain for first and second order systems.

5. Apply the Routh Hurtwitz criterion to determine stability of a system.

6. Apply other resources and ideas to complete the task given SYNOPSIS This subject will discuss about the concepts in control system; open and closed loop system; transfer function; signal flow graphs; feedback control system; hydraulic and pneumatic process control systems; modeling for electrical system, mechanical system, electromechanical system, speed control system and process control system such as current, temperature and flow; using MATLAB and Simulink. REFERENCES 1. Nise, S Norman, Control Systems Engineering, 3th Edition,

John Wiley & Sons Inc., United State of America, 2000. 2. Ogata, Katsuhiko, Modern Control Engineering, 4th Edition,

Prentice Hall, 2002. 3. Bishop, Dorf, Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,

Prentice Hall, 2005. 4. Gopal, M, Control Systems: Principles and Design, 2nd

Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2003.

BTEE 2413 ELECTRICAL MACHINE LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand basic type of electrical machines, physical

construction and equivalent electrical circuit diagrams. 2. Identify the difference of physical construction and working

principles between dc machines and ac machines; and synchronous machines and asynchronous machines.

3. Run some specific test for electrical and mechanical parameters determination.

4. Investigate the performance of electric machines. SYNOPSIS Introduction to DC and AC type of electrical machines which cover physical construction and equivalent electrical circuit diagrams. The machine performances like torque, speed and efficiency are investigated. The starting and control techniques are also investigated for a better machine selection of appropriate application. REFERENCES 1. Stephen J. Chapman, Electric Machinery Fundamentals, 4th

ed., McGraw-Hill, 2005. 2. B.S. Guru, H.R.Hiziroglu, Electric Machinery And

Transformers, Oxford University Press, 2001. 3. Charles I. Hubert, Electric Machines: Theory, Operation,

Applications, Adjustment, and Control, 2nd ed., Prentice Hall, 2002.

4. Fitzgerald, Kingsley, Umans, Electric Machinery, 6th ed., McGraw-Hill, 2003.

5. Theodore Wildi, Electric Machines, Drives & Power System, 5th ed., Prentice Hall, 2002.


68

64

BTCG 2413 FLUID MECHANICS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. define fluid and its properties. 2. apply fluid mechanics equations in solving fluid statics and

dynamics problems. 3. analyze stability of an object submersed in a fluid. 4. respond to the procedure that has been given in laboratory 5. practice fluid mechanic concepts, analyse and interpret

data accordingly and to report the results. SYNOPSIS Introduction to this subject is about the basic physical properties of fluids. Then it covers the definition of pressure and head. Next it followed by derivation of hydrostatic equation and its application in pressure measurement, static forces analysis on immersed surface and buoyancy analysis. For fluid dynamics, it started with introduction to fluid dynamics and fluid flow analysis. Then it is continued by derivation of flow equations, the application of energy equation and Bernoulli equation in the calculation of flow velocity, discharge, and head lost in piping systems. The last topic for this subject is dimensional analysis and its application. REFERENCES 1. Yuan, C.S., 2006, Fluid Mechanics I, Pearson Prentice Hall,

Malaysia. 2. Munson, B. R., Young D. F. and Okiishi, T. H., 2006,

Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, 5th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Asia.

3. Som, S. K. and Biswas, G., 2004, Introduction to Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines, 2nd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.

4. Douglas, J. F., Gasiorek J. M. and Swaffield, J. A., 2001, Fluid Mechanics, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, Spain.

5. Cengel, Y. A. and Cimbala, J. M., 2006, Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, International Edition, McGraw-Hill, Singapore.

6. Streeter, V. L. and Wylie, E. B., 1983, Fluid Mechanics, First SI Metric Ed., McGraw-Hill, Singapore.

7. Potter, M.C. and Wiggert, D.C. with Hondzo, M. and Shih, T.I-P. , 2001, Mechanics of Fluids, 3rd ed., Brooks/Cole, Pacific Grove, CA USA.

BLHW 1732 MALAYSIAN SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. interrelate the social process with economic

transformation in the national development agenda. 2. practice the qualities of truthworthy leadership in group

activities. 3. reflect on the role and responsibilities of national

development for human well-being via group work. SYNOPSIS This course discusses the process of social and economic changes in the Malaysian development agenda. The awareness of this developmental aspect is important to ensure that Malaysia is capable of addressing global challenges. At the same time, it also aims to develop quality human capital and mindset. REFERENCES 1. Siti Rohana Omar, Mohd Taib Dora, Nor Fazilah Abd Hamid,

Anidah Robani, Norliah Kudus, Hanipah Hussin &Izaidin Abd Majid. (2009). Modul Pengajaran Transformasi Sosioekenomi Malaysia: Dimensi dan Cabaran. Cetakan Dalaman UTeM

2. Kassim Thukiman. (2007). Malaysia Perspektif Sejarah dan Politik. Skudai: Penerbit UTM.

3. Ahmad Shukri Mohd. Nain & Rosman Md Yusoff. (2007). Konsep, Teori, Dimensi dan Isu Pembangunan. Skudai: Penerbit UTM.


UTeM

69

65

BLHW 1722 PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. explain the concept of science and technology in ancient

and current civilizations as well as their impact on the development of philosophy of science and technology via group presentations.

2. elaborate the concept of knowledge, philosophy of science and technology from the Islamic perspective appropriately.

3. interrelate the principles, influences and impact of science and technology in the context of Islamic civilization and nation development via group activities.

SYNOPSIS This course discusses the concept of knowledge, philosophy of science and technology according to the perspectives of Muslim and Western scholars. The concept and achievements of Islamic civilization are also disscussed because science and technology is a phenomenon which develops in line with the development of society and its environment. REFERENCES 1. Radzuan Nordin, Ahmad Ridzwan Mohd Noor, Norliah

Kudus, Nor Azilah Ahmad, Shahrulanuar Mohamed, Ali Hafizar Mohamad Rawi, Ismail Ibrahim & Mahadi Abu Hassan. (2008). Modul Falsafah Sains dan Teknologi. Cetakan Dalaman UTeM.

2. Yahaya Jusoh & Azhar Muhammad. (2007). Pendidikan Falsafah Sains Al-Quran. Skudai: Penerbit UTM Press.

3. Osman Bakar. (2008). Tauhid dan Sains: Perspektif Islam Tentang Agama dan Sains Edisi Kedua. Bandung: Pustaka Hidayah.

SEMESTER 5 BTEU 3531 ENGINEERING SEMINAR II LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Upon completing this subject, the student should be able

to 2. identify the route and process to professional engineer

correctly . 3. recognize the conception of sustainability engineering and

practice in electrical field suitably. 4. apply the concept of sustainable development in working

field responsibly. 5. expose to the new requirement of manufacturing practice

and process in electrical field properly. 6. exhibit the soft skill such as communication skill. SYNOPSIS This subject presents the procedure and process of route to professional engineer. The students will expose to the concepts an idea of renewable energy and also concepts of sustainability development of electrical engineering and its practice. The subject covered the idea of new requirement of manufacturing process and practice in order to expose student the basic knowledge to apply in real working field. There are various issues of sustainable engineering will be covered and discussed. REFERENCES None


70

66

BTEA 3513 CONTROL SYSTEM II LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. interpret the knowledge of basic control systems. 2. use the root locus technique in solving control system

problems. 3. design PI, PD, PID, Lag, Lead and Lag-Lead controller via

root locus technique. 4. use frequency response technique in solving control system

problems. 5. design Lag, Lead and Lag-Lead compensator via frequency

response technique. 6. differentiate and evaluate the techniques in designing

controller for a system. 7. apply other resources and ideas to complete the task given SYNOPSIS This subject will discuss about the control systems engineering; analysis in time and frequency domain responses; stability in time and frequency domain; design in time domain (root locus) and frequency domain (Bode plot). REFERENCES 1. Bishop, Dorf, Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,

Prentice Hall, 2005. 2. Nise, S Norman, Control Systems Engineering, 3th Edition,


Prentice Hall, 2002.

BTEU 3523 DATA COMMUNICATIONS & COMPUTER NETWORK LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. explain and describe the concept of computer system

network, communication model, network models, network components, network topology, network technology and applications.

2. explain, describe and apply the coding schemes, transmission modes, transmission methods, communication modes, error detection methods, flow control, and error control in a network.

3. explain and describe the OSI model, IEEE 802.x model, transmission media, network services, repeater, bridges, router and gateways.

4. explain describe and apply the network operation and technology of LAN, wireless LAN, WAN and routing.

5. design, install, configure and troubleshoot a wired and wireless network.

SYNOPSIS Topics covered are: Introduction to Computer Network, Data Communications, Network Structure, Local Area Network, Wide Area Network, Interconnection, and Internetworking REFERENCES 1. W.Stalling, Data and Data Communications, 8th Edition,

Prentice Hall, 2007. 2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communication and

Networking, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2007. 3. Douglas E. Corner, Computer Networks and Internet with

Internet Application, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004. 4. William Stallings, Computer Network with Internet Protocol

and Technology, Prentice Hall, 2004. 5. William A. Shay, Understanding Communication and

Network, 3rd Edition, Brooks/Cole Thomson Learning, 2004.

6. Micheal A. Gallo, Computer Communication and Networking Technology, Brooks/Cole Thomson Learning, 2002.

7. Edmond Zahedi, Digital Data Communication, Prentice Hall 2002.


UTeM

71

67

BTEP 3513 POWER ENGINEERING I LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Upon completing this subject, the student should be able

to: 2. formulate the mathematical models of basic power system

components. 3. analyze the power system performance using the power

system model and per-unit quantities. 4. explain the basic concept of electrical power protection. 5. demonstrate practical competence on power system

equipments such as generator, transformer and transmission line.

SYNOPSIS This subject gives the overall components of power system to the students without going into detail. The power system components will be modelled for the analysis purposes. The topics include per-unit quantities, transmission line, transformer, synchronous generator, power flows, symmetrical components, power protection and power system stability. REFERENCES 1. Hadi Saadat, Power System Analysis, 2nd ed., Mc-Graw Hill,

2004. 2. William D. Stevenson, Jr., Elements of Power System

Analysis, 4th ed., Mc-Graw Hill, 1998. 3. Grainger and Stevenson Jr, Power System Analysis, Mc-

Graw Hill, 1994. 4. Arthur R. Bergen, Power System Analysis, 2nd ed., Prentice

Hall, 2000 5. Glover, Sarma, Power System Analysis and Design, 3rd ed.,

Thomson Learning, 2002.

BTEA 3524 PLC & APPLICATION LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, student should be able to: 1. describe the functionality of each components of PLC 2. write and execute a PLC programming language that used

in industrial application 3. execute a PLC connection to input and output devices 4. integrates the PLC hardware and software 5. design a simple and complete automation system using PLC 6. identify, analyze and solve critically the problems SYNOPSIS This subject will expose students with knowledges and skills of PLC including its definition, main hard components, PLC programming languages, interfacing PLC with computers, integrates PLC hardware and software to design a simple automation system. REFERENCES 1. D. Petruzella, Frank Programmable Logic Controller, 3rd

Ed., McGraw Hill, 2005 2. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems &

Computer-Integrated Manufacturing, 3rd Ed., 2008 3. Morris, S.B, Programmable Logic Controllers, Prentice Hall,

2000. 4. Parr, E.A, Programmable Controllers: An Engineer’s Guide,

2nd Ed., Newness 1999 5. Rohner, PLC: Automation with programmable logic

controllers, MacMillan Press, 1996.


72

68

BTEA 2413 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. explain the principles and elements of data acquisition

system 2. apply the right sensors/transducers for data acquisition

system 3. design signal conditioning circuit for data acquisition

system 4. evaluate the A/D and D/A techniques, interfaces standards

and types of data presentation 5. exhibit communication and critical thinking skills on

specialized, reliability and economics topics in instrumentation

SYNOPSIS This subject emphasize on instrumentation elements for complete data acquisition system such as sensors & transducers, signal conditioning & processing, A/D and D/A conversion, interfacing standards and data presentation. This subject also touches on some specialized instrumentation, reliability & economics in instrumentation and also introduces instrumentation for industrial and process control application. REFERENCES 1. Curtis D.johnson, Process Control Instrumentation

Technology, 8th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2006. 2. H S Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, 2nd Ed., Mc Graw Hill,

2004. 3. John P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems, 4th

Ed., Prentice Hall, 2005. 4. N. Mathivanan, PC-Based Instrumentation Concepts and

Practice, 1st Ed., Prentice Hall of India, 2007.

BLHW 3403 ENGLISH FOR PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of the course, students should be able to: 1. select and apply the appropriate tenses, parallelism, direct

and indirect speech, transitional markers and misplaced modifiers.

2. differentiate between facts and opinions, and use vocabulary relevant to its context.

3. respond to interviews and participate in meetings. 4. demonstrate communication and oral presentation skills. 5. produce resume, application letter and recommendation

report. SYNOPSIS This course is designed to develop oral communication, as well as enhance students’ level of English literacy which will be beneficial to their professional careers. It also aims to equip students with the communication skills necessary for the workplace. It complements the skills taught in BLHW 3403. Grammar will be taught implicitly in the course content. Students will acquire effective presentation skills as well as gain experience in mock interviews prior to seeking employment. The Student-Centred Learning approach is employed in teaching and learning process. REFERENCES 1. Azar, B. S. & Hagen, S. A. (2006). Basic English grammar.

New York: Pearson Education. 2. Casher, C. C. & Weldon, J. (2010). Presentation excellence:

25 tricks, tips and techniques for professional speakers and trainers. USA: CLB Publishing House.

3. Chin, F. C. J., Soo, K. S. E. & R. Manjuladevi. (2010). English for professional communication: Science and engineering. Singapore: Cenggage Learning Asia Pte Ltd.

4. Khoo, M. S. L, Razilah Abdul Rahim & E. Rajendraan (2006). Communication at the work place. Melaka: Jabatan Bahasa dan Komunikasi, UTeM.


UTeM

73

69

SEMESTER 6 BTEU 3612 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY & HEALTH LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. explain clearly the industrial safety, occupational health

hazards in workplaces environment. 2. apply the appropriate methods and tools to eliminate or

reduce the occupational health hazards. 3. conduct basic safety assessments using methods and tools

that they have learned. 4. measure and demonstrate a safe, feasible occupational

health and conducive working environment. SYNOPSIS This subject is a two-credit offering with no prerequisites. This subject provides the students with the rationale for providing an occupationally safe and healthy work environment. These skills are needed to be able to work effectively in the area of human resources and employee development as well as industrial relations since workers have been provide by law with specific safety and health rights. Generally, this subject overwhelming industrial safety, occupational health and environment. Through industrial safety, students will be explained the development, objectives and importance of industrial safety to industries. Students also will learn on how to manage hazards in working environment. Lastly, occupational health exposes students on how to manage workers’ health. REFERENCES 1. Goetsch, D. L. (2004). Occupational safety and health for

technologists, engineers, and managers (5th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. ISBN: 0131137646

2. Reese, C. D. (2003). Occupational health and safety management, a practical approach. Lewis Publishers, A CRC Press Company. ISBN: 1566706203

3. Anton, T. J. (1989). Occupational safety and health management (2nd ed.). New York, NY: McGraw-Hill, Inc.

4. Undang-undang Malaysia, (2005). Akta keselamatan dan kesihatan pekerjaan 1994 dan peraturan-peraturan, MDC Publishers Sdn Bhd.

5. Akta Kilang dan Jentera (Akta 139) , (1967). Department of Occupational Safety and Health, Malaysia.

BTEA 3613 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTIC LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. identify the configuration and components of industrial

robots system. 2. apply the forward, inverse and dynamic kinematics

equations and computer control for industrial robotics systems.

3. implement specific robotic programming and simulations for industrial robots used in industrial automation systems.

4. identify robotics technologies in an industrial environment SYNOPSIS Introduction to robotics, classification of robots, basic components of robot systems, basic concepts of kinematics and dynamics, mechanical structure of robot systems, robot drives and motion control system using stepper motor, servo motor, servo amplifier and pneumatics, sensory devices such as position, force and torque, tactile, basic robot programming, robot simulations and industrial robot applications. Experiments will include application of MATLAB, simple robot development and robot programming and simulation using a real industrial robot. REFERENCES 1. K.H. Low, Robotics: Principles and Systems Modeling, 2nd

edition, Prentice Hall, 2004 2. Fuller, J.L., Robotics: Introduction, Programming and

Projects, 2nd ed., Prentice Hall, 1998. 3. Craig, J.J., Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control,

2nd ed., Addison Wesley Longman, 1989. 4. Man Zhilong, Robotics, 2nd. edition, Prentice Hall, 2005


74

70

BTEE 3613 ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR & DRIVE LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify power electronics conversion in DC drives. 2. Model and design a DC drive systems 3. Explain the principles of Induction motor drives 4. Design the scalar control of induction motor drives 5. Explain the use of electrical and mechanical actuator in

motor drive systems SYNOPSIS This subject will introduce to the electrical, mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic electrical actuator & drive system. This subject wills discussion on the definition, symbols, system, circuits, operation and component of the pneumatic, hydraulic and mechanical actuator system. Another part of this subject will covers on the electrical drive for DC and AC motor. It focuses on the fundamental of the electrical drive including element, block diagram, feedback, load characteristics and motor sizing. In addition special discussion on the four quadrants operation with chopper fed dc driver for DC motor drive and three phase drive system. REFERENCES 1. Electric Drives – an integrative approach, Ned Mohan,

MNPERE, Minneapolis 2. Power Electronic Control of AC Motors – JMD Murphy & FG

Turbull, Pergamon Press 3. Electric motor drives, R. Krishnan, Prentice–Hall, 2001 4. Vector Control and dynamics of AC drives, DW Novotny &

TA Lipo, Oxford Science & Publications 5. Fundamental of Electrical Drives – GK Dubey, Narosa

Publishing House 6. Power Electronics and AC drives – BK Bose, Prentice-Hall 7. Control of electrical drives, W Leonhard, Springer

BTEA 3623 PNEUMATIC & HYDRAULIC LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. define the fundamental physical principles of

pneumatic/hydraulic. 2. select components for pneumatic/hydraulic systems. 3. demonstrate the operation of basic pneumatic/hydraulic

and electro pneumatic/hydraulic systems. 4. control the movement, pressure and flow in

pneumatic/hydraulic systems. 5. Install and test the pneumatic/hydraulic and electro

pneumatic/hydraulic application circuits. 6. Communicate effectively in a team in finding alternative

solution of a problem. SYNOPSIS This subject introduces the students to industrial fluid power, which is consisting of hydraulic and pneumatic system. This course is taught by practical application approach (theory and practice) in the laboratory session. Lab equipment is provided that allows the students to design, build, and test most of the circuits discussed in class. Mini project or project oriented problem-based learning is incorporated in this subject. REFERENCES 1. Nise, S Norman, Control Systems Engineering, 3rd Edition,


Prentice Hall, 2002. 3. Bishop, Dorf, Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,

Prentice Hall, 2005. 4. Gopal, M, Control Systems: Principles and Design, 2nd

Edition, McGraw Hill, 2003.


UTeM

75

71

BTEU 3613 FINAL YEAR PROJECT I LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, student should be able to 1. identify and describe the problem and scope of project

clearly. 2. select, plan and execute a proper methodology in problem

solving. 3. work independently and ethically. 4. present the preliminary results in written and in oral format

effectively. SYNOPSIS This subject is the first part of the Final Year Project. In this subject, students are expected to propose a project under a supervision of a lecturer. Student needs to carry out the project, presents the proposed project and submits a progress report at the end of semester. REFERENCES Depending on each student project’s references.

BLHW 2712 ETHNIC RELATIONS LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. elaborate on the challenges of cultural plurality and ethnic

relations in Malaysia via group work (P2, LS) 2. interrelate the role of cultural plurality, society and ethnic

groups in the Malaysian unity context (C3, TS) 3. share learning experiences on the issues of socio-culture

appropriately (A3, EM). SYNOPSIS This course focuses on the basic concepts of culture and ethnic relations in Malaysia. It exposes students to ethnic relations in the development of the Malaysian society. Besides, this course aims to give an understanding of the global challenges facing ethnic and cultural relations at the Malaysian level. REFERENCES 1. Shamsul Amri Baharuddin. (2007). Modul Hubungan Etnik.

UPENA, KPTM. 2. Abdul Aziz Bari. (2008). Perlembagaan Malaysia. Shah

Alam: Arah Publication Sdn. Bhd. 3. Mohd Taib Hj Dora. (2005). Liberalisasi Komuniti. Melaka:

Penerbit Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka.


76

72

BLHL 4032 CRITICAL & CREATIVE THINKING LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of the course, students should be able to: 1. discuss basic principles of critical and creative thinking skills

in solving daily tasks. 2. apply the tools of critical and creative thinking in problem

solving and technical innovation. 3. respond in group discussions on issues related to the

development of critical and creative thinking skills. 4. solve problems in case studies relating to contemporary

issues. SYNOPSIS This course is designed to give students an introduction to the principles of critical and creative thinking, and problem-solving. Students will be exposed to the roles of the right brain and left brain, mental determination, elements of critical and creative thinking as well as problem solving. This subject is conducted in accordance with the concept of problem-based learning (PBL). REFERENCES 1. Aziz Yahya, Aida Nasirah Abdullah, Hazmilah Hasan, Raja

Roslan Raja Abd Rahman. (2011) Critical and Creative Thinking Module 2. Melaka. Penerbit UTeM

2. Buzan, T. & Buzan, B. (2006). The Mind Map Book, Essex: BBC Active, Pearson Education.

3. Claxton, G. & Lucas, B. (2007). The Creative Thinking Plan, London: BBC Books.

4. Reichenbach, W. (2000). Introduction to Critical Thinking,McGraw-Hill College.

SEMESTER 7 BTEU 4713 ENGINEERING ETHICS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. understand and appreciate the moral and ethical theories

leading to engineering ethics. 2. familiarize themselves with codes of ethics and inter-relate

them through examples of case studies. 3. understand and be aware of professional and ethical

responsibilities. 4. manage and resolve ethical problems in

client/engineer/society relationship in carrying out duty as a professional engineer.

5. review case studies and analyze the situations that have occurred.

SYNOPSIS Introduction to scope and goal of engineering ethics. Moral thinking and ethical theory. The laws and ethical theory in engineering practice. The responsibility of providing service. safety and health. The rights of engineers. Techniques of managing and resolving problems and conflicts. The engineer and global issues. REFERENCES 1. Martin M.W., Schinzinger R. Ethics in Engineering, 4th

edition, McGraw Hill, 1996. 2. Charles B. Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, 3rd edition,

Pearson Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. Charles E.H., Michael S.P., Michael J.R., Engineering Ethics:

Concepts and Cases, 2nd edition, Thomson, 2000. 4. Akta Pendaftaran Jurutera 1967. 5. Akta Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerja 1994. 6. Akta Kualiti Alam Sekitar 1974.


UTeM

77

73

BTEA 4713 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. define production and manufacturing systems as well as

describing their main components respectively. 2. describe and analyze manufacturing operations besides

manufacturing models and metrics as well as well as applying their dedicated tools, where applicable.

3. list and describe manufacturing systems classification and product design process.

4. define and explain FMS, CIM, SCADA, HMI, CAD/CAM and TPM systems that are commonly applicable to manufacturing industries.

5. design and analyze an example of manufacturing system used in industry using SCADA/HMI application software.

SYNOPSIS Introduction to industrial field topics such as production system, manufacturing system, manufacturing operation, production concept and mathematical models as well as manufacturing operation costs besides FMS, CIM, SCADA, HMI, CAD/CAM and TPM systems with the complete descriptions and relevant analysis where those systems are integrated in building modern automated systems in manufacturing industries. REFERENCES 1. Groover, M. P., “Automation, Production Systems, and

Computer-Integrated Manufacturing”, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2007.

2. Groover, M. P., “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes, and Systems”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2006.

3. Kalpakjian, S. & Schmid, S., “Manufacturing, Engineering, and Technology”, 5th Ed., Addison-Wesley, 2005.

4. Blank, S. C., Chiles, V., Lissaman, A. J., and Marting, S. J., “Principles of Engineering Manufacture”, 3rd Ed., Arnold, 1996.

5. Bedworth D. D., Henderson M. R., and Wolfe P. M., “Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing”, McGraw-Hill, 1991.

BTEA 4733 INDUSTRIAL PROCESS CONTROL LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe the process variables in the process control

industries 2. evaluates the process variables, elements and instruments

for pressure, temperature, level, flow and analytical process

3. analyze the control loops characteristics in the process control industries

4. apply an appropriate controllers for process control industries

5. apply an automation technologies for process control such as SCADA and DCS

6. identify, analyze, and solve critically the technical problems SYNOPSIS This subject will cover topic on introduction to industrial process control including basic terms and diagrams. It’s also emphasized on process variables, elements, and instruments for temperature, level and flow of process control. The right controllers for process control are discussed and control loops in process control are analyzed. Applications of automation technologies such as SCADA and DCS for process control are also explained. REFERENCES 1. Curtis D.johnson, Process Control Instrumentation

Technology, 8th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2006. 2. H S Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, 2nd Ed., Mc Graw Hill,

2004. 3. John P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems, 4th

Ed., Prentice Hall, 2005. 4. N. Mathivanan, PC-Based Instrumentation Concepts and

Practice, 1st Ed., Prentice Hall of India, 2007. 5. David A. Bell, Electronics Instrumentation and

Measurements, Prentice-Hall, 1994.


78

74

BTEA 4723 MACHINE VISION LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. recognize the application areas, restrictions, and structure

of machine vision systems 2. able to operate on digital images: capture them and extract

basic visual information from images 3. analyze and apply the basics of machine learning and

approaches to decision making using a computer. 4. able to use of image processing and image understanding

tools 5. apply machine vision in industrial automation system SYNOPSIS The aim of this course is to introduce the theory, applications and techniques of machine vision to students, and to provide students with an understanding of the problems involved in the development of machine vision systems. The course begins with low level processing and works its way up to the beginnings of image interpretation. This approach is taken because image understanding originates from a common database of information. The learner will be required to apply their understating of the concepts involved through the process of building applications that manipulate bi-level and greyscale images through the use of suitable packages (e.g. Matlab or OpenCV). REFERENCES 1. Rafael C.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods 2002. Digital Image

Processing, Prentice Hall 2. Jain, R. J., R. Kasturi and B. G. Schunck. 1995. Machine

Vision. New York: McGraw-Hill, Inc. 3. Davis, E. R. 1997. Machine Vision. 2nd Ed. San Diego,

California: Academic Press

BTEU 4985 FINAL YEAR PROJECT II LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. collect, analyze and present data into meaningful

information using relevant tools 2. plan, design and execute project implementation

systematically 3. work independently and ethically 4. present the results in written and in oral format effectively 5. identify basic entrepreneurship skills in project

management SYNOPSIS This subject is the second part of Projek Sarjana Muda I, in second semester. Students will continue their project from BTEU 4713 during the second semester, and they should accomplish the projects completely either in hardware, software or both of them. Students needs to write-up a good final report (in thesis format), as a part of the subject’s assessment. REFERENCES Depend on each student project’s references.


UTeM

79

75

BPTU 1032 TECHNO ENTREPRENEURSHIP LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of the subject, students should be able to: 1. illustrate the importance of technology and

entrepreneurship including recognizing business opportunities for new venture creation.

2. practice appropriate traits and roles in pursuit of a technopreneurial career

3. evaluate and decide on the appropriate technology modifications relevant to business venture.

SYNOPSIS The course will facilitate students with the key technopreneurship motivation and skills to inculcate technopreneurial behaviours and competencies, incorporating theories and practices for new venture creation. Other topics include familiarizing students with the concepts, issues and techniques of venture creation and technopreneurship. It will also assist them in understanding issues concerning marketing and strategic management, risks and uncertainties, business sustainability and explore growth opportunities by going international. Simulations, case studies, industrial visits, and practicum will enhance students’ knowledge and skills in recognizing opportunities, attaining competitive edge and realizing their business ideas. REFERENCES 1. Barringer R. Bruce, & Ireland R. Duane (2008).

Entrepreneurship: Successfully Launching New Venture, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall.

2. Lambing A. Peggy, & Kuehl R. Charles (2007). Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall.

3. Kathleen R. Allen (2010). New Venture Creation: An Entrepreneurial Approach, 5th Edition, South-Westrn Cencage Learning

4. Kathleen Allen (2010). Entrepreneurship for Scientists and Engineers, Pearson Prentice Hall.

BLHC 4062 PROJECT MANAGEMENT LEARNING OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. an ability to construct a comprehensive Project Proposal,

which is based on engineering perspectives and aligned with industrial demands.

2. an ability to illustrate the importance of project management for high technology preject/program execution.

3. an ability to explain the principles, functional and processes of project management.

4. an ability to highlight the essential skills and standard execution methods in project management.

SYNOPSIS The purpose of this course is to provide the students with contemporary skill that enable them to deploy it effectively into project management. This course will cover principles, concepts, strategies, methods and techniques of project management. At the end of this lesson, students should be able to understand the wholesome of functional and obtain the skills of the project mangement. REFERENCES 1. Gray, C.F. and Larson, E.W. (2006). Project Management –

A Managerial Perspective. McGraw Hill. 2. Meredith, J.R. and Mantel, S.J. 2006). Project Management

– A Managerial approach, 6th Edition. John Wiley and Sons. 3. Daniel L. Babcock, Lucy C. Morse (2002). Managing

Engineering and Technology, 3rd Edition. Prentice Hall. 4. R.S. Zaharna (2001). Proposal Writing Handbook. Centre for

studies, consultant and technical service, An Najah National University Nablus.

5. Russell D. Archibald (2003). Managing High-Technology Programs and Project, 3rd Edition, John Wiley and Sons Inc.


80

76

SEMESTER 8 BTEU 4810 & BTEU 4812 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING & REPORT LEARNING OUTCOME Upon completion of this subject, the students should be able to: 1. adapt with the real working environment, in terms of

operational, development and management system. 2. apply knowledge learned in the university. 3. write a report on daily activities in the log book

systematically in the related field. 4. embrace and practice professional ethics. 5. improve their soft skills and creativity. 6. recognize potential engineering problems to be solved in

the final year project. 7. present reports orally and written on the working

experiences. SYNOPSIS For Industrial training, students will gain experience in the organization/industry for a required certain number of weeks. During the designated period, they will apply knowledge learned in the university and increased the related skills required in their future profession. REFERENCES 1. Garis Panduan Latihan Industri, Pusat Universiti Industri.


UTeM

81

77





linear sources.

SYNOPSIS This course is designed to help students improve their proficiency in English language and to communicate effectively in both spoken and written forms. It is tailored to the four components, namely Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing of the Malaysian University English Test (MUET). Grammar component is taught in an integrated approach to build confidence among the learners to become efficient speakers of English. The CL approach is incorporated in this course. REFERENCES 1. Choo, W.Y., Yeoh, W.T., Yee, S.F. & Nyanaprakasan, S.






BKKx xxxx CO-CURRICULUM I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Demonstrate good techniques of rhythms and tempos

traditional musical instruments. 2. Identify musical notes and apply them to suit the rhymes

and tempos of traditional musical instruments. 3. Demonstrate positive values and teamwork through group

performance Synopsis The purpose of this course is to increase students’ knowledge about playing traditional musical instruments. This course emphasizes the theoretical and practical components of traditional musical instruments. Besides, students will be exposed to recitation traditional musical instruments performances. References 1. Chek Mat (2005). Kursus Pengurusan Program. Kuala

lumpur: Utusan Publication & Distributors Sdn. Bhd. 2. Tan, S. B. & Patricia, M. (1998). Penghantar Muzik Malaysia.

Pulau pinang: Penerbitan The Asian Centre.

SUBJECT DETAILS FOR JTKEK PROGRAMMES

University Compulsory Subjects (W)


82

78

BLHW 1722 PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. explain the concept of science and technology in ancient

and current civilizations as well as their impact on the development of philosophy of science and technology via group presentations.

2. elaborate the concept of knowledge, philosophy of science and technology from the Islamic perspective appropriately.

3. interrelate the principles, influences and impact of science and technology in the context of Islamic civilization and nation development via group activities.

SYNOPSIS This course discusses the concept of knowledge, philosophy of science and technology according to the perspectives of Muslim and Western scholars. The concept and achievements of Islamic civilization are also disscussed because science and technology is a phenomenon which develops in line with the development of society and its environment. REFERENCES 1. Radzuan Nordin, Ahmad Ridzwan Mohd Noor, Norliah

Kudus, Nor Azilah Ahmad, Shahrulanuar Mohamed, Ali Hafizar Mohamad Rawi, Ismail Ibrahim & Mahadi Abu Hassan. (2008). Modul Falsafah Sains dan Teknologi. Cetakan Dalaman UTeM.

2. Yahaya Jusoh & Azhar Muhammad. (2007). Pendidikan Falsafah Sains Al-Quran. Skudai: Penerbit UTM Press.

3. Osman Bakar. (2008). Tauhid dan Sains: Perspektif Islam Tentang Agama dan Sains Edisi Kedua. Bandung: Pustaka Hidayah.

BLHW 2403 TECHNICAL ENGLISH LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. At the end of the course, students should be able to: 2. distinguish the use of tenses, run-ons, fragments, modifiers










UTeM

83

79

BKKx xxxx CO-CURRICULUM II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain and apply sport science discipline in sports activity. 2. Show the technique confidently and efficiently. 3. Follow the rules and regulations properly in the

tournament. 4. Demonstrate positive values and develop teamwork skills. Synopsis This course introduces the basic skills of sports like tennis, badminton etc. Students will be taught the theoretical and practical aspects of the sports: history and development, physical fitness components, tournaments management, rules and regulations of the games. Students are also taught techniques of the sports; how to hold the racquet, service, forehand stroke, backhand stroke and all other necessary techniques. Students will also be exposed to strategies on how to play single and double game. References 1. Sharpley. F, “Tennis a guidebook for teachers, coaches and

players”, Ner Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2003 2. Serguei. S, “Senaman Kecergasan Fizikal”, Kuala Lumpur:

First Agency Publishing (M) Sdn Bhd, 1998 3. MacCurdy. D, “Tennis: Strike for Success, Champaign:

Human Kinetics, 1994










84

80








BLHW xxxx THIRD LANGUAGE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Present orally the language in correct grammatically. 2. Construct and write basic grammatically -in correct

sentences in the language. 3. Demonstrate their language in proficiency skills. Synopsis This course is designed to equip and improve student’s proficiency so as to enable them to understand and communicate at the beginners’ level through both spoken and written form. All the four proficiency skills are taught in an integrated approach so as to build confidence in them to understand and appreciate the language. References (Depends on language offered)


UTeM

85

81

BLHC 4032 CRITICAL & CREATIVE THINKING LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of the course, students should be able to: 5. discuss basic principles of critical and creative thinking skills

in solving daily tasks. 6. apply the tools of critical and creative thinking in problem

solving and technical innovation. 7. respond in group discussions on issues related to the

development of critical and creative thinking skills. 8. solve problems in case studies relating to contemporary

issues. SYNOPSIS This course is designed to give students an introduction to the principles of critical and creative thinking, and problem-solving. Students will be exposed to the roles of the right brain and left brain, mental determination, elements of critical and creative thinking as well as problem solving. This subject is conducted in accordance with the concept of problem-based learning (PBL). REFERENCES 5. Aziz Yahya, Aida Nasirah Abdullah, Hazmilah Hasan, Raja

Roslan Raja Abd Rahman. (2011) Critical and Creative Thinking Module 2. Melaka. Penerbit UTeM

6. Buzan, T. & Buzan, B. (2006). The Mind Map Book, Essex: BBC Active, Pearson Education.

7. Claxton, G. & Lucas, B. (2007). The Creative Thinking Plan, London: BBC Books.

1. Reichenbach, W. (2000). Introduction to Critical Thinking,McGraw-Hill College.


86

82

BENH 1263 ALGEBRA AND CALCULUS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Identify various kinds of functions and their nature. 2. Assemble the concept of complex number in technology

engineering problems. 3. Apply matrix to solve simultaneous equations and Eigen

value problem. 4. Classify the techniques of differentiation and integration

according to the particular problems in technology engineering.

5. Report writing assignment / case studies in individual or group.

Synopsis This course will discuss the Complex numbers, Matrix Algebra, Functions, Limits and Continuity, Differentiation and Integration References 1. Glyn James, Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th Edition,

Pearson, 2007 2. Anton H., Calculus, 9th Edition, John Wiley 2009. 3. John R. Durbin, Modern Algebra: An introduction, 6th

Edition, John Wiley 2009 4. Steward J., Calculus-Concepts and Contexts, Brooks/Cole,

9th Edition, 2009. 5. Stroud K.A., Engineering Mathematics, 5th Edition, Palgrave

Macmillan 2001 6. Glyn James, Modern engineering mathematics, Pearson

Education 2010

BTNH 1123 TECHNICAL PHYSICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Define the basic concepts in physics. 2. Apply the physics concept systematically in electronics

engineering. 3. Solve broadly-defined physic problems to reach

substantiated conclusions using appropriate techniques. 4. Display an ability to follow lab procedure in handling physic

experiment through lab session. 5. Work individually or in groups effectively to perform

assignments/tasks given

Synopsis This course will discuss about Mechanics: Physical Quantities and Measurements, Kinematics of Linear Motion, Force, Momentum and Impulse, Work, Energy and Power, Static, Circular Motion, etc. Properties of Matter: Static, Dynamics, Circular Motion, Simple Harmonic, Moment of Inertia, Density and Specific Gravity, Hydrostatics, Elasticity, Friction, Viscosity, Osmosis, Diffusion, Acceleration and Newton’s Second Law of Motion, Motion with a Changing Velocity and Ohm law. Thermodynamics, Wave, Light & Sound. All topics covered are basic knowledge that essential for engineering programs. References 1. Giancolli DC, “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with

Modern Physics”, 4th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2009. 2. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics”,

8th Edition, Cengage learning, 2010. 3. Giambatista A., Richardson B.M and Richardson R.C.,

“College Physics”, 2nd Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2007. 4. Walker J.S., “Physics”, 3rd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2007.

Programme Core Subjects (P)


UTeM

87

83

BENH 1273 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Use an analytical method to solve a particular ordinary

differential equation. 2. Assemble the method of Laplace Transform to solve a

particular ordinary differential equation. 3. Perform an analytical method to obtain the Fourier series

of basic function. 4. Apply the concept of Fourier Series in order to solve the

technology engineering problems. 5. Report writing assignment / case studies in individual or

group.

Synopsis This course covers will discuss Ordinary differential equations: 1st-oder differential equations, 2nd-order differential equations. The Laplace Transform, Fourier Series. References 1. Dennis G. Zill & Micheal R. Cullen (2008). Differential

Equations with Boundary-Value Problems, Sixth Edition. Thomson Learning, Inc.

2. R. Kent Nagle, Edward B. Saff & Arthur David Snider (2008). Fundamentals of Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, Fifth Edition. Pearson Education Inc.

3. C. Henry Edwards & David E. Penney (2008). Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, Fourth Edition. Pearson Education Inc.

4. Glyn James, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Pearson Education, 2010.

5. Yosza Dasril, Lecture Notes: Differential Equations, 2010

BENH 2123 STATISTIC & NUMERICAL METHOD Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the concept of central tendency, dispersion,

probability and distribution, estimation, hypothesis testing and simple linear regression.

2. Recognize the existence of errors in numerical computations.

3. Use the concept of central tendency, dispersion, probability and distribution, estimation, hypothesis testing and simple linear regression to solve applied problems.

4. Use numerical methods to solve the mathematical problems.

5. Analyze the statistical data 6. Report writing assignment / case studies in individual or

group. Synopsis This course will discuss Description statistics, Probability distribution, Estimation and Hypothesis testing, Simple regression and correlation analysis. Solution of Nonlinear Equations, Solution of Linear Systems, Interpolation References 1. Bluman A.G, Elementary Statistics: A Step By Step

Approach: A Step by Step Approach with Formula Card, McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 7 edition, 2008

2. Douglas C. Montgomery, George C.Runger, Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers, 3rd Edition, John Wiley, 2010

3. Sheldon M Ross, Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists, Academic Press, 4 edition, 2009.

4. Chapra S.C. and Canale R.P. Numerical Methods for Engineers, 6th edition, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2010.

5. Faires J.D. and Burden R. Numerical Analysis, 9th edition, USA: Brooks/Cole, Cengage Learning, 2010.

6. Khoo C.F., Sharifah Sakinah, S.A, Zuraini, O. and Lok Y. Y. Numerical Methods, 3rd edition, Petaling Jaya: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2009.

7. http://www.scilab.org/support/documentation/manuals.


88

84

BLHC 4052 TECHNOPRENEURSHIP Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the concept and theory of entrepreneurship

(technopreneurship). 2. Identify & analyze technopreneurial opportunities. 3. Evaluate and exploit these opportunities with a view of

creating & innovating a new business venture. 4. Combine business functions in business planning

effectively. 5. Demonstrate the principles of financial statement, the

necessity for market studies, strategic relationship and world globalised market to competitive opportunity to be achieved.

Synopsis This subject will assist students by getting motivated in entrepreneurship technology and the skills, as well as learn and obtain the principles and training required to form, improve and expand their business. The subject covers theory and training that can aid the students to acquire and build the expertise required before plunging into any business projects. This subject will assist in making and inventing new business areas, starting a new business or students who hope to familiarise with the concepts, issues and techniques of forming a business and technology entrepreneurship. The students will be equipped with the methods required to prepare cash flow statement and fundamentals in developing business plans. References 1. Kamariah Ismail, Noraini Abu Talib et.al (2009), Technology

Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall, Pearson Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.

2. Nafees A. Khan Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship. 2007. 3. Bruce R. Barringer and Duane Ireland Entrepreneurship:

Successfully Launching New Ventures (3rd Edition) 2009. 4. Robert Hisrich, Michael Peters and Dean Shepherd

Entrepreneurship 2009.

BLHC 4062 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain how project can contribute to the strategic mission

of an organization. 2. Describe the importance of a project to the organization. 3. Propose proposal that are comprehensive based on the

engineering fields in line to the command of the industries. 4. Apply project management tools effectively throughout.

Synopsis The aim of this subject is to provide knowledge to the students on strategic mission of a project in a contemporary organization. This subject also exposes the students to the various types of management that will bring greater opportunity of success to a project. Besides it aslo focus on the factors that will contribute to the high achievement of project group development. The students are given skill to coordinate complex netting that covers vendors, subcontractors, project group members, highest management level, project management level, project management hierarchy and clientele. The students can become project managers as their career. References 1. Gray, C.F & Larson, E.W (2006) Project Management: The

Managerial Process 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill. 2. Lewis, J.P (2005) The Project Managers’s Desk Reference; A

Comprehensive Guide to Project, Planning, Scheduling, Evaluation, Control and System, Golden Rock Centre Sdn. Bhd.

3. Mantel JR. S.J Meredith , J.R. Shafer, S.M and Sutton, M.M (2005) Core Concept: Project Management in Practice 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.


UTeM

89

85

BLHC 4072 ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT

Learning Outcomes Upon completing this course, students should be able to: 1. Analyze the way an engineering organization functions. 2. Practice the functions of management. 3. Identify formal structure requirement for engineering

operation activities. 4. Describe the various management methods available for

engineering operation activities.

Synopsis The subject provides the introduction on the requirement and application techniques of management found in engineering organizations. It covers technical knowledge with basic business and management techniques. This module also produces engineers that will meet the management responsibilities, formulate useful business ideas and take into account on the requirement in leadership role to face up to the challenges in a competitive environment.

References 1. Lucy C. Morse and Daniel L. Babcock Managing Engineering

and Technology (5th Edition) 2009. 2. John M. Nicholas and Herman Steyn Project Management

for Business, Engineering, and Technology, Third Edition (Paperback - Feb 20, 2008)

BTNU 4843 ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY ETHICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the effects and impact of technology on society,

culture and environment 2. Practice professional responsibilities and abide to code of

ethics. 3. Study critically and handle social, cultural and global

environmental issues. 4. Perform and display effectively the assignment given in

group or individual. Synopsis This subject will discussed on Ethics and professionalism, Engineers and society, Professional ethics, Code of ethics, IEM, BEM code of ethics, Regulation on professional conducts, Engineer as employee, Moral decision making, Engineer Accountability, Engineers legal liability Engineer and environment:, Ethics dealing with human , Global and Local Case Studies; Added Topics:, OSHA, Career Guidance, Job Seeking Strategies. References 1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics” 3rd Ed,

Prentice Hall, 2008. 2. Engineering Ethics (3rd Edition) by Charles Byrns

Fleddermann (2007) 3. Introduction to Engineering Ethics by Mike Martin and

Roland Schinzinger (2009) 4. Ethics of Emerging Technologies: Scientific Facts and Moral

Challenges by Thomas F. Budinger and Miriam D. Budinger (Apr 7, 2006)


90

86

BTNU 4826 & 4836 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING & INDUSTRIAL ASSESMENT Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply knowledge learnt, gain new skills and be aware of

current technologies 2. Identify industrial problems and suggest possible solutions 3. Display and ability communicate effectively 4. Work effectively in real-life working environment 5. Report activities orally and in writing 6. Discuss elements of entrepreneurship in related field 7. Demonstrate the right work attitude 8. Work effectively in organization Synopsis All degree students will be placed in appropriate local industries or government corporations for 20 weeks normally in the second semester of their third year of study. Student will be exposed to real life working environment relevant to their field of study. References Industrial Training Guide Book, UTeM.


UTeM

91

87

BTCS 1113 BASIC ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe basic functions of electronic components 2. Solve basic electronic circuits analysis using simulation

software. 3. Display and evaluate the performance of electronic circuits 4. Perform effectively in given tasks and assignment by

managing different information from multiple resources

Synopsis This subject discuss an introduction the concept of basic electronic components quantity such as charge, current, voltage, energy and power, introduction to dynamic, electrostatic and magnetic, and dependent sources. There are two section which cover topics on concept and function of electronic components in electronic system such as resistor, capacitor, inductor, transformers, fuse, cable, diode and transistor. The next section will deals with topics such as system numbers, logic gates, Boolean operation, combination logic (type of flip flop), register and digital circuit application. References 1. All New Electronics Self-Teaching Guide (Wiley Self

Teaching Guides) by Harry Kybett and Earl Boysen , 2008 2. Make: Electronics (Learning by Discovery) by Charles Platt,

2009. 3. Teach Yourself Electricity and Electronics, Fourth Edition by

Stan Gibilisco, 2006 4. Digital Systems: Principles and Design – Paperback by Raj

Kamal, 2009.

BTCS 1213 PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTAL Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply basic programming principles and algorithms of C

programming language. 2. Construct C programming structure using programming

fundamentals and principles. 3. Analyze small to medium scale problems and develop

solutions. 4. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal

responsibility in code of conduct. Synopsis Topics covered: basic programming principles such as introduction to C programming consists of syntax, variables and basic data type, more fundamentals programming structure such as operator, rules / condition, looping, function, array and sequences. The subject is a compulsory to build a basic background in programming. Visual C++ IDE will be used for the compiler and editor in this subject. References 1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, C How To Program 6th Edition,

Pearson Education Inc, 2010. 2. Michael A. Vine, C Programming 2nd Edition for The

Absolute Beginner, Thomson Course Technology, USA, 2008.

3. Delores M. Etter, Engineering Problem Solving with C 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.

BTCS Course Core Subjects (K)


92

88

BTCS 1003 COMPUTER ENGINEERING WORKSHOP I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe basic electronic components. 2. Design and simulate electronics computer aided design

software for circuit analysis. 3. Construct and demonstrate basic soldering technique for

circuit. 4. Revise the alternatives that exist in the selection of

hardware, software and computer engineering facilities from different resources when implementing the given task.

5. Work effectively as individual or in group and present the given task orally.

6. Study the various resources to complete the given task.

Synopsis The first part is dedicated to general practice of engineering. Students will experience mechanical, electrical, electronic and manufacturing practices. The topics covered in first part are electronics circuit design and analysis using electronics computer aided design software, printed circuit board design and fabrication and soldering technique for electronic circuits. The second part is dedicated for practice of computer engineering. . The topics that will cover in second part are three major areas in computer engineering discipline namely computer networking, operating system and computer organization. References 1. Handbook of International Electrical Safety Practices, Peri,

WILEY.2010 2. Audel Guide to the 2011 National Electrical Code: All New

Edition (Audel Technical Trades Series) - Paperback (Mar. 1, 2011) by Paul Rosenberg

3. EMC and the Printed Circuit Board: Design, Theory and Layout Made Simple, Mark.I, WILEY.

4. Turbo Cad Deluxe V.15 2D & 3D Precision Design by IMSI 2008

5. Industrial Bioseparations: Principles and Practice by Daniel Forciniti 2008

BTNT 1013 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Solve simple electric circuit based on various analysis

technique. 2. Solve a terminated two-port circuit to find currents,

voltages, impedances and ratios of interest. 3. Construct, test and troubleshoot simple electric circuits. 4. Report and explain their given assignment clearly.

Synopsis This subject will discussed on direct current circuits, SI units, charge, current, voltage and power, Ohm’s Law, Kirchhoff’s Law, Wye-Delta transformation, nodal and mesh analysis, Norton Theorem, Thevenin Theorem, Superposition Theorem, maximum power transfer, sinusoids and phasors, two-port networks, X,Y and h – parameters. This subject served as basic knowledge needed for electrical and electronic engineer. References 1. C.K Alexander, M.N Sadiku, “Fundamental of Electric

Circuits”, 4th Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2008. 2. James W. Nilsson, Susan A, Rieldel, “Electric Circuits”, 8th

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. A. R. Hambley, “Electrical Engineering- Principles and

Applications”, 4th Edition, Prentice hall, 2008. 4. W.H Hayt, J.E Kemmerly, S. M Durbin, “Engineering Circuit

Analysis”, 7th Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2007.


UTeM

93

89

BTCS 1013 COMPUTER ENGINEERING WORKSHOP II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the acquired knowledge from the engineering

practice and safety measure. 2. Identify related industrial problems and suggest possible

solutions. 3. Display the right work attitude. 4. Report technical report in writing. 5. Prepare technical report by using various resources. 6. Discuss elements of entrepreneurship in related field. Synopsis This subject will be provided students need to prepare and submit a technical report based on the acquired knowledge and exposure gained during computer engineering practice. In addition, students will also involve in industrial visit and hearing industrial talk as part of the industrial exposure. References 1. Handbook of International Electrical Safety Practices, Peri,

WILEY.2010 2. Audel Guide to the 2011 National Electrical Code: All New

Edition (Audel Technical Trades Series) - Paperback (Mar. 1, 2011) by Paul Rosenberg

3. EMC and the Printed Circuit Board: Design, Theory and Layout Made Simple, Mark.I, WILEY.

4. Turbo Cad Deluxe V.15 2D & 3D Precision Design by IMSI 2008

5. Industrial Bioseparations: Principles and Practice by Daniel Forciniti 2008

BTCS 1313 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the concept of database, data modelling

(relationship) and SQL statements basic functions of electronic components

2. Design data conceptual representation using Entity Relationship Model

3. Construct database application based on the current problem requirement

4. Perform effectively as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment

Synopsis This course is an introduction to database and file management system. It assists the students to form an understanding of data modeling, file management and database system functionality in information system. The students will be introduced to the process of designing, developing and executing database applications. This course focuses on practical skills to create, control and execute statement for database relationship. MySQL Workbench software will be used to design and model the databases for this course. References 1. Andy Oppel. Databases Demystified. 2nd Edition. McGraw-

Hill Osborne Media. 2010 2. Jeffrey A. Hoffer, Mary Prescott and HeikkiTopi. Modern

Database Management. 9th Edition. Prentice Hall. 2008 3. Arlene G. Taylor and Daniel N. Joudrey. The Organization of

Information.3rd Edition. Libraries Unlimited. 2008 4. Alan Dennis Barbara, Haley Wixom and David Tegarden.

Systems Analysis and Design with UML 3rd Edition. Wiley. 2007

5. Peter Rob and Carlos Coronel. Database Systems: Design, Implementation, and Management. Course Technology. 2006


94

90

BTCS 1223 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply advanced programming principles and algorithms in

C programming language 2. Construct C programming structure using advanced

programming techniques and principles. 3. Design and develop well-structured and reliable program in

C programming language. 4. Follow standard engineering manual to present report

development of application program. 5. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal

responsibility in code of conduct. Synopsis Topics covered: more advanced C programming principles such as pointers, characters and strings, structures, unions, bit manipulations and enumerations and file processing. Chapters are integrated with problem solving methods. The subject is a compulsory to strengthen programming skills in students. Visual C++ IDE will be used for demonstration and laboratory sessions in this subject. References 1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, C How To Program 6th Edition,




BTNE 2323 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the concept of AC voltage and current, single phase,

three-phase, transformer and magnetic circuit. 2. Apply the principles of the transformer, magnetic circuit,

single phase, three-phase and alternating voltage and current.

3. Mix the application of the power system and electrical transmission in single phase and three-phase.

4. Classify the application of the alternating voltage and current, single phase, three-phase, transformer and magnetic circuit.

5. Work as a team to measure correctly the voltage and current in single phase, transformer and magnetic in laboratory experiments.

Synopsis Alternating Voltage and Curent, Phasor, Magnetic Circuit, Electromotive force, magnetic field strength, relation between B and H, Kirchhoff’s law magnetic hysteresis, Single Phase Circuit, series resonance, parallel resonance, power factor, transformer, phasor diagram, equivalent circuit voltage regulation and efficiency, O/C and S/C test, Voltage generation and excitation methods, Basic principles of power system, per unit system, electrical transmission. References 1. Hughes E., Electrical Technology, Longman, 10th Edition,

2008. 2. Hadi Saadat, Power System Analysis with Power System

Toolbox Software, Mc-Graw Hill,2nd Edition. 3. Mc Pherson G., Electrical Machine & Transformers,

Wiley,2nd Edition.


UTeM

95

91

BTCS 2223 DATA STRUCTURE & ALGORITHM Learning Outcomes Upon completing this course, the student should be able to: 1. Apply the concept of data structures and algorithm

analysis. 2. Discover the benefits and drawbacks of data structures in

terms of memory and run time efficiency. 3. Construct a small application system using appropriate data

structures and algorithms to minimize the use of memory and run time of the system.

4. Organize data structures and construct algorithms to solve the given experimental problem.

5. Perform effectively as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.

Synopsis This course will expose the students to the fundamental knowledge of data structures and algorithm analysis. The topics that will be covered in the course include the introduction to data structures and algorithm analysis, fundamental of C++ programming language, object-oriented development, Array, List, Stack, Queue, Trees, Sorting and Searching algorithms. Apart from the theory, students are asked to apply the data structures and algorithms through a small application that is developed in a team. Microsoft Visual Studio C++ will be used as editor for C++ programming languages in this course.

References 1. Michael Main and WlterSavitch, Data Structures and Other

Objects Using C++, Fourth Edition, Pearson, 2010. 2. Jeffrey S. Childs, C++ Classes & Data Structures, Pearson

Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. Jeff Frank M. Carrano, Data Abstraction and Problem

Solving with C++, Fifth Edition, Addison Wesley, 2007. 4. Mark Allen Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis

in C++, Third Edition, Addison Wesley, 2006

BTNT 2053 COMMUNICATION PRINCIPLE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Demonstrate basic principles and components of

telecommunication system. 2. Measure the performance of analog and frequency

modulation techniques through experiments that commonly used in telecommunication system.

3. Design solution for linear or angle modulation system based on given specifications.

4. Demonstrate the effects of noise in telecommunication systems.

5. Work and discuss effectively either individually or in group for any assignment and experiment.

6. Construct experiments and display technical reports. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Introduction to Telecommunication, Linear Modulation, Single Sideband (SSB) Communication Systems, Angle Modulation, Noise and Introduction to Digital Communication The rationale of offering this subject is as the progression of communication system where students should have knowledge of communication principles and basic skills required by the industry. References 1. Wayne Tomasi, Electronics Communications Systems

Fundamentals Through Advanced, Prentice Hall, Fifth Edition, 2004.

2. John G. Proakis, Essentials of Communication Systems Engineering, Prentice Hall, 2005.

3. Frenzel, Communication Electronics/; Principles and Applications, McGraw Hill, Third Edition, 2000.


96

92

BTNT 2143 SIGNAL & SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain different types of signal and systems properties

that are commonly used in engineering. 2. Produce the Fourier series and transform in terms of

applicable time functions and the resulting spectral properties.

3. Apply the continuous-time Fourier Transform in analyzing non- periodic signal.

4. Use Laplace transform in 2nd order circuit analysis 5. Manipulate and explain a simple Matlab programming for

signal and system applications. 6. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis The course will cover various topics such as Introduction to Continuous-Time Signals and Systems: Fundamental Concept, Transformations of Continuous-Time Signals, Signal Characteristics, Common Signals, Continuous-Time Systems and Its Properties, Convolution for Continuous-Time LTI Systems, Properties of Convolution, Properties of LTI Systems; Fourier Series: Introduction of continuous Fourier Series and Its Coefficients; Fourier Transform: Definition, Properties of continuous Fourier Transform, Application of Fourier Transform, Energy and Power Density Spectra; Laplace Transform: Definition, Properties of Laplace Transform, Response of LTI Systems: Initial Condition, Transfer Functions, Convolution, Transforms with Complex and Repeated Poles. References 1. Mrinal Mandal, Amir Asif, Continuous and Discrete Time

Signals and Systems, Cambridge University Press, 2007. 2. C. K Alexander, M. N. O. Sadiku, Fundamental of Electric

Circuit, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006.William D. Stanley, Network Analysis with Applications, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000.

3. Charles L. Phillips, John M. Parr, Eve A. Riskin, Signals, Systems and Transforms, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.

4. M. J Roberts, Signals and Systems, McGraw Hill, 2003.

BTCS 2213 OPERATING SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the major components of an operating system, its

responsibilities and aspects 2. Differentiate the functionality among various kinds of

operating system. 3. Manipulate operating system theory to solve the basic

functional kernel problems 4. Perform assignment and present technical report both

orally and in writing. Synopsis This course introduces the internal operation of modern operating systems. In particular, the topics that will be covered in the course are Fundamental of Operating Systems, Process & threads Management, Concurrency Control, Memory Management, I/O Systems, File Systems, Protection and Security. Linux will be used as operating system for this course. References 1. William Stallings, Operating Systems: Internals and Design

Principles 6th Ed., Prentice Hall International, Inc., 2008. 2. Silberschatz,A., Operating System Concept 8th. Ed., John

Wiley and Sons, Inc., 2007. 3. Wahidah, Zurina and Fairuz,Practical Approach to Fedora

Core 6 : Beginner and Intermediate, First Edition, 2007. 4. Nutt, G., Operating Systems :A modern Perspective 5th.Ed.,

Eddison Wesley Longman, Inc., ISBN 0-201-74196-2. 2006.


UTeM

97

93

BTCS 2123 INTERNET TECHNOLOGY & MULTIMEDIA Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain and apply the concepts of computer networks, core

components of the Internet infrastructure, protocols and services

2. Analyze the implementation of client and server application.

3. Select the best Internet application according to the current situation based on various resources

4. Measure experimental performance using various internet security protocols

Synopsis The course provides an introductory knowledge of technologies related to Internet applications and services. The students are introduced to Internet protocols and their functionalities as well as hardware required to develop and implement Internet applications and services. The course is extended by an introduction to concept of Human-Computer Interaction (HCI) and its relationship in system development.The topics include the basic understanding of cognitive psychology, user interface design, and interaction design. This course is highly in demand since in the past few years there has been an explosion in the number of people using the Internet as well as multimedia. References 1. Douglas E. Comer, The Internet Book, 4th edition. Pearson

Prentice Hall, 2007. 2. Behrouz Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking,

4th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2007. 3. Jennifer Preece, Yvonne Rogers and Helen Sharp,

Interaction Design: beyond human-computer interaction, (2nd Edition), John Wiley & Sons, 2007.

4. Dov Te’eni, Jane Carey and Ping Zhang, Human Computer Interaction: Developing Effective Organizational Information Systems, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.

BTCS 2134 DIGITAL ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe basic functions of digital components 2. Design digital system using combinational and sequential

logic. 3. Display and evaluate the performance of sequential logic

circuits. 4. Perform effectively as individual or in group to complete

tasks and assignment 5. Present the assignments and present technical reports both

orally and in writing Synopsis This subject covers the topics of transistor- transistor logic. Logic functions, logic diagrams, Karnaugh maps, Boolean algebra, DeMorgan's Theorem. Numerical codes, arithmetic functions. Combinational circuits such as encoders, decoders, multiplexers, de-multiplexers, comparators. This subject also covers the introduction to memory, programmable logic devices and microcomputer systems. Student will learn the topics on latches and flip-flops, flip-flops operating characteristics and applications. Registers and counters, shift registers, synchronous, asynchronous and modulo counters. References 1. Thomas L. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals (10 edition),

Prentice Hall, 2008 2. Ronald J.Tocci, Neal S.Widmer, Gregory L.Moss, Digital

Systems: Principles and Applications, (11 Edition) Pearson Prentice Hall, 2010

3. William Klietz, Digital Electronic: A Practical Approach, (8 Edition) Prentice Hall, 2007.

4. Marcovitz A. B., Introduction to Logic Design, 2nd Ed., McGraw Hill, 2005


98

94

BTCS 2173 COMPUTER NETWORK & SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concepts, elements and uses of Local Area

Network (LAN) and Wide Area Network (WAN). 2. Design medium access control (MAC) protocols and analyze

critically the problems for various wired and wireless networks implementation.

3. Trace the Internet Protocols (IP); IPv4 and IPv6, TCP and UDP service models and connection establishments.

4. Justify the alternatives that exist in the selection of hardware, software and transmission facilities from different resources when designing and implementing network in a group project.

5. Present the assignments and present technical reports both orally and in writing.

Synopsis Topics covered: Overview: Introduction to Computer Network and System, Networking Equipments and Data Communications, Network Architecture and Protocols, Local and Wide Area Networks, Client-Server Computing: Web technologies, Wireless, Mobile Computing and Mobile Data Access Computer Network and System is a program targeted for dynamic digital and communication careers. It is strongly emphasis on technical aspect and enables employers to meet the needs of Computer Networks and System graduates including some of the best platform for many companies specializing in computer networking and system. This unique curriculum balances theory with extensive hands-on experiments. References 1. Douglas Comer, Computer networks and Internets, 5thEd.

Prentice Hall 2009. 2. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication, 8th

Ed. Prentice Hall, 2007. 3. Faurozan, B, Data Communication & Networking, 4th Ed.

McGraw Hill, 2007.

BTCS 2313 COMPUTER ORGANISATION & ARCHITECTURE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the history and current state of computer

technology. 2. Explain the internal structure and function of a computer

system. 3. Analyze how input/output systems are implemented in a

computer system. 4. Distinguish the characteristics, addressing modes and

formats of any typical instruction set. 5. Develop assembly language program segments to

accomplish simple tasks for any given instruction set 6. Explain advanced concepts in computer system such as

CISC & RISC approaches, pipelining, instruction-level parallelism, etc

7. Measure experimental performance using computer system.

8. Complete tasks and assignment effectively as instructed with the use of modern technology through research and case studies.

Synopsis This course aims to give students a general understanding of how computer systems work internally (ALU, control unit, registers, etc) and externally (I/O interfaces, networking, etc). This will enable the graduates to make intelligent decisions when confronted with computer-related problems at their workplace and also enable graduates to further their studies in the field of computer architecture, organization, and design. References 1. Stallings, William, Computer Organization & Architecture:

Designing for Performance, 8th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2009. 2. A.P.Godse, D.A.Godse, Computer Organization And

Architecture, 1st Edition, Technical Publications, 2010. 3. Abd-El-Barr, Mostafa, Fundamentals of Computer

Organization & Architecture, 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2005.

4. Berger, Arnold S., Hardware and Computer Organization, 1st Edition, Elsevier, 2005.


UTeM

99

95

BTCS 3123 DISCRETE MATHEMATIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain fundamental concept of discrete mathematics 2. Solve problems in computer engineering using software by

referring to discrete mathematic theory. 3. Discuss solutions in group to problems through relevant

information by selecting the suitable discrete structure techniques.

Synopsis Topics covered include: Functions, Relations and Sets: Functions, Relations, Discrete versus continuous functions and relations, Sets, Cardinality and countability; Basic Logics: Propositional logic, Logical connectives, Truth tables, Use of logic to illustrate connectives, Normal forms (conjunctive and disjunctive), Predicate logic, Universal and existential quantification, Limitations of predicate logic, Boolean algebra, Applications of logic to computer engineering; Proof Techniques: Notions of implication, converse, inverse, negation, and contradiction, The structure of formal proofs, Direct proofs, Proof by counterexample, contraposition, etc; Basics of Counting: Permutations and combinations, Counting arguments rule of products, rule of sums, The pigeonhole principle, Generating functions, Applications to computer engineering; Graphs and Trees: Trees, Undirected graphs, Directed graphs, Spanning trees, Shortest path, Euler and Hamiltonian cycles, Traversal strategies; Recursion: Recursive mathematical definitions, Developing recursive equations, etc. References 1. James L. Hein (2009) Discrete Structures, Logic, and

Computability , Jones & Bartlett Publishers 2. Harry Kesten (2010) Probability on Discrete Structures

(Encyclopaedia of Mathematical Sciences), Springer. 3. Douglas, E., Crawley, J.W. (2006). Discrete Mathematics.

John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 4. Alexander Stanoyevitch (2011) Discrete Structures with

Contemporary Applications. Chapman and Hall/CRC.

BTCS 3134 MICROPROCESSOR & MICROCONTROLLER TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the microprocessor and microcontroller’s

architecture and peripheral subsystem of MC68K and PIC16F877A.

2. Classify interrupts and internal registers modifications to solve specific I/O tasks.

3. Display microprocessor and microcontroller subsystem’s performance in peripheral interfacing via high/low level language

4. Design and develop a microcontroller-based system with peripheral devices interface.

5. Perform efficiently as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.

Synopsis This subject will provide the students both solid theoretical and practical applications to the microprocessors / microcontrollers based system. Extensive practical-oriented sessions will be given using MC68K microprocessor and PIC microcontroller involving program development software, chip programming and debugging. Topics covered are microcomputer system & peripheral design, software and hardware integration; interrupt control system, analog interfacing, etc. References 1. Dogan Ibrahim, Advanced Microcontroller Projects in C,

Newnes Elsevier Ltd., 2008. 2. PIC Microcontrollers: Know It All (Newnes Know It All) by

Lucio Di Jasio, Tim Wilmshurst, Dogan Ibrahim and John Morton, 2007

3. M Ali Mazidi , PIC Microcontroller and Emdedded System (2 edition), , 2007.

4. Beginner's Guide To Embedded C Programming: Using The Pic Microcontroller And The Hitech Pic-Lite C Compiler by Chuck Hellebuyck, 2008

5. Microprocessor Theory and Applications with 68000/68020 and Pentium by Mohamed Rafiquzzaman (2008)

6. Microprocessors Software and Hardware Design Using MC68000 by M. H. Hassan (2008).


100

96

BTCS 3323 COMPUTER SYSTEM ENGINEERING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the fundamental computer system knowledge and

requirements. 2. Analyze analytical models of computer systems and

components with respect to reliability, performance and life cycle cost

3. Adapt the concept and theory of computer system engineering to solve the given experimental problem.

4. Work effectively as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.

Synopsis This course covers topics on the engineering of computer software and hardware systems: techniques for controlling complexity; strong modularity using client-server design, virtual memory, and threads; networks; atomicity and coordination of parallel activities; recoveryand reliability; privacy, security, and encryption; and impact of computer systems on society. Knowledge, understanding, analysis and design abilities are developed principally through lectures and tutorials. Practical and design skills are developed through laboratory work involving problem solving assignments and practical exercises. References 1. Saltzer, Jerome H., and M. Frans Kaashoek. Principles of

Computer System Design: An Introduction, Part I. San Francisco, CA: Morgan Kaufmann, 2009.

2. Morris, Robert, and Samuel Madden. 6.033 Computer System Engineering, Spring 2009. (Massachusetts Institute of Technology: MIT OpenCourseWare), http://ocw.mit.edu (Accessed 27 Sep, 2010). License: Creative Commons BY-NC-SA

3. Vincent P. Heuring, Computer Systems Design and Architecture, Prentice Hall, 2nd ed.,2003.

4. Alexander Kossiakoff, Systems Engineering Principles and Practice, Wiley-Interscience, 2002.

5. Andrew P. Sage, Introduction to Systems Engineering, Wiley-Interscience, 1st ed., 2000.

BTCS 3423 COMPUTER & NETWORK SECURITY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain and elaborate the concept of computer security

theories and related items. 2. Manipulate the suitable components in providing service

and security mechanism in computer software, operating system, database, network system and computer security management.

3. Design the appropriate security system mechanism for computer software and computer network.


5. Present the assignments and present technical reports both orally and in writing.

Synopsis This subject will be discussed on how to control failures of confidentiality, integrity and availability in applications, databases, operating systems and networks alike. Beside that students should be able to implement the cyber law to protect their rights. Students also will learn on how to plan the recovery solution if any disaster happens to the computing environment. References 1. Siti Rahayu, Robiah, Mohd Faizal and Nazrulazhar (2006),

Information Technology Security, Pearson, ISBN 13 978-983-3655-47-2.

2. Dieter Gollmann (2006). Computer Security 3. William Stallings (2006), 4th Edition, Cryptography and

Network Security: Principles and Practice, Pearson International Edition, ISBN 0-13-202322-9.

4. Mark Merkow and Jim Breithaupt (2006), Information Security: Principles and Practices, Pearson Prentice Hall, ISBN 0-13-154729-1.

5. Security+ Guide to Network Security Fundamentals by Mark D. Ciampa 2008


UTeM

101

97

BTCS 4213 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concept, element and uses of software

engineering, database systems and project management 2. Develop software application with database management

system according to the suitable software process lifecycle 3. Adapt suitable CASE tool to solve case study given 4. Perform ethically in solving given software engineering

problems by managing different information from multiple resources

5. Work effectively as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.

Synopsis Introduction to software development, software engineering and database system; Software lifecycle model, CASE tools, requirement definition and management, requirement analysis, requirement specification document. Software design and modeling; design process, design quality and metrics, design strategy, software testing, database management and query language. Software Project management including estimation and quality management. Unified Modeling Language (UML) is used to design and model in the software development process. For this purpose, Poseidon will be used as the software tools. References 1. IEEE Standards Association, “IEEE Std 12207-2008 Systems

and software engineering – Software life cycle processes”, 2008.

2. Sommerville, I (2007) Software Engineering, 8th Edition, Addison Wesley.

3. Pressman, R.S (2008) Software Engineering A Practitioner’s Approach, 7th Edition. McGraw-Hill.

4. CMMI Product Team, “CMMI for Development, Version 1.2”, August 2008.

5. Elmasri, Navathe, (2009) Fundamentals of Database Systems6th Edition. Addison Wesley.

BTCS 3133 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the basic theory in digital signal processing. 2. Demonstrate the concepts in digital signal processing such

in discrete-time signals and systems and spectrum representations.

3. Display the impulse response, signal flow graph using difference equations, stability determination and z-transform.

4. Combine basic digital filter concepts in digital filters design. 5. Complete tasks and assignment effectively as individual or

in group. Synopsis This subject will cover: Introduction to DSP, discrete-time signals and systems, spectrum of representation of discrete-time signals, discrete Fourier transform, difference equations and discrete-time systems, z-transform and its applications, analysis and design of digital filters and application of digital signal processing. References 1. Norhashimah Mohd Saad, Abdul Rahim Abdullah, Real Time

Digital Signal Processing – A Practical Approach using TMS320C6713 DSP Processor, Penerbit UTeM, 2007.

2. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach, 3rd Edition, McGraw- Hill, 2006.

3. Oppenheim, Schafer, 3rd Edition Discrete-time Signal Processing, Prentice-Hall, 2009.

4. Proakis, Manolikas, Digital Signal Processing : Principles, Algorithms, and Applications, 4th Edition, Prentice-Hall, 2007.


102

98

BTNU 3804 FINAL YEAR PROJECT I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Prepare the objectives for a project, search on related work

done before and basic theory as well as the approach to be used for the project.

2. Organize project plan, divide project to various phases and identify sources of reference required for each phase

3. Work as an individual with the help of the supervisor to look for the solution by integrating knowledge acquired.

4. Demonstrate the right attitude in implementing the project.

Synopsis This module is the preliminary part of the final year’s project. Students should produce a project proposal and start work in their project before the end of the semester. Projects can be the development of software or electronic hardware. Projects can also take the form of case studies or solving industrial problems faced during the students’ industrial training. References None

BTNE 4713 QUALITY MANAGEMENT Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Use and understanding the quality concepts and the

different perspective on quality theories. 2. To apply the quality tools to solve any problems in

organisation. 3. Work effectively as individual or in a group. 4. Study and explain the application of sig-sigma to improve

the quality of management, process and product in organisation.

5. Managing the international quality standard for the customer’s satisfaction.

Synopsis The different of quality theories for many organisatition, comparisme international quality standard for customer satisfaction. The designing of strategy planning, strategy process and ethic to enhance the quality improvement for process and, product with using quality tools. Six –sigma are using for management to improve the mangement strategy planning. References 1. S.Thomas Foster., “Managing Quality”, Second Edition,

Pearson, Prentice Hall Inc. 2. Barrie G. Dale. “Managing Quality”, Fifth Edition 3. Stephen R. Covey's book, The 7 Habits of Highly Effective

People


UTeM

103

99

BTCS 3313 EMBEDDED SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain key features of embedded systems. 2. Designs embedded system program code and construct

simulation of embedded software in host and target system.

3. Construct embedded system hardware design by selecting the suitable embedded system architecture, e.g. system form factor, processors, hardware and necessary peripheral interfaces, based on the sustainability and system requirement.

4. Perform assignment and present technical report both orally and in writing.

Synopsis Topics covered in this course are overview of Embedded System, characteristics & application areas, introduction to assembler-level software and high level language programming for Embedded Systems, introduction to Embedded System hardware, application-level embedded system design concepts in computer engineering. Student of this subject develop practical and theoretical skills for the modern software industry to build innovative system using embedded technology. Students will develop essential skills required to create clever system which drives intelligent robots and more. References 1. Shibu, “Intro To Embedded Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill

Education, 2009 2. J.K. Peckol, “Embedded systems: A contemporary Design

Tool”, Wiley Publishing, 2007. 3. Michael Barr, Anthony M, “Programming Embedded

Systems with C and GNU Development Tools”, O’Reilly, 2007.

BTCS 4314 REAL TIME SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the fundamental principles of basic reference model

of real-time systems for uniprocessor and multiprocessor applications.

2. Analyze specific attributes of multitasking and task-scheduling methods to solve related problems of real-time systems.

3. Adapt real-time operating system, scheduling techniques and resources to solve the given experimental problem.


Synopsis The topics that will be covered in the course are Introduction to Real-Time Systems, A Reference Model of Real-Time Systems, Scheduling Approaches, Clock-Driven Scheduling, Priority-Driven Scheduling for Periodic, Aperiodic and Sporadic Tasks, Resources and Resource Access Control, Model of Multiprocessor and Distributed Systems, Design of Real-Time Communication Protocol and Design of Real-Time Operating System. LynxOS will be used as real-time operating system for real-time application development and simulation for this course. References 1. E.-R. Olderog and H, Dierks “Real-Time Systems: Formal

Specification and Automatic Verification”, Cambridge University Press, 2008.

2. Hermann Kopetz, “Real-Time Systems: Design Principles for Distributed Embedded Applications (Real-Time Systems Series)”, Springer, 2011.

3. Rob Williams, “Real-Time Systems Development”, Elsevier, 2006.

4. Tarek F. Abdelzaher, Giorgio Buttazzo and Krithi Ramamritham. “Real-Time Systems: The International Journal of Time-Critical Computing Systems”, Springer, 2011.


104

100

BTCS 4324 COMPUTER INTERFACING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the concept, architecture and peripheral

subsystems of a microcontroller for computer interfacing. 2. Construct a microcontroller-based system with various

peripheral devices interfaces and study the implementation problems during interfacing.

3. Share resources and responsibilities effectively to complete given task on computer interfacing in a group.

4. Manipulate and compare experimental data to solve various problems.

Synopsis This course covers abstractions and implementation techniques for the design of application using computer interfacing. Topics include: microcontroller, features of different I/O peripheral devices and their interfaces, Java programming language and interfacing, sensors and actuators, data analysis and controls and various software and hardware tool which significant for computer interfacing. This subject is taken to expose student to Java programming language and interfacing computer with other peripherals. Eclipse IDE will be used as the compiler and editor to demonstrate programming and in laboratories session in this subject. References 1. Jonathan W. Valvano (2011), Embedded Microcomputer

Systems: Real Time Interfacing, CL-Engineering. 2. Joshua Bloch (2008), Effective Java (2nd Edition), Prentice

Hall. 3. Y. Daniel Liang (2010), Introduction to Java Programming,

Comprehensive, Prentice Hall. 4. Wilbert O. Galitz (2007), The Essential Guide to User

Interface Design: An Introduction to GUI Design Principles and Techniques, Wiley.

5. Harprit Sandhu (2008), Making PIC Microcontroller Instruments and Controllers, McGraw-Hill/TAB Electronics.

6. Harprit Sandhu (2010), Running Small Motors with PIC Microcontrollers, McGraw-Hill/TAB Electronics.

BTCS 4334 VLSI DESIGN & FABRICATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Analysis critically the design problems of the CMOS VTC for

switching threshold, VOH, VOL, VIH, VIL, and noise margins. 2. Apply techniques, such as Euler paths and stick diagrams to

optimize the layout of CMOS logic circuits. 3. Display how to use CMOS gates in several logic functions

(e.g. multiplexers, transmission gate-based XOR gates). 4. Evaluate the CMOS logic gates design using various

methods. 5. Complete tasks and assignment effectively as individual or

in a group

Synopsis Topics covered: Electronic properties of materials: Solid-state materials, Electronics and holes Doping, acceptors and donors, p- and n-type material, Conductivity and resistivity, Drift and diffusion currents, mobility and diffusion; Function of the basic inverter structure: Connectivity, layout, and basic functionality of a CMOS inverter, The CMOS inverter voltage transfer characteristic (VTC), Analysis of the CMOS VTC for switching threshold, VOH, VOL, VIH, VIL, and noise margins, Effect of changing the inverter configuration on the CMOS VTC, Connectivity and basic functionality of a Bipolar ECL inverter, Connectivity and basic functionality of a Bipolar TTL inverter; Combinational logic structures: Basic CMOS gate design, Layout techniques for combinational logic structures, Transistor sizing for complex CMOS logic devices, Transmission gates, Architectural building blocks (multiplexers, decoders, adders, counters, multipliers); Sequential logic structures, etc. References 1. Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici, CMOS Digital Integrated

Circuits, McGraw Hill,2005. 2. CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective (4th

Edition) by Neil Weste and David Harris , 2010 3. VLSI Test Principles and Architectures: Design for Testability

(Systems on Silicon) by Laung-Terng Wang, Cheng-Wen Wu and Xiaoqing Wen, 2006


UTeM

105

101

BTCS 4344 IMAGE & VIDEO PROCESSING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the basic theory in two dimensional signal

processing. 2. Demonstrate the concepts in 2-Dimensional filtering and

image enhancing. 3. Analyze the feature extractions and pattern classifications. 4. Compare and evaluate the suitable methods, theory or

equation in order to understand concept image compression and JEPG2000.

5. Complete tasks and assignment effectively as individual or in group.

6. Manipulate and compare experimental data to solve various problems

Synopsis Topics Covered: Introduction to Image Processing, Two-dimensional signals and systems, Sampling in two dimensions, Two-dimensional discrete transforms, Introduction to 2-D filter design, Multi-resolution image processing, Image Estimation and Restoration, Morphological image processing, Edge detection, Fundamentals of image compression, Video processing and compression. After learning this subject, students should be able to use point operations, perform basic image filtering, implement multi-resolution and image classification techniques, video filters, and basic algorithms for image and video compression. References 1. Rafael C. González, Richard Eugene Woods, “Digital Image

Processing”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008. 2. Chris Solomon, Toby Breckon, Stuart Gibson,

“Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing: A Practical Approach with Examples in Matlab”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

3. Sonka, Hlavac& Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision”, ITP, 2007.


106

102

BTNE 1013 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Demonstrate safety and health regulation in the lab

activity. 2. Demonstrate and diagnose an electronic circuit using

electronic testing equipment. 3. Manipulate the simulation tools for the electronic circuit

analysis according to IPC standard. 4. Describe and present the given assignment based on

technical report format. 5. Work as a team in practicing the problem based learning

project. 6. Display the ability of presenting lab report and project

outcome orally and in writing. Synopsis Introduction to Industrial Safety and Health + Lab Safety, Equipment- theory, testing and circuit diagnostic & Report writing, Component – introduction, theory, assembly and soldering, Simulation tools - MULTISIM – introduction and application, Problem Based Learning (PBL). References 1. Environmental, Safety and Health Engineering, Gayle

Woodside, WILEY 2. Handbook of International Electrical Safety Practices, Peri,

WILEY 3. Audel House Wiring, All New 8th Edition, Paul Rosenberg,

WILEY 4. EMC and the Printed Circuit Board: Design, Theory and

Layout Made Simple, Mark.I, WILEY 5. Industrial Bioseparations: Principles and Practice, Daniel

Forciniti, WILE









BTNE Course Core Subjects (K)


UTeM

107

103



fundamentals and principles. 3. Analyze small to medium scale problems and develop


responsibility in code of conduct.

Synopsis Topics covered: basic programming principles such as introduction to C programming consists of syntax, variables and basic data type, more fundamentals programming structure such as operator, rules / condition, looping, function, array and sequences. The subject is a compulsory to build a basic background in programming. Visual C++ IDE will be used for the compiler and editor in this subject. References 1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, C How To Program 6th Edition,

Pearson Education Inc, 2010. 2. Michael A. Vine, C Programming 2nd Edition for the



BTNE 1113 ELECTRONIC I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the semiconductors theory in electronic applications. 2. Solve problems related to the diode application circuit. 3. Construct electronic circuit when designing simple BJT

amplifier circuits. 4. Construct electronic circuit when designing simple FET

amplifier circuits. 5. Display assignments and technical reports both orally and

in writing Synopsis This course will discuss: 1. Bohr Atomic Model: valency, period table of elements,

trivalent, tetravalent and pentavalent elements, movement electrons in solid: conductor, insulator and semiconductor, bands theory: energy band, conduction band and forbidden band. Doping, p and n materials, pn junction.

2. Silicon Semiconductor Diodes: characteristics and measurement of forward & reverse biased, composite characteristics and load line analysis, clipping and simple rectifier (half & full) circuits, zener diodes characteristics, and simple shunt regulators.

3. Bipolar Junction Transistor: construction and operation of BJT, BJT characteristics and measurement technique, limits of operation, βdc and αdc, DC biasing – DC Load Lines. Amplification of signal. Transistor as a switch.

4. Field Effect Transistor: construction and operation of FET, FET characteristics & diagram, Shockley’s equation, DC biasing – DC Load Lines-Graphical and mathematical approach.

References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit

Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall,

2002. 3. R P Punagin, “Basic Electronics”, Mc-Graw Hill, 2000


108

104

BTNE 1023 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Construct an electronic circuit using PSpice and MATLAB

software. 2. Manipulate the Auto CAD software in making of electronic

circuit and other engineering drawing. 3. Construct the printed circuit board using Proteus software. 4. Describe and present the given assignment based on

technical format. 5. Work as a team in doing an electronic mini project. 6. Display the ability of presenting lab report and project

outcome orally and in writing. Synopsis Simulation tools that covers the software of MATLAB, PSpice and AutoCad. Domestic Wiring – theory on domestic wiring, wiring diagram and lab practical. PCB circuit design fabrication using the design software of Proteus, practical design of the printed circuit board using the Proteus. References 1. Environmental, Safety and Health Engineering, Gayle





Forciniti, WILE

BTNT 1023 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the concept of capacitors and inductors. 2. Solve first order and second order circuit problems. 3. Analyze sinusoidal steady-state condition. 4. Apply knowledge of power condition for AC circuits. 5. Design a simple RLC passive filters. 6. Analyze frequency response of the AC circuits and draw a

Bode plot. 7. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discussed on introduction to Capacitors and Inductors, Series and Parallel Circuits of Capacitors and Inductors, First and Second-Order Circuits, Step Response of The Circuits, Steady-State Analysis, AC Power Analysis, Average Power, RMS Values, Power Factor, Frequency Response, Transfer Function and Bode Plot, Series and Parallel Resonance, Filters. This subject served as basic knowledge needed for electrical and electronic engineer. References 1. Alexander and Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”,

Third Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2006. 2. James W.Nilsson, “Electric Circuit”, Sixth Edition, Prentice

Hall, 2005. 3. Thomas L.Floyd, “Electric Circuits Fundamentals”, Seventh

Edition, 2007.


UTeM

109

105

BTCS 1223 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply advanced programming principles and algorithms in

C programming language 2. Construct C programming structure using advanced

programming techniques and principles. 3. Design and develop well-structured and reliable program in

C programming language. 4. Follow standard engineering manual to present report

development of application program. 5. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal

responsibility in code of conduct. Synopsis Topics covered: more advanced C programming principles such as pointers, characters and strings, structures, unions, bit manipulations and enumerations and file processing. Chapters are integrated with problem solving methods. The subject is a compulsory to strengthen programming skills in students. Visual C++ IDE will be used for demonstration and laboratory sessions in this subject. References 1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, C How To Program 6th Edition,




BTNE 1123 ELECTRONIC II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the fundamentals of small signal audio amplifiers. 2. Measure response of single stage audio amplifiers using

both BJT and FETs. 3. Demonstrate single stage and multistage amplifiers at mid-

band, low and high frequencies. 4. Construct the design of Op-Amps, and analyze basic Op-

amp circuits. 5. Display findings orally or in writing by performing

assignments individually or in groups effectively.

Synopsis This course will discuss BJT Transistor modelling, CE, CC and CB configuration, BJT small signal analysis, Feedback configuration, FET small-signal analysis, Frequency response, Bode plot, Bandwidth, Special amplifier: cascade, cascode, Darlington, multistage, differential amplifier circuit, Operational amplifiers: inverting, non-inverting, summing and buffer References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit

Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. S.H.Ruslan et.al. “ Elektronik II” Penerbitan UTM 1998. 3. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall,

2002. 4. Theodore F. Bogart Jr., Jeffrey S. Beasley and Guillermore

Rico, “ Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2004


110

106










BTNE 2033 ENGINEERING DRAWING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Sketch engineering components manually and using

computer software. 2. Produce technical drawing by using manual draft technique

and using AutoCAD software. 3. Manipulate the Auto CAD software in making drawing and

troubleshoot when error occur. 4. Complete given assignments effectively in group or

individual and present results in the form of standard engineering report.

5. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal responsibility in code of conduct.

Synopsis This subject will discuss draft techniques manually and using computer software (AUTOCAD), basic hardware of draft drawing, technique and applications in producing various technical drawing, AUTOCAD software, interfacing AUTOCAD, editing command, coordinate systems, template and layers 3D modeling. It will help students to read the engineering drawing as well in the AUTOCAD drawing. This subject will introduce students to basic information, skills, and concepts related to drafting and design with the usage of AutoCAD tools and commands References 1. Mohd Ramzan Zainal, Badri Abd Ghani dan Yahya Samian,

Lukisan Kejuruteraan Asas, UTM Skudai, 2000. 2. Yarwood, An Introduction To AutoCAD 2002, Prentice Hall,

London, 2002. 3. F. E. Giesecke, Technical Drawing, 11th Ed., Prentice Hall,

New York, 1999. 4. Jensen, D. H. Jay, Engineering Drawing And Design, 5th Ed.,

Glencoe and McGraw Hill, New York, 1996


UTeM

111

107











BTNE 2114 ELECTRONIC III Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply fundamental knowledge of electronics to explain the

operation, performance and the application of electronic devices such as SCR, SCS, GTO, LASCR, DIAC, TRIAC, UJT and PUT.

2. Analyze the operation of power amplifier, active filter and oscillator circuits.

3. Design power supply circuit using IC regulator. 4. Construct and measure the performance of applied

electronic circuits through lab sessions. 5. display an ability to report findings orally or in writing by

performing assignments/experiments effectively.

Synopsis This course will discuss about Electronic Devices: Application of electronic devices such as SCR, SCS, GTO, LASCR, DIAC, TRIAC, UJT and PUT. Filter: filter applications (basic filter concepts, filter response characteristics, active LP filter, active HP filter, active BP filter, active BS filter and filter response measurement). Oscillator circuits: Feedback oscillator principles, oscillators with the RC feedback circuits, LC feedback circuits, crystal oscillator, Astable and Monostable using op-amp, the 555 timer and applications. Power amplifier circuits: Class A, class B and class AB. Power supply: Power supply circuit, IC voltage regulator and application. These topics are very important to students because it gives emphasis on the design of circuits used in electronic systems References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit

Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. Stanley, W.D., “Op-Amps. and Integrated Linear Circuit”,

Prentice Hall, 2002 3. Boylestad, R.L., 9th Edition, “Electronic Devices”, Prentice

Hall, 2006


112

108

BTNE 2244 CONTROL PRINCIPLE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Measure the response characteristic and differentiate them

between open loop and closed loop system 2. Solve mathematical model for electrical and mechanical

systems using transfer function and state space method. 3. Solve the time response from the transfer function and use

poles and zeros to determine the response of a control system.

4. Manipulate the Routh-Hurwitz criterion method in determining system’s stability through experiment.

5. Demonstrate performance of Gain Adjustment compensator in controlling broadly defined system.

6. Display the ability of presenting lab report orally and in writing.

Synopsis This course will discuss introduction to control system, frequency domain modelling, Laplace transform, transfer function, electric network transfer function, translational mechanical system, rotational mechanical system transfer function, time domain modelling, general state space representation, transfer function and state space conversion, time response, poles, zeros and system response, First and Second order systems, under-damped system, reduction of multiple subsystems, blocks diagrams, feedback systems, signal flow graphs, Mason’s rule, Routh- Hurwitz criterion and Gain Adjustment compensator design. References 1. Nise, S Norman, Control Systems Engineering, 3th Edition,

John Wiley & Sons Inc., United State of America, 2008. 2. Bishop, Dorf, Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,

Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. Smarajit Ghosh, “Control System: Theory and Applications”,

Pearson India, 2005.







Synopsis Alternating Voltage and Current, Phasor, Magnetic Circuit, Electromotive force, magnetic field strength, relation between B and H, Kirchhoff’s law magnetic hysteresis, Single Phase Circuit, series resonance, parallel resonance, power factor, transformer, phasor diagram, equivalent circuit voltage regulation and efficiency, O/C and S/C test, Voltage generation and excitation methods, Basic principles of power system, per unit system, electrical transmission. References 1. Hughes E., Electrical Technology, Longman, 10th Edition,



Wiley,2nd Edition.


UTeM

113

109

BLHH 1032 INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY & ORGANISATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Elaborate on the aspects of humanity in organisational life. 2. Exhibit leadership characteristics in managing an

organisation. 3. Differentiate the relationship and behaviour between an

individual and a group in an organisation in attaining productivity.

Synopsis This course provides exposure to aspects of psychology as well as problems related to organizational behaviour at the industrial workplace. Matters discussed include work satisfaction, stress management, work analysis, selection and training, group dynamics, interpersonal communication, problems in workers union, human and ergonomic factors, leadership and influence, design and development of an organization. References 1. Aamodt, M. G. (1999). Application Industrial/

Organizational Psychology. Australia: Wadsworth. 2. Ishak Mad Shah. (2002). Pengenalan Psikologi Industri dan

Organisasi. Skudai: Penerbit UTM. 3. Muchinsky, P. M. (2000). Psychology Applied to Work.

Australia: Wadsworth.

BTNE 3234 INDUSTRIAL CONTROL Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concepts, terminologies and operating

principle of the elements related to industrial control system.

2. Design a solution to broadly-defined engineering problems using relay ladder diagram approach.

3. Construct the PLC programming language using CX-Programmer Software based on specifications.

4. Display an ability in reporting technical findings both orally and in writing using standard engineering guideline.

Synopsis This subject will provide the students both solid theoretical concepts related to industrial control system and a practical to the Programmable logic controller (PLC) which is generally used in the industrial control. Extensive practical-oriented and hands on session will be given using OMRON PLC Training Kit equipment. The graphical programming tools, GRAFCET will be introduced in the course. The topics as listed below:- 1. Introduction to Industrial Control 2. Discrete control elements and Relay Ladder diagram 3. Programmable logic controller (PLC) 4. Discrete sensors and actuators 5. GRAFCET This subject is the authentic problem based purposely to expose the students with real engineering problems in the industries References 1. John Stenerson. Industrial Automation and Process Control.

Prentice Hall. 2003. 2. Russell Biekert. CIM Technology. Goodheart-Wilcox: Illinois.

1998 3. Mikell P. Groover. Automation, Production Systems, and

Computer-Integrated Manufacturing, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2008

4. Killian. Modern Control Technology: Components and Systems, 2nd Ed, Delmar, 2001


114

110

BTCS 3134 MICROPROCESSOR & MICROCONTROLLER TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the microprocessor and microcontroller’s

architecture and peripheral subsystem of MC68K and PIC16F877A.

2. Classify interrupts and internal registers modifications to solve specific I/O tasks.

3. Display microprocessor and microcontroller subsystem’s performance in peripheral interfacing via high/low level language

4. Design and develop a microcontroller-based system with peripheral devices interface.

5. Perform efficiently as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.

Synopsis This subject will provide the students both theoretical & practical applications to the microprocessors/microcontrollers-based system. Practical sessions will be given using MC68K microprocessor and PIC microcontroller involving program development software, chip programming and debugging. Topics covered are microcomputer system & peripheral design, software and hardware integration; interrupt control system, analog interfacing, subsystems on microprocessor, etc. References 1. Dogan Ibrahim, Advanced Microcontroller Projects in C,

Newnes Elsevier Ltd., 2008. 2. PIC Microcontrollers: Know It All (Newnes Know It All) by

Lucio Di Jasio, Tim Wilmshurst, Dogan Ibrahim and John Morton, 2007

3. M Ali Mazidi , PIC Microcontroller and Embedded System (2 edition), , 2007.

4. Beginner's Guide To Embedded C Programming: Using The Pic Microcontroller And The Hitech Pic-Lite C Compiler by Chuck Hellebuyck, 2008

5. Microprocessor Theory and Applications with 68000/68020 and Pentium by Mohamed Rafiquzzaman (2008)

6. Microprocessors Software and Hardware Design Using MC68000 by M. H. Hassan (2008).

BTNE 3454 PROCESS INTRUMENTATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Construct the process control block diagram, process

control drawing (P&ID), various sensors (thermal, mechanical and optical) and final control elements operation including actuator and control elements.

2. Construct various signal conditioning circuits for different types of sensors.

3. Construct the controller output response based on certain requirements.

4. Demonstrate PI, PD and PID Controller op-amp circuits and analyze its performance.

5. Work by group to perform assignments/lab activity. Synopsis Process control block diagram, analog and digital processing, sensors: thermal, mechanical, and optical; final control operation, controller principles: discontinuous, continuous, and composite control modes; analog controllers, control-loop characteristics and system stability. References 1. Johnson, C. D., “Process Control Instrumentation

Technology”, 8th Ed., Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. DeSa, Douglas O.J., “Instrumentation Fundamentals for

Process Control”, Taylor& Francis, 2001. 3. Morris, Alan S., “Measurement and Instrumentation

Principles”, 3rd Ed, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2001.


UTeM

115

111

BTNE 3714 DATA ACQUISITION & SENSOR

Learning Outcomes Upon completing this course, the student should be able to: 1. Classify the concept of data acquisition and sensor. 2. Design broadly-define control system in simulation tools

and analyze its performance. 3. Construct and define control system using the data

acquisition card. 4. Use and apply the concept of closed loop system in

obtaining better performance of control system. 5. Display the ability of presenting lab report and project

outcome orally and in writing.

Synopsis Introduction on Data Acquisition and Sensor, Data Acquisition Hardware, Analog and Digital Signals, Signal Conditioning, Serial Data Communications, Distributed & Standalone Loggers/Controllers, IEEE 488 Standard, Ethernet & LAN Systems, The Universal Serial Bus (USB), Specific Techniques, The PCMCIA Card Sensor and application, Labview, Interfacing Software and Hardware, Controlling automation system using Labview.

This subject prepares students with knowledge and skills to use data acquisition hardware and software as well as sensors.

References 1. John Park, Steve Mackay, Practical Data Acquisition for

Instrumentation and Control Systems, Elsevier. 2. Bruce Mihura, LabVIEW for Data Acquisition, Prentice Hall. 3. Kevin James, PC Interfacing and Data Acquisition:

Techniques for Measurement, Instrumentation and Control.

4. Labview Course Manual.

BTNE 3424 INDUSTRIAL PNUEMATIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Illustrate the operating principles of elements in industrial

pneumatics system. 2. Design pneumatic systems based on the specification given. 3. Assemble the discrete pneumatic circuits to investigate the

efficiency of several design techniques. 4. Work individually or in groups effectively in performing

assignments/case studies.

Synopsis Topics covered in this course are Compressed air: theory, production, purification and distribution; pneumatic components, actuators, directional control valves, pneumatic control configurations, electro-pneumatic components, electro-pneumatic control configuration, sequential and cascade design methods of pneumatic and electro-pneumatic systems. The test on this technology will be held in this course to ensure the competency level is up to industrial standard. The test will be conducted with cooperation of SMC (Pneumatics) Sdn Bhd. The certificate is recognized by HRDC schemes References 1. Smct.Pt1, Pneumatic Technology 1, Textbook, SMC,

Graphitype Printing Services, 1998. 2. Anthony Esposito, Fluid Power with Applications, 6th ed.,

Prentice Hall, 2003. 3. Z.L. Lansky, L.F. Schrod, Industrial Pneumatic Control,

Marcel Dekker Inc, 1986.


116

112

BTNE 3764 EMBEDDED SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply knowledge of engineering to explain key features of

embedded systems. 2. Analyze various microcontrollers and make professional

decisions on which microcontroller to use for given scenarios and constraints.

3. Design and implement microcontroller systems using programmable or reconfigurable devices.

4. Organize the operation between microcontroller and its input/output devices interfacing through lab sessions.

5. Demonstrate effectively as individual and in group. Synopsis This course will discuss about embedded System, characteristics & application areas, introduction to digital hardware technologies, introduction to computer systems & architectures, introduction to assembler-level software and high level language programming for Embedded Systems, introduction to Interfacing Computer Systems to External Hardware, application-level embedded system design concepts in industrial electronics. These topics are very important to students because it gives emphasis on the design of circuits used in embedded systems. References 1. Peter Marwedel, “Embedded System Design”, Kluwer

Academic Publishers, 2005. 2. Michael Barr, “Programming Embedded System in C &

C++”, O’Reilly, 2006. 3. Arnold Berger, “Embedded Systems Design: An Introduction

to Processes, Tools and Techniques”, CMP Books, 2001.

BTNE 3334 POWER ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the operational principles and concepts of power

semiconductor switches. 2. Use power semiconductor switches in designing power

electronic converter circuits. 3. Analyze the operational principles and concepts of motor

drives. 4. Construct and measure the performance of power

electronic circuits through lab sessions. 5. Perform and report assignment given effectively as

individual or in groups. Synopsis This course will discuss about power electronics fundamentals, protection devices and circuit, diode rectifiers, AC to DC converters (controlled rectifiers), DC to DC converters (dc choppers), switch-mode power supply and DC to AC converters (inverter). References 1. Muhammad H. Rashid, “Power Electronics - Circuit,

Devices, and Applications” , Prentice Hall, 2004. 2. Ned Mohan, “Electric Drives - An Integrative Approach” ,

Prentice Hall,2003. 3. Muhammad H. Rashid, “Introduction to PSPICE Using

ORCAD for Circuits and Electronics”, Prentice Hall,2003.


UTeM

117

113

BTCS 4324 COMPUTER INTERFACING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the concept, architecture and peripheral

subsystems of a microcontroller for computer interfacing. 2. Construct a microcontroller-based system with various

peripheral devices interfaces and study the implementation problems during interfacing.

3. Share resources and responsibilities effectively to complete given task on computer interfacing in a group.

4. Manipulate and compare experimental data to solve various problems.

Synopsis This course covers abstractions and implementation techniques for the design of application using computer interfacing. Topics include: microcontroller, features of different I/O peripheral devices and their interfaces, Java programming language and interfacing, sensors and actuators, data analysis and controls and various software and hardware tool which significant for computer interfacing. This subject is taken to expose student to Java programming language and interfacing computer with other peripherals. Eclipse IDE will be used as the compiler and editor to demonstrate programming and in laboratories session in this subject. References 1. Jonathan W. Valvano (2011), Embedded Microcomputer

Systems: Real Time Interfacing, CL-Engineering. 2. Joshua Bloch (2008), Effective Java (2nd Edition), Prentice

Hall. 3. Y. Daniel Liang (2010), Introduction to Java Programming,

Comprehensive, Prentice Hall. 4. Wilbert O. Galitz (2007), The Essential Guide to User

Interface Design: An Introduction to GUI Design Principles and Techniques, Wiley.

5. Harprit Sandhu (2008), Making PIC Microcontroller Instruments and Controllers, McGraw-Hill/TAB Electronics.

6. Harprit Sandhu (2010), Running Small Motors with PIC Microcontrollers, McGraw-Hill/TAB Electronics.








118

114

BTNE 4434 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Illustrates the basic concepts related to automation and its

benefits to manufacturing. 2. Explain the current and future trends of electronics

manufacturing processes and technologies. 3. Design the flexible manufacturing systems by applying the

concepts of control technologies, material handling and manufacturing systems.

4. Display the quality characteristics using appropriate quality control software.

5. Work individually or in groups effectively in performing assignments/case.

Synopsis Topics covered in this course are major manufacturing processess, materials, technologies of electronics packaging, surface mount assembly and printed board fabrications. Also cover an automation and control technologies, material handling, manufacturing support systems, quality control in manufacturing systems. This subject will prepare the students with knowledge and practical aspects regarding manufacturing line and respected areas. References 1. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems and

Computer- Integrated Manufacturing, Prentice Hall (2007). 2. James A. Tompkins, Facility Planning, Wiley, 4th Edition,

2010. 3. R. Larry & W. Mattie, Implementing World Class

Manufacturing, 2nd Edition, WCM Association, 2004.

BTNE 4454 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Illustrate the anatomy of industrial manipulator and solve

the manipulator coordinate mapping and transformation. 2. Analyze kinematics parameters of industrial manipulator

and solve its forward/inverse kinematics. 3. Analyze robot’s dynamics which include develop model and

solving of simple joint velocities, forces and torques. 4. Organize an experiment to investigate the simple

manipulator controller based on several techniques. 5. Display ability in reporting technical findings both orally

and in writing using standard engineering guideline. Synopsis Topics covered in this course are mechanics and control of mechanical manipulator, coordinate mapping and transformation, forward kinematics, inverse manipulator kinematics, manipulator dynamics, trajectory generation, linear and nonlinear robot control system. As practical engineers, the knowledge and practical aspects regarding an industrial robotics is a must. Most of the plants nowadays are equipped with their own robots. References 1. J.J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control,

3rd Ed., Upper Saddle River, NJ, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005.

2. R.K. Mittal, I.J. Nagrath, Robotics and Control, New Delhi, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.

3. K.S. Fu, R.C. Gonzales, C.S.G. Lee, Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence. McGraw-Hill, 1988.


UTeM

119

115

BTNE 4344 ELECTRICAL DRIVE & CONTROL Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Classify the operation and basic control of electrical DC and

AC motors. 2. Measure the speed controlling system of AC and DC motors

in laboratory experiments. 3. Discover the operation in controlling the speed of AC and

DC motors. 4. Solve, design and troubleshoot electrical drives. 5. Measure in experiments and present technical reports. Synopsis Elements of electric drive systems, electromechanical modelling, basic speed control of dc motors, switching amplifier field current controllers, armature voltage controllers, troubleshooting of dc drives, modelling of permanent magnet brushless dc motor, braking of dc motors, limitation of electric drives, control of ac motor, braking of ac motors and stepper motor. References 1. Theodore Wildi, Electrical Machines, Drives and Power

Systems, Prentice Hall, 2006. 2. Norman S. Nise, Control System Engineering, Wiley, 4th

Edition, 2005. 3. Mohamed A. El-Sharkawi, Fundamentals of Electric Drives,

Brooks/Cole, 2000. 4. Michael E. Brumbach, Electronic Variable Speed Drives,

Delmar Publishers, 2nd Edition.

BTNU 4814 FINAL YEAR PROJECT II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Construct projects based on engineering problems. 2. Organize various technical understanding required towards

a particular engineering field. 3. Manipulate experimental models, and use facilities

available to the optimum 4. Propose and make suggestions for further improvement. 5. Write a formal engineering report and display by oral

presentation. 6. Demonstrate business potentials on the developed project. 7. Demonstrate the right attitude in completing the project. Synopsis This is the second part of the final year project. Students are expected to continue the project done in Bachelor Degree Project Part I till completion. At the end of the semester students are required to submit the final year project report both orally and in writing for assessment. References None


120

116








People.


UTeM

121

117









BTNE 1013 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to:

1. Demonstrate safety and health regulation in the lab activity.

2. Demonstrate and diagnose an electronic circuit using electronic testing equipment.

3. Manipulate the simulation tools for the electronic circuit analysis according to IPC standard.

4. Describe and present the given assignment based on technical report format.

5. Work as a team in practicing the problem based learning project.

6. Display the ability of presenting lab report and project outcome orally and in writing.

Synopsis Introduction to Industrial Safety and Health + Lab Safety, Equipment- theory, testing and circuit diagnostic & Report writing, Component – introduction, theory, assembly and soldering, Simulation tools - MULTISIM – introduction and application, Problem Based Learning (PBL). References 1. Environmental, Safety and Health Engineering, Gayle





Forciniti, WILE

BTNT Course Core Subjects (K)


122

118

BTNE 1113 ELECTRONIC I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the semiconductors theory in electronic applications. 2. Solve problems related to the diode application circuit. 3. Construct electronic circuit when designing simple BJT

amplifier circuits. 4. Construct electronic circuit when designing simple FET

amplifier circuits. 5. Display assignments and technical reports both orally and

in writing Synopsis This course will discuss: 1. Bohr Atomic Model: valency, period table of elements,

trivalent, tetravalent and pentavalent elements, movement electrons in solid: conductor, insulator and semiconductor, bands theory: energy band, conduction band and forbidden band. Doping, p and n materials, pn junction.

2. Silicon Semiconductor Diodes: characteristics and measurement of forward & reverse biased, composite characteristics and load line analysis, clipping and simple rectifier (half & full) circuits, zener diodes characteristics, and simple shunt regulators.

3. Bipolar Junction Transistor: construction and operation of BJT, BJT characteristics and measurement technique, limits of operation, βdc and αdc, DC biasing – DC Load Lines. Amplification of signal. Transistor as a switch.

4. Field Effect Transistor: construction and operation of FET, FET characteristics & diagram, Shockley’s equation, DC biasing – DC Load Lines-Graphical and mathematical approach.

References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit

Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall,

2002. 3. R P Punagin, “Basic Electronics”, Mc-Graw Hill, 2000

BTNT 1023 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the concept of capacitors and inductors. 2. Solve first order and second order circuit problems. 3. Analyze sinusoidal steady-state condition. 4. Apply knowledge of power condition for AC circuits. 5. Design a simple RLC passive filters. 6. Analyze frequency response of the AC circuits and draw a

Bode plot. 7. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discussed on introduction to Capacitors and Inductors, Series and Parallel Circuits of Capacitors and Inductors, First and Second-Order Circuits, Step Response of The Circuits, Steady-State Analysis, AC Power Analysis, Average Power, RMS Values, Power Factor, Frequency Response, Transfer Function and Bod Plot, Series and Parallel Resonance, Filters. This subject served as basic knowledge needed for electrical and electronic engineer. References 1. Alexander and Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”,

Third Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2006. 2. James W.Nilsson, “Electric Circuit”, Sixth Edition, Prentice

Hall, 2005. 3. Thomas L.Floyd, “Electric Circuits Fundamentals”, Seventh

Edition, 2007.


UTeM

123

119

BTNE 1023 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Construct an electronic circuit using PSpice and MATLAB

software. 2. Manipulate the Auto CAD software in making of electronic

circuit and other engineering drawing. 3. Construct the printed circuit board using Proteus software. 4. Describe and present the given assignment based on

technical format. 5. Work as a team in doing an electronic mini project. 6. Display the ability of presenting lab report and project

outcome orally and in writing. Synopsis Simulation tools that covers the software of MATLAB, PSpice and AutoCad. Domestic Wiring – theory on domestic wiring, wiring diagram and lab practical. PCB circuit design fabrication using the design software of Proteus, practical design of the printed circuit board using the Proteus. References 1. Environmental, Safety and Health Engineering, Gayle





Forciniti, WILE



fundamentals and principles. 3. analyze small to medium scale problems and develop


responsibility in code of conduct.

Synopsis Topics covered: basic programming principles such as introduction to C programming consists of syntax, variables and basic data type, more fundamentals programming structure such as operator, rules / condition, looping, function, array and sequences. The subject is a compulsory to build a basic background in programming. Visual C++ IDE will be used for the compiler and editor in this subject. References 1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, C How To Program 6th Edition,

Pearson Education Inc, 2010. 2. Michael A. Vine, C Programming 2nd Edition for the




124

120

BTNE 1123 ELECTRONIC II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the fundamentals of small signal audio amplifiers. 2. Measure response of single stage audio amplifiers using

both BJT and FETs. 3. Demonstrate single stage and multistage amplifiers at mid-

band, low and high frequencies. 4. Construct the design of Op-Amps, and analyze basic Op-

amp circuits. 5. Display findings orally or in writing by performing

assignments individually or in groups effectively.

Synopsis This course will discuss BJT Transistor modelling, CE, CC and CB configuration, BJT small signal analysis, Feedback configuration, FET small-signal analysis, Frequency response, Bode plot, Bandwidth, Special amplifier: cascade, Darlington, multistage, differential amplifier circuit, Operational amplifiers: inverting, non-inverting, summing and buffer. References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit

Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. S.H.Ruslan et.al. “ Elektronik II” Penerbitan UTM 1998. 3. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall,

2002. 4. Theodore F. Bogart Jr., Jeffrey S. Beasley and Guillermore

Rico, “ Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.







Synopsis Alternating Voltage and Current, Phasor, Magnetic Circuit, Electromotive force, magnetic field strength, relation between B and H, Kirchhoff’s law magnetic hysteresis, Single Phase Circuit, series resonance, parallel resonance, power factor, transformer, phasor diagram, equivalent circuit voltage regulation and efficiency, O/C and S/C test, Voltage generation and excitation methods, Basic principles of power system, per unit system, electrical transmission. References 1. Hughes E., Electrical Technology, Longman, 10th Edition,



Wiley,2nd Edition.


UTeM

125

121

BTNT 2033 CONTINUOUS SIGNAL & SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain different types of signal and systems properties

that are commonly used in engineering. 2. Produce the Fourier series and transform in terms of

applicable time functions and the resulting spectral properties.

3. Apply the continuous-time Fourier Transform in analyzing non- periodic signal.

4. Use Laplace transform in 2nd order circuit analysis 5. Manipulate and explain a simple Matlab programming for

signal and system applications. 6. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis The course will cover various topics such as Introduction to Continuous-Time Signals and Systems: Fundamental Concept, Transformations of Continuous-Time Signals, Signal Characteristics, Common Signals, Continuous-Time Systems and Its Properties, Convolution for Continuous-Time LTI Systems, Properties of Convolution, Properties of LTI Systems; Fourier Series: Introduction of continuous Fourier Series and Its Coefficients, Frequency Spectra, Fourier Series Properties; Fourier Transform: Definition, Properties of continuous Fourier Transform, Application of Fourier Transform, Energy and Power Density Spectra; Laplace Transform: Definition, Properties of Laplace Transform, Response of LTI Systems, etc. References 1. Mrinal Mandal, Amir Asif, Continuous and Discrete Time


Circuit, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006. 3. William D. Stanley, Network Analysis with Applications, 3rd

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000. 4. Charles L. Phillips, John M. Parr, Eve A. Riskin, Signals,

Systems and Transforms, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003. 5. M. J Roberts, Signals and Systems, McGraw Hill,

2003.











126

122

BTNE 2244 CONTROL PRINCIPLE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Measure the response characteristic and differentiate them

between open loop and closed loop system 2. Solve mathematical model for electrical and mechanical

systems using transfer function and state space method. 3. Solve the time response from the transfer function and use

poles and zeros to determine the response of a control system.

4. Manipulate the Routh-Hurwitz criterion method in determining system’s stability through experiment.

5. Demonstrate performance of Gain Adjustment compensator in controlling broadly defined system.

6. Display the ability of presenting lab report orally and in writing.

Synopsis This course will discuss introduction to control system, frequency domain modelling, Laplace transform, transfer function, electric network transfer function, translational mechanical system, rotational mechanical system transfer function, time domain modelling, general state space representation, transfer function and state space conversion, time response, poles, zeros and system response, First and Second order systems, under-damped system, reduction of multiple subsystems, blocks diagrams, feedback systems, signal flow graphs, Mason’s rule, Routh- Hurwitz criterion and Gain Adjustment compensator design. References 1. Nise, S Norman, Control Systems Engineering, 3th Edition,

John Wiley & Sons Inc., United State of America, 2008. 2. Bishop, Dorf, Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,

Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. Smarajit Ghosh, “Control System: Theory and Applications”,

Pearson India, 2005.

BTNE 2114 ELECTRONIC III Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply fundamental knowledge of electronics to explain the

operation, performance and the application of electronic devices such as SCR, SCS, GTO, LASCR, DIAC, TRIAC, UJT and PUT.

2. Analyze the operation of power amplifier, active filter and oscillator circuits.

3. Design power supply circuit using IC regulator. 4. Construct and measure the performance of applied

electronic circuits through lab sessions. 5. Display an ability to report findings orally or in writing by

performing assignments/experiments effectively.

Synopsis This course will discuss about Electronic Devices: Application of electronic devices such as SCR, SCS, GTO, LASCR, DIAC, TRIAC, UJT and PUT. Filter: filter applications (basic filter concepts, filter response characteristics, active LP filter, active HP filter, active BP filter, active BS filter and filter response measurement). Oscillator circuits: Feedback oscillator principles, oscillators with the RC feedback circuits, LC feedback circuits, crystal oscillator, Astable and Monostable using op-amp, the 555 timer and applications. Power amplifier circuits: Class A, class B and class AB. Power supply: Power supply circuit, IC voltage regulator and application. These topics are very important to students because it gives emphasis on the design of circuits used in electronic systems References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit

Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. Stanley, W.D., “Op-Amps. and Integrated Linear Circuit”,

Prentice Hall, 2002 3. Boylestad, R.L., 9th Edition, “Electronic Devices”, Prentice

Hall, 2006


UTeM

127

123








People












128

124

BTNT 2084 DATA COMMUNICATION & NETWORKING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain data communication, networking, communication

protocol and architecture. 2. Explain the Open System Interconnection reference model. 3. Analyse issue related to internetworking protocol, network

routing, topology and plan subnet masks. 4. Analyze major routing protocols used in wired and wireless

networks and troubleshoot network problems by means of network analyzer.

5. Work together with team members during experiments. 6. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Inter networking, Network Access, Open System Interconnection, Application & Services and Network Security. The rationale of offering this subject is as providing vast knowledge on telecommunication data networking and as well as preparation for Certified IP Associate exams. References 1. W. Stallings, Data & Computer Communication 8th Edition,

Pearson, 2007 2. B. A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking 4th

Edition, McGraw Hill, 2007. 3. Tomasi, W, Electronic Communication System:

Fundamentals Through Advanced 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004.

4. L. Peterson, B. Davie and M. Kaufmann, Computer Networks: A System Approach, 4th Edition, 2003.

5. J. Koruse and K. Ross, Computer Networking: A Top Down Approach Featuring the Internet, Addison-Wesley, 2003.

BTNT 2063 DISCRETE SIGNAL & SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Sketch and explain the different types of discrete signal and

systems properties that are commonly used in engineering. 2. Classify the properties of discrete-time Fourier Series

(DTFS) and discrete-time Fourier transform (DTFT). 3. Apply the convolution sum method in order to find output

of discrete-time system. 4. Explain the important of discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). 5. Manipulate and explain a simple Matlab programming for

discrete-time signal and system. 6. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis The course will cover various topics such as Introduction to Discrete-Time Signals and Systems: Fundamental Concept, Transformations of Discrete-Time Signals, Signal Characteristics, Common Signals, Discrete -Time Systems and Its Properties; Time-Domain Analysis of Discrete-Time Signals and Systems: Impulse response of a system, Convolution sum, Graphical method for evaluating the convolution sum, Properties of the convolution sum, Impulse response of LTID systems; Discrete-Time Fourier Series And Transform: Discrete-time Fourier series, Fourier transform for aperiodic functions, Existence of the DTFT, DTFT of periodic functions, Properties of the DTFT and the DTFS, etc; Discrete Fourier Transform: Continuous to discrete Fourier transform, Discrete Fourier transform, Spectrum analysis using the DFT, Properties of the DFT, Convolution using the DFT, etc. References 1. MrinalMandal, Amir Asif, Continuous and Discrete Time


Circuit, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006. 3. William D. Stanley, Network Analysis with Applications, 3rd

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000. 4. Charles L. Phillips, John M. Parr, Eve A. Riskin, Signals,

Systems and Transforms, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003. 5. M. J Roberts, Signals and Systems, McGraw Hill, 2003.


UTeM

129

125

BTNT 3103 ELECTROMAGNETIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the principles involving magnetostatic,

electrostatic, time varying field and wave propagation. 2. Apply the concepts and laws of magnetostatic, electrostatic

and time varying fields. 3. Apply appropriate laws to solve problems related to

magnetostatic, electrostatic, time varying field and wave. 4. Demonstrate the capability of conducting assignments in

relation to the study of electromagnetic individually or in a group.

Synopsis This subject will discussed on Vector analysis: Vector algebra, coordinate system and transformation, vector calculus; Electrostatics: Electrostatic fields, Gauss Law, Poisson’s equation, electric fields in material space, electrostatic boundary; Magnetostatics: Magnetostatic fields, Stokes Theorem, Biot-Savart Law, Gauss Law, magnetic forces, material and devices and magnetostatic boundary; Waves: Maxwell’s equations, Faraday’s Law, time-varying electromagnetic field, induced emf, displacement current. Electromagnetic wave propagation: free space, lossy and lossless dielectric, etc. References 1. M.N.O. Sadiku, Elements of Electromagnetics, 4th. Edition,

Oxford University Press, 2007. 2. William H. Hayt, Jr., John A. Buck, Engineering

Electromagnetics, 6th Ed., Mc Graw Hill, 2001. 3. F.T. Ulaby, Electromagnetics for Engineers, Pearson

International Edition, Prentice-Hall, 2005. 4. Uma Mukheriji, Elektromagnetic Field Theory and Wave

Propagation, Alpha Science International Ltd, 2006 5. G.S.N. Raju, Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission

Lines, 2nd Impression, Pearson Education, 2008. 6. Joseph A. Edminister, Schaum’s Outline of Theory and

Problems of Electromagnetics, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1993

BTNT 3043 TELECOMMUNICATION ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Analyze small signal RF Amplifier components 2. Analyze RF oscillators such as Hartley, Colpitts and Clapp 3. Explain and apply the function of PLLs 4. Construct and analyze various types RF oscillator 5. Design a simple filter design for receiver circuit 6. Display and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Radio Frequency Amplifiers, Radio Frequency Oscillators, PLLs and Frequency Synthesizers, Transmitter Circuits and Receiver Circuits. The rationale of offering this subject is as the progression of communication system where students should have knowledge of communication electronics and basic skills required by the industry. References 1. P.H. Young, Electronic Communication Techniques, 5th

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004. 2. W. Tomasi, Electronic Communications Systems, 5th Edition,

Prentice Hall, 2004. 3. Frenzel, Communication Electronics, Mc Graw Hill, 2004. 4. Keneddy, Davis, Electronic Communication Systems, 4th

Edition, Mc Graw Hill.


130

126

BTNT 3073 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain radio frequency spectrum and allocations. 2. Explain digital broadcasting technology. 3. Construct and analyse telecommunication switching system

and technology. 4. Solve optical communication system, wireless

communication, satellite and terrestrial system. 5. Display and explain their assignment clearly.

Synopsis This subject will discuss on Radio Spectrum, Broadcasting, PSTN/ISDN, Satellite System, Radar System, Optical Communication and Wireless Communication. The rationale of offering this subject is as providing fundamental knowledge on various types of telecommunication system and as foundation for higher level subjects. References 1. Tomasi W., Electronic Communication Systems:

Fundamentals through Advanced, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004.

2. Theodore S. Rappaport, Wireless Communication, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002.

3. Paul H. Young, Electronics Communication Techniques, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004.

4. G. Maral & M. Bousquet, Satellite Communications Systems, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.

5. M.I. Skolnik, Introduction to Radar System, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.

6. Elliott D. Kaplan, H. Christopher, Understanding GPS: Principles and Applications, 2nd Edition, Artech House Publishers, 2005.

7. T. Viswanathan, Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks, Prentice-Hall of India, 2007.

8. Marion Cole, Introduction to Telecommunications – Voice, Data and Internet, Pearson Education, 2001.V. Thiagarajan, “Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks”, Prentice-Hall India, 2007.

BTNT 3093 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic theory in digital signal processing. 2. Apply the concepts in digital signal processing such in

discrete-time signals and systems and spectrum representations.

3. Apply z-transform in the impulse response, signal flow graph using difference equations, stability determination.

4. Organize the implementation of digital signal processing in a system and demonstrate by using Matlab and TMS320C6713 DSP Processor.

5. Explain and apply the correlation function, random variable, statistical properties of random signal.

6. Report and explain their assignment clearly either individual or groups.

Synopsis Topics covered: Introduction to DSP, discrete-time signals and systems, spectrum of representation of discrete-time signals, discrete Fourier transform, difference equations and discrete-time systems, z-transform and its applications, analysis and design of digital filters and random signals. References 1. Sanjit K.Mitra, Digital Signal Processing: A Computer Based

Approach, Mc Graw Hill,2010. 2. Tamal Bose, Francois Meyer, Digital Signal and Image

Processing, John Wiley and Sons, 2004. 3. Oppenheim, Schafer, Discrete-time Signal Processing,

Prentice-Hall, 2010. 4. Proakis, Manolikas, Digital Signal Processing: Principles,

Algorithms, and Applications, 4thEdition, Prentice-Hall, 2007.

5. Norhashimah Mohd Saad, Abdul Rahim Abdullah, Real Time Digital Signal Processing-A Practical Approach using TMS320C6713 DSP Processor, PenerbitUTeM, 2007.


UTeM

131

127

BTCS 2113 FUNDAMENTAL OF MICROPROCESSOR & MICROCONTROLLER TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain fundamental concepts of microprocessor and

microcontroller architecture and operations. 2. Develop the interfacing circuitry of basic

microprocessor/microcontroller-based systems and its supporting components by using assembly language/high level programming.

3. Basic design of 68K microprocessor memory decoding circuits and microcontroller applications.

4. Perform effectively in given tasks and assignment by managing different information from multiple resources.

Synopsis This subject covers basic fundamental of microprocessors and microcontroller, assembly language programming and hardware interfacing. This course is essentially divided into 3 sections. The first part covers on microprocessor/microcontroller-based Systems and Introduction to 68000 Microprocessor and PIC16F877A. The second part deals with the some basic topics of microprocessor instruction set and high level language. The last segment examines topics on The 68000 hardware and PIC16F877A architecture, memory system and Input/output system. References 1. James L. Antonakos , The 68000 Microprocessor Hardware

and Software Principles and Applications, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2004.

2. Alan Clements, Microprocessor Systems Design 68000 Hardware, Software, and Interfacing, Third Edition, PWS Publishing Company, 1997.

3. Han-Way Huang, PIC Microcontroller to Software and Hardware Interfacing, Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004

4. John Morton, PIC Your Personal Introductory Course, 2nd Edition, Newnes, 2001.

BTNT 3134 RF TECHNIQUE & MICROWAVE

Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Illustrate transmission line circuits at RF and microwave

frequencies 2. Solve transmission line problems by construct matching

network using the Smith Chart 3. Design and analyze the EM transmission characteristics of

planar lines and waveguides for desired requirements. 4. Apply the RF networks properties by using scattering

parameter 5. Construct and explain the passive and active RF/microwave

components that fulfill the desired specifications. 6. Construct and optimize the passive and active

RF/microwave components using RF simulation software. 7. Report and explain their given assignment clearly.

Synopsis This subject will discussed on Introduction to RF and Microwave Engineering; Transmission Lines; Microwave Network Analysis; Impedance Matching and Tuning; Power Dividers and Couplers; Microwave Filter and Microwave Amplifier. References 1. Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”. John Wiley & Sons, 2004. 2. Liao’, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”. Prentice Hall,

1990. 3. R. Ludwig & P. Bretchko, “RF Circuit Design: Theory and

Applications”,Pearson Prentice Hall, 2000. 4. RE Collin, “Foundation for Microwave Engineering”, Mc-

Graw Hill Inc., 1992. 5. E.H Fooks, R. A Zakarevicious, “Microwave Engineering

Using Microstrip Circuits”, Prentice Hall, 1990.


132

128

BTNT 3113 TELECOMMUNICATION SWITCHING SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Discover the evolution of switching techniques and system

in telecommunication network. 2. Explain the functions of main elements in Public Switched

Telephone Network. 3. Analyse switching stages. 4. Apply telecommunication traffic engineering to evaluate

network performance. 5. Identify the importance of signalling in telecommunication

network. 6. Construct, evaluate the application of time division

switching in telecommunication network. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Introduction & Evolution Of Switching System, Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Telecommunication Traffic, Switching Network, Time Division Switching, Telecommunication Signalling and Network. The rationale of offering this subject is as telecommunication switching system is one of the important elements in telecommunication system, students will be analysing the functionality as well as evaluating the network performance as required by the industry. References 1. V. Thiagarajan, “Telecommunication Switching Systems and

Networks”, Prentice-Hall India, 2007. 2. Roger L. Freeman, “Fundamental of

Telecommunications”,2nd Edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2005. 3. Roger L. Freeman, “Telecommunication System

Engineering”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2004. 4. Marion Cole, “Introduction to Telecommunications: Voice,

Data and the Internet”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000. 5. E. Bryan Carne, “Telecommunication Primer: Data, Voice &

Video Communications”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 1999. 6. J. E. Flood, “Telecommunications, Switching, Traffic and

Networks”, Prentice Hall, 1999. 7. Marion Cole, “Telecommunications”’, Prentice Hall, 1999.

BTNT 3123 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Classify various types of bandpass digital signalling

techniques including their spectral efficiencies. 2. Design a digital receiver system by taking into

consideration the noise performance. 3. Solve various types of equalization available to encounter

intersymbol interference and differentiate between various types of multiplexing techniques in digital communication systems.

4. Explain the importance of signal synchronization and techniques used in spreading the information signal as well as their advantages and disadvantages.

5. Work effectively either individually or group for any assignment given.

6. Classify various types of bandpass digital signalling techniques including their spectral efficiencies.

Synopsis This subject will discuss on Review of Baseband Signalling, Bandpass Signalling, Baseband and Bandpass Detection, , Equalization, Synchronization , Multiplexing and Multiple Access and Spread Spectrum The rationale of offering this subject is as the progression of communication system where students should have knowledge of communication principles and basic skills required by the industry. References 1. Sklar B., Digital Communications: Fundamentals and

Applications, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002. 2. Proakis J.G., Digital Communications, 4th Edition, McGraw

Hill, 2000. 3. Couch L.W., Digital and Analog Communication Systems, 7th

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.


UTeM

133

129







BTNU 4814 FINAL YEAR PROJECT II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Construct projects based on engineering problems. 2. Organize various technical understanding required towards

a particular engineering field. 3. Manipulate experimental models, and use facilities

available to the optimum 4. Propose and make suggestions for further improvement. 5. Write a formal engineering report and display by oral

presentation. 6. Demonstrate business potentials on the developed project. 7. Demonstrate the right attitude in completing the project. Synopsis This is the second part of the final year project. Students are expected to continue the project done in Bachelor Degree Project Part I till completion. At the end of the semester students are required to submit the final year project report both orally and in writing for assessment. References None


134

130

BTNT 4413 MOBILE COMMUNICATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concepts of a mobile communication

system. 2. Design a model of cellular radio system communication and

analyze their operation and performance. 3. Solve the effect of mobile radio propagations. 4. Classify the scope concerning the various standards of

mobile radio, and the capabilitiy limits. 5. Construct and analyze the GSM system. 6. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discussed on Introduction and Basic Concept of Mobile Communication System, Radio Wave propagation in Mobile Communication Systems, High Spectrum Efficiency Modulation Systems, Zone Techniques for Configuration and Channel Assignment, Techniques to Improve Transmission Quality and Error Control Techniques. Mobile communications technology has seen a thriving development in recent years. Driven by technological advancements as well as application demands, various classes of communication networks emerged. This is why this subject should be included in the program. References 1. Theodore S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications:

Principles and Practice, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004. 2. Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communications Systems, 5th

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004. 3. W.C.Y. Lee, Mobile Cellular Telecommunications: Analog

and Digital Systems, McGraw-Hill, 1995. 4. R. Blake, “Wireless Communication Technology", Thomson

Delmar, 2003. 5. W.C.Y.Lee, "Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory

and applications, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill International, 1998.

6. S. Hideichi, “Mobile Communications”, Ohmsha Ltd., 2000.

BTNT 4433 ANTENNA ENGINEERING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Categorize, Identify and analyze the basic antenna

parameters. 2. Design and evaluate the antenna structures to satisfy the

desired requirements. 3. Construct and optimize basic and advanced antenna

structures that fulfil desired specification by using the 3D simulation software.

4. Construct and analyze matching and feeding networks for antennas using simulation tools

5. Report and explain their given assignment clearly Synopsis This course will discuss: Introduction and Fundamentals of Antenna, Antenna Solution using Maxwell Equation, Types of Antenna, Matching and Feeding Networks, Antenna Measurement and Introduction to Radio-wave Propagation. References 1. C.A. Balanis:”Antenna Theory, Analysis & Design”, John

Wiley 1997. 2. V. J. Fusco, “Foundation of Antenna Theory & Techniques”,

Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005. 3. Stutzman and Thiele, Antenna Theory and Design, John

Wiley, 1998. 4. Gary E. Evans,”Antenna Measurement Techniques”, Artech

House 1990. 5. Warren L. Stutzman,”Polarization in Electromagnetic

Systems”, Artech House 1993. 6. T. A. Milligan, “Modern Antenna Design” John Wiley, 2nd

edition, 2005.


UTeM

135

131

BTNT 4423 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION & OPTOELECTRIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Discover the basic properties of light in semiconductor and

various components of optical communication system. 2. Construct measure and explain the working principle of a

laser diode, LED and photodetector, their characteristics and structures.

3. Design and analyze the appropriate fiber optical network with optima performances.

4. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Introduction of Optical Communication System, Light Propagation in Optical Fibre, Transmission Characteristics of Optical Fibres, Optical Sources, Optical Detectors, Direct Detection Receiver Performance and Fibre Optical Network Applications. The rationale of offering this subject is as the progression of communication system where the existing transmission media has been replaced to fibre optics due to its advantages. Therefore, students should have basic knowledge of optical communication and basic skills required by the industry. References 1. Palais J.C., Fiber Optic Communications, Prentice Hall,

2004. 2. Downing J.N., Fiber Optic Communications, Prentice Hall,

2005. 3. Senior J.M., Optical Fiber Communications: Principles and

Practice, Prentice Hall, 2008. 4. Petruzellis T., Optoelectronics, Fiber Optics, and Laser

Cookbook, McGraw-Hill. 5. Agrawal G.P., Fiber Optic Communication Systems, Wiley

Interscience, 2002.

BTNT 4403 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Categorize, identify and analyze the basic concept of

satellite communication. 2. Design and evaluate the satellite link for specific carrier

over noise ratio. 3. Explain critically the orbit mechanic and earth station. 4. Construct and analyze satellite subsystem. 5. Report and explain their given assignment clearly either

individually or in group.. Synopsis This subject will discussed on introduction to satellite communication - frequency allocations, applications, future trends satellite communication; Orbital mechanics and launchers- Orbital Mechanics, Look angle determination; Satellite subsystem - telemetry, tracking, command and monitoring, power systems, communication subsystems, satellite antenna; , Satellite Link Design - design of downlink, uplink design, design of satellite links for specific C/N ; and Earth station technology. References 1. Timothy Pratt, Charles Bostian, Jeremy Allnutt, “Satellite

Communication”, JWiley Publications 2nd Editions, 2003. 2. Wilbur L. Pritchard, Robert A Nelson, Hendri G.

Suyderhoud, “Satellite Communication Enginering”, Pearson Publications 2003.

3. M. Richharia,, Satellite Communication, BSP, 2003 4. K.n. Raja Rao, Fundamentals of Satellite Communications,

PHI, 2004 5. G. Maral & M. Bousquet, Satellite Communications

Systems, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2002. 6. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communications, 3rd Edition,

McGraw Hill, 2001.


136

132





linear sources.

SYNOPSIS This course is designed to help students improve their proficiency in English language and to communicate effectively in both spoken and written forms. It is tailored to the four components, namely Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing of the Malaysian University English Test (MUET). Grammar component is taught in an integrated approach to build confidence among the learners to become efficient speakers of English. The CL approach is incorporated in this course. REFERENCES 1. Choo, W.Y., Yeoh, W.T., Yee, S.F. & Nyanaprakasan, S.






BLHL XXX2 THIRD LANGUAGE Bahasa Arab Tahap 1 Bahasa Arab Tahap 2 Bahasa Mandarin Tahap 1 Bahasa Mandarin Tahap 2 Bahasa Jepun Tahap 1 Bahasa Jepun Tahap 2 Bahasa Jerman Tahap 1 Bahasa Jerman Tahap 2 Bahasa Perancis Tahap 1 Bahasa Perancis Tahap 2

SUBJECT DETAILS FOR JTKM PROGRAMMES



UTeM

137

133

BLHW 2403 TECHNICAL ENGLISH LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. At the end of the course, students should be able to: 2. distinguish the use of tenses, run-ons, fragments, modifiers


















138

134








BLHW 1732 MALAYSIAN SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. interrelate the social process with economic

transformation in the national development agenda. 2. practice the qualities of truthworthy leadership in group

activities. 3. reflect on the role and responsibilities of national

development for human well-being via group work. SYNOPSIS This course discusses the process of social and economic changes in the Malaysian development agenda. The awareness of this developmental aspect is important to ensure that Malaysia is capable of addressing global challenges. At the same time, it also aims to develop quality human capital and mindset. REFERENCES 1. Siti Rohana Omar, Mohd Taib Dora, Nor Fazilah Abd Hamid,

Anidah Robani, Norliah Kudus, Hanipah Hussin &Izaidin Abd Majid. (2009). Modul Pengajaran Transformasi Sosioekenomi Malaysia: Dimensi dan Cabaran. Cetakan Dalaman UTeM

2. Kassim Thukiman. (2007). Malaysia Perspektif Sejarah dan Politik. Skudai: Penerbit UTM.

3. Ahmad Shukri Mohd. Nain & Rosman Md Yusoff. (2007). Konsep, Teori, Dimensi dan Isu Pembangunan. Skudai: Penerbit UTM.


UTeM

139

135

BKKX XXX1 CO-CURRICULUM 1 Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Recognise a balanced and comprehensive education 2. Develop leadership aspects stressing on diciplines and

cooperation within a group or organisaton. 3. Build personality and character guided by rules of conduct. 4. Foster cooperation and unity in multi-racial society. Synopsis 1. Cultural Choir, Gamelan, Cak Lempung, Nasyid, Seni Khat, Seni Lakon, Art, English Elocution, Bahasa Melayu Elocution, and Kompang. 2. Entrepreneurship Video, Film and Photography, Publishing & Journalism, Computer and Technopreneurship. 3. Society Fiqh Muamalat, Fiqh Amali, Tahsin Al-Quran & Yaasin and Peer Program. 4. Recreation Go-Kart, Adventure and Cycling. 5. Sports Swimming, Volley Ball, Golf, Kayaking, Takraw, Aerobic, Badminton, Football and Net ball. 6. Martial Arts Silat Gayong, Karate-Do and Taekwando.

BKKX XXX1 CO-CURRICULUM 2 Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand a balanced and comprehensive education

hence generating more mature students. 2. Develop leadership aspects stressing on disciplines and

cooperation within a group or organisation. 3. Build personality and character guided by rules of conduct. 4. Foster cooperation and unity in multi-racial society. Synopsis 1. Cultural Choir, Gamelan, Cak Lempung, Nasyid, Seni Khat, Acting, Art, English Elocution, Bahasa Melayu Elocution, and Kompang. 2. Entrepreneurship Video, Film and Photography, Publishing & Journalism, Computer and Technopreneurship. 3. Society Fiqh Muamalat, Fiqh Amali, Tahsin Al-Quran & Yaasin and Peer Program. 4. Recreation Go-Kart, Adventure and Cycling. 5. Sports Swimming, Volley Ball, Golf, Kayaking, Takraw, Aerobic, Badminton, Football and Net ball. 6. Martial Arts Silat Gayong, Karate-Do and Taekwando.


140

136

BLHW 3403 ENGLISH FOR PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of the course, students should be able to: 6. select and apply the appropriate tenses, parallelism, direct

and indirect speech, transitional markers and misplaced modifiers.

7. differentiate between facts and opinions, and use vocabulary relevant to its context.

8. respond to interviews and participate in meetings. 9. demonstrate communication and oral presentation skills. 10. produce resume, application letter and recommendation

report. SYNOPSIS This course is designed to develop oral communication, as well as enhance students’ level of English literacy which will be beneficial to their professional careers. It also aims to equip students with the communication skills necessary for the workplace. It complements the skills taught in BLHW 3403. Grammar will be taught implicitly in the course content. Students will acquire effective presentation skills as well as gain experience in mock interviews prior to seeking employment. The Student-Centred Learning approach is employed in teaching and learning process. REFERENCES 5. Azar, B. S. & Hagen, S. A. (2006). Basic English grammar.

New York: Pearson Education. 6. Casher, C. C. & Weldon, J. (2010). Presentation excellence:

25 tricks, tips and techniques for professional speakers and trainers. USA: CLB Publishing House.

7. Chin, F. C. J., Soo, K. S. E. & R. Manjuladevi. (2010). English for professional communication: Science and engineering. Singapore: Cenggage Learning Asia Pte Ltd.

8. Khoo, M. S. L, Razilah Abdul Rahim & E. Rajendraan (2006). Communication at the work place. Melaka: Jabatan Bahasa dan Komunikasi, UTeM.


UTeM

141

137

BTMU 1132 PHYSICS Learning Outcomes At the end of the course, students should be able to: 1. Define the basic laws and comprehend the basic concept of

physics. 2. Apply the law and the concepts systematically in problem

solving. 3. Relate between the various topics covered and their

application in the field of engineering 4. Make accurate measurement and present result in a proper

scientific report Synopsis The topics covers in this subject are; Forces, Acceleratiob and Newton’s Second Law of Motion, Motion with a Changing Velocity, Circular Motion, Conservation of Energy, Linear Momentum, Fluids, Elasticity and Oscillations, Heat, electric Forces and Fields, Electric Potential, Electric Current and Circuits, Magnetic Forces and Field, Electromagnetic Induction References 1. Raymond A. Serway and John W. Jewett, 2009, Physics for

Scientists and Engineers, Chapter 1-39, Brooks Cole 2. John D. Cutnell and Kenneth W. Johnson, 2009, Physics,

Wiley. 3. Douglas C. Giancoli, 2008, Physics for Scientists & Engineers

with Modern Physicsm 4th Edition, Prentice Hall 4. Giambatista, A., Richardson, B.M and Richardson R.C.,

2007, College Physics 2nd Edition, Mc-Graw Hill

BTMU 1142 CHEMISTRY Learning Outcomes At the end of the course, students should be able to: 1. Recall the relevant chemistry principle studied. 2. Explain verbally and writing the different chemical

reactions, the differences in the reactivity of various elements, the nature of various chemical properties and chemical reactions and the factors affecting chemical properties and chemical reaction.

3. Solve chemistry related problem by applying the relevant chemical principles.

4. Demonstrate the relevant chemistry laboratory skills. 5. Apply the various chemical properties learned to discuss

the solution for relevant mechanical engineering problems. Synopsis This course will discuss about the concepts in Chemistry: The Study of Change, Atoms, Molecules and Ions, Chemical Reaction, Structure of Atoms, The Periodic Table, Chemical Bonding, Properties of Matter, and Thermochemistry. References 1. Raymond Chang (2007). “Chemistry, 9th Edition”. McGraw

Hill. 2. Engel, Drobny & Reid (2008) “Physical Chemistry for the

Life Sciences”, 1st Edition. Pearson Education 3. Hill, Petrucci, McCreary & Perry (2005) “General

Chemistry”, 4th Edition. Pearson Education. 4. Averill & Eldredge (2007) “Chemistry: Principles, Patterns,

and Applications” Pearson Education.



142

138

BTMU 1162 NUMERICAL METHODS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Describe clearly the basic mechanical quantity

measurement techniques, procedures and devices. 2. Conduct the experiment procedures using multiple

instruments appropriately. 3. Record the reliable data and present it properly in table

and graphical formats. 4. Analyze the collected experimental data, thus recognizing

the important point of the data through discussion. 5. Produce proper laboratory report that meets the

requirement format. Synopsis Introduction to the experiment. Measurement concept. Experiment data properties. Graphic presentation of the data. Dealing with hysteresis and uncertainty. Using statistical method for irregular data. Regression line. Experiment report. Using spreadsheet in data analysis. Introduction to the measurement devices. References 1. Kirkup, L. 1994. Experimental Methods: An Introduction to

the Analysis and Presentation of Data, John Wiley & Sons. 2. Holman, J.P. 2001. Experimental Method for Engineers, 7th

Edition, McGraw Hill. 3. Doeblin, O.E. 1995. Engineering Experimentation: Planning,

Executing and Reporting, McGraw Hill. 4. Bolton, W. 1996. Experimental Method, Newness

(Butterworth-Heinemann)

BTMU 1172 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Determine appropriate multivariable function together

with its domain and range 2. Evaluate precisely the integrals of the function with double

and triple integral by using various techniques 3. Use suitable techniques of integration to calculate the area

and the volume of the region 4. Evaluate vector-valued function accurately 5. Apply apposite knowledge of vector-valued function in

physical and engineering fields Synopsis This course consists of three chapters: Functions of Several Variables, Multiple Integrals and Vector-valued Functions. The syllabus is developed by introducing the concepts of the functions with severable variables, integration and also vector-valued function, followed by learning various techniques in solving the problems and its application in physical and engineering fields. References 1. Finney R.L., Weir M.D. and Giordano F.R.,Thomas’s,

Calculus, 10th Edition, Pearson 2001 2. Anton H., Calculus, 8th Edition, John Wiley 1992. 3. Smith R.T. and Minton R.B., Multivariable Calculus,

McGraw-Hill 2002. 4. Steward J., Calculus- Concepts And Contexts, Brooks/Cole,

2nd Edition, 2001 5. Stroud K.A., Engineering Mathematics, 5th Edition,

Palgrave Macmillan 2001


UTeM

143

139

BTMU 1213 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Identify different mechanical engineering drawing format

and types. 2. Use standard drafting tools in mechanical engineering

drawing. 3. Use standard Computer Aided Design software for 2D

drafting and 3D solid modelling command tools. 4. Produce geometric, orthographic, isometric, section cut

and detail drawing using manual drafting technique and also using CAD.

Synopsis Introduction. Techniques of using engineering drawing equipments. Techniques for lettering and numbering. Types of lines. Geometrical drawings. Dimensioning techniques. Orthographic projection drawings. Isometric drawings. Cross-sectional drawings. Auxiliary view projections. Development drawings. Introduction to computer-aided drawings (CAD). Object snap features. Coordinate systems. Basic CAD drawing commands. Basic CAD editing commands. Lettering in CAD. The use of layers. Dimensioning. Template preparations. Plotting in CAD. Orthographical and Isometric drawings. Cross-Sectional drawings. Introduction to 3D drawing in CAD. References 1. Mohd Ramzan Mainal, Badri Abd Ghani dan Yahya Samian,

2000, Lukisan Kejuruteraan Asas, UTM, Skudai. 2. Yarwood, A., 2002, An Introduction To AutoCAD 2002,

Prentice Hall, London. 3. Giesecke, F. E., Mitchell, A., Spencer, H. C., Hill, I. L.,

Dygdon, J. T. and Novak, J. E., 2003, Technical Drawing, 12th Ed., Prentice Hall, New York.

4. Jensen, C., and Jay D. H., 1996, Engineering Drawing And Design, 5th Edition, Glencoe and McGraw Hill, New York.

5. McFarlane, R., 1994, Introducing 3D AutoCAD, Edward Arnold, London.

BTMU 1223 ENGINEERING DESIGN Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students will be able to: 1. Recognize terminology used in machine components and

its design. 2. Identify the type of failures of machine components design. 3. Apply the formulation of the safe design for machine

components. 4. Design the most suitable size and shape of machine

components. 5. Analyze and design machine components under different

loads and conditions. 6. Redesign and improvise the existing machine components. Synopsis This course covers Introduction to Engineering Design, Design of Static Strength, Design of Fatigue Strength, Design of Threaded and Welded Joints, Bearings, Shafts/rods, Gears, Springs, Flexible Mechanical Elements, Brakes and Clutches. Mini project. References 1. Mott, R.L., 2006, Machine Elements in Mechanical Design

in SI Units, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall, Singapore. 2. Shigley, J.E. & Mischke, C.R, 2003, Mechanical Engineering

Design, Six Metrix Edition, McGraw Hill, Singapore. 3. Norton, R.L., 2004, Design of Machinery: An Introduction

to the Synthesis and Analysis of Mechanisms and Machines, Third Edition, McGraw-Hill, Singapore.

4. Juvinall, R.C. & Marshek, K.M, 2000, Fundamentals of Machine Component Design, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.


144

140

BTMU 1313 STATICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Apply the concept of scalar and vector quantities in

determining forces and moment in 2-D and 3-D appropriately.

2. Construct Free Body-Diagram in order to solve engineering mechanics of statics problems correctly.

3. Calculate the reaction forces on common structure, frames and machines by using the principle of equilibrium precisely.

4. Apply apposite concept of friction to determine the reaction forces by using the principle of equilibrium.

5. Determine the center of gravity/mass and centroid of a body by using appropriate techniques.

Synopsis To discuss an introduction and the basic concept of statics as physical sciences, System of Units, Scalars and Vectors, Free body diagram, Forces system, Force system resultants and Moment, Equilibrium of a particle, Equilibrium of a rigid body, Structural analysis (trusses analysis and simple frames and machines), Friction and Centre of gravity and Centroid. References 1. Hibbeler R.C. 2004. Engineering Mechanics –

Statics, 3th Edition. Prentice Hall. 2. Beer F.P and Johnston. E.R. 2000. Vector Mechanic for

Engineer. McGraw-Hill. 3. Meriam J.L. & Kraige L.G. 1987. Engineering

Mechanics – Static. John Wiley & Sons. 4. Schmict and Boresi. 2000. Engineering Mechanics-

Statics. Thomson Learning. 5. Pitel and Kiu. 1999. Engineering Mechanics-Static.

Thomson Learning.

BTMU 1323 MATERIALS SCIENCE Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Describe the classifications, structures and

applications of metals, ceramics and polymers correctly.

2. Analyse deformation behavior and strengthening mechanisms relying to its structure, properties and failure of materials clearly.

3. Apply Fick’s Law in calculating the diffusion process and its mechanism in solids properly.

4. Demonstrate appropriate test methods in determining mechanical and physical properties.

5. Apply the relation between composition, microstructure and properties of metallic materials by using apposite phase diagram and heat treatment process.

Synopsis Introduction to fundamentals of Materials Science and its applications, atomic structure, crystal structure, solidification, imperfections and solid diffusion, mechanical and physical properties, phase diagrams and transformation, types and applications of materials. References 1. Askeland D. R., 1994. The Science and Engineering of

Materials, 3rd Edition, PWS Publication Co. 2. Budinski K. G. and Budinski M. G., 1999. Engineering

Materials: Properties and Selection, 6th Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann UK.

3. Calister W. D., 2008. Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction, 6th Edition, John Wiley & Sons.

4. Shackelford J. F., 2000. Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall.

5. Smith W. F., 2004. Foundation of Materials Science and Engineering, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill.


UTeM

145

141

BTMU 1413 TECHNOLOGY WORKSHOP

Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students will be able to: 1. Identify common shop hazards and use common shop

safety equipments. 2. Use the proper and the correct use of hand tools and

equipments for a given job. 3. Use various kinds of tools and related to welding,

fabrication & fitting. 4. Apply the knowledge of welding, fabrication and fitting

activities. Synopsis Welding-This course is designed to provide students with a fundamental understanding of gas welding, arc welding (SMAW) and MIG welding (GMAW), welding safety, welding machines (gas, arc, MIG), electrode classifications and electrode selection. Training to develop the basic welding skills in basic joint configurations such as butt joint, lap joint, and tee joint. Fabrication-Covers layout, cutting, forming, and joining of basic sheet metal and use of hand tools and equipment to develop and fabricate basic sheet metal project based on drawing of the project. Fitting-This course is designed to give students a good appreciation on the various types of hand tools commonly used for measurement, marking out, and metal removal. This course also let the students understand the uses of common hand tools and appreciate the importance of fitting work in the finishing product. Through the hands-on practice given, the students will acquire some of the basic skills and techniques involved with these hand processes. References 1. Mike, T., 2000, Basic Manufacturing, Butterworth-

Heinemann. 2. Kibbe, R.R., Meyer, R.O., White, W. T. and Neely, J.E., 1995,

Machine Tool Practices, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall. 3. Kalpakjian, S., 1987, Manufacturing Engineering and

Technology, Addision-Wesley. 4. Amstead, B.H., 1977, Manufacturing Processes, John Wiley

& Son. 5. Bruce J.Black, Workshop Processes, Practices and Materials

(3rd Edition), Newnes, 2004.

BTMU 1512 EXPERIMENTAL METHOD Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Describe clearly the basic mechanical quantity

measurement techniques, procedures and devices. 2. Conduct the experiment procedures using multiple

instruments appropriately. 3. Record the reliable data and present it properly in table

and graphical formats. 4. Analyze the collected experimental data, thus recognizing

the important point of the data through discussion. 5. Produce proper laboratory report that meets the

requirement format. Synopsis Introduction to the experiment. Measurement concept. Experiment data properties. Graphic presentation of the data. Dealing with hysteresis and uncertainty. Using statistical method for irregular data. Regression line. Experiment report. Using spreadsheet in data analysis. Introduction to the measurement devices. References 1. Kirkup, L. 1994. Experimental Methods: An Introduction to

the Analysis and Presentation of Data, John Wiley & Sons. 2. Holman, J.P. 2001. Experimental Method for Engineers, 7th

Edition, McGraw Hill. 3. Doeblin, O.E. 1995. Engineering Experimentation: Planning,

Executing and Reporting, McGraw Hill. 4. Bolton, W. 1996. Experimental Method, Newness

(Butterworth-Heinemann)


146

142

BTMU 1543 PRINCIPLE OF ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Understand electric circuit scheme diagram, components,

equipment measurement, machine electric transformer, digital circuit and operation of amplifier.

2. Apply mesh-current, node-voltage and theorem superposition to analyse AC and DC circuit.

3. Analyse characteristic and electric machine efficiency and transformer.

4. Design basic circuit. 5. Analyse application of amplifier operation. Synopsis Introduction to Electrical System. Electric component and equipment measurements. Analyse Direct Current (DC) circuit. Analyse Alternative Current (AC) circuit. Complex number and phase. Resonance. 3 phase circuit. Filter. Variable. Introduction to Machine DC and AC. Amplifier Operation. Logic gate. Code and Uncode. References 1. Hughes, M. S., 2002, Electrical & Electronic Technology,

Prentice Hall. 2. Floyd, 2000, Principles of Electric Circuits, Prentice Hall. 3. Alexander, C. K., 2000, Fundamental of Electric Circuit, Mc

Graw Hill. 4. Nilsson, J. W. and Riedel, S. A., 2001, Electric Circuit,

Prentice Hall. 5. Bogart Jr, T. F., 1996, Introduction to Digital Circuits, Mc

Graw Hill.

BTMU 2142 STATISTICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify clearly the concept of probability and relate to its

probability distribution. 2. Differentiate between sample and population and

appropriately applied in the inferential statistics. 3. Examine the use of t and z test accurately and apply the

concept in inferential statistics. 4. Determine the concept of hypothesis testing for one

population and proposed particularly in the hypothesis for more than one population.

5. Manage data and apply the concept of correlation, linear model and slope testing appropriately.

Synopsis This course consists of eight chapters: Probability, Discrete random variable and its distribution, Continuous random variable and its distribution, Sampling Distribution, Estimation, Hypothesis Testing, Simple Linear Regression and ANOVA. References 1. Douglas C, Montgomery, G. C. Runger, Applied Statistics

and Probability for Engineers, 3rd Edition, John Wiley 2. Walpole, Probability and Statistics for Engineers and

Scientist, 7th Edition, Prentice Hall. 3. Miller & Freud’s, Probability and Statistics for Engineers,

7th Edition, Prentice Hall. 4. David Levine, Ramsey, Schmidt, Scientist Using Microsoft

Excel and MINITAB, Prentice Hall.


UTeM

147

143

BTMU 2152 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Solve accurately the concept of ordinary and partial

differential equations 2. Apply accurately the operation of ordinary and partial

differential equations . 3. Determine correctly the ordinary and partial differential

equations 4. Apply the appropriate knowledge of ordinary and partial

differential in solving engineering problems.

Synopsis This course consists of 5 chapters including Introduction to Ordinary and Partial Differential Equations, Second Order Linear Differential Equation with constant coefficients, Laplace Transform, Fourier Series and Partial Differential Equations. References 1. Dennis Zill & Micheal Cullen (2008). Differential Equations

with Boundary-Value Problems. 7th Ed. USA: Brooks/Cole. 2. William E.Boyce and Richard C. Diprima, Elementary

Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.

3. Blanchard P.,Devaney R. L. 2006, Differential Equations,3rd Edition Cengage Learning.

4. K. A. Stroud, Dexter J. Booth. 2005, Differential Equations, Industrial Press Inc

5. R. Kent Nagle, Edward B. Saff and Arthur David Snider, Fundamentals of Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, Addison Wesley, 5th Edition, 2008

BTMU 2333 SOLID MECHANICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Apply concept of stress-strain relationship and factor of

safety appropriately in engineering design. 2. Construct normal force, shear force and bending moment

diagrams in determining stresses and displacement appropriately.

3. Analyse apposite stresses within structure subjected to torsion.

4. Analyze the slope and displacement of a continuous beam due to static loading using singularity function correctly.

Synopsis Introduction to various types of structures and supports. Concepts of stress, strain, shear force and bending moment. Theory on beam deflection. Theory on torsion. Shear flow. Combination of loads. Deflection of beams References 1. Beer. F.P. et al. 2006. Mechanics of Materials 4th Edition in

SI Units. McGraw-Hill. 2. Hibbeler.R.C. 2004. Mechanics of Materials SI Edition.

Prentice Hall. 3. Gere.J.M. 2004. Mechanics of Materials. Thomson. 4. Vable. M. 2002. Mechanics of Materials. Oxford University

Press. 5. Shames.I.H. 2000. Introduction to Solid Mechanics. Prentice

Hall.


148

144

BTMU 2423 MANUFACTURING PROCESS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Recognize a theoretical and practical understanding on

the issues and aspects of manufacturing. 2. Identify and select the most suitable materials,

machines, tools and equipment for a particular manufacturing process.

3. Apply knowledge of manufacturing processes in order to produce a particular product.

4. Select and analyse suitable parameters in current manufacturing processes.

Synopsis This course introduces the students to manufacturing and the aspects of manufacturing, metal-casting processes and equipments, forming and shaping processes and equipments, joining processes, manufacturing materials, and material-removal processes and machines. References 1. DeGarmo, E. P., Black, J. T. and Kohser, R. A., 2002,

Materials and Processes in Manufacturing, 9th Edition, Wiley, New York.

2. Kalpakjian, S., and Schmid, S. R., 2001, Manufacturing Engineering Technology, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall International.

3. Schey, Introduction to Manufacturing Process, 1999, McGraw-Hill..

4. Zainal Abidin Ahmad, 1999, Proses Pembuatan: Jilid II, Universiti Teknologi Malaysia.

5. Zainal Abidin Ahmad, 1998, Proses Pembuatan: Jilid I, Universiti Teknologi Malaysia.

BTMU 2613 THERMODYNAMICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Define basic terms of thermodynamics, the ideal gas and

identify systems, properties and processes. 2. Use of property tables and draw property diagrams of pure

substances to define the state of the system. 3. Apply the concept of First Law of Thermodynamics in

Closed Systems and Control Volumes. 4. Understand the concept of Second Law of Thermodynamics

to determine the performance of heat engines, refrigerators and heat pumps.

Synopsis This course covers the basic concepts and definitions of engineering thermodynamics, energy, work and heat, properties of pure substances (relationships of P-v, T-v, P-T and T-s diagrams), First Law of Thermodynamics, Second Law of thermodynamics and Entropy. References 1. Cengel, Y. A. and Boles, M. A..2008. Thermodynamics: An

Engineering Approach, 6th Ed, McGraw Hill.Singapore. 2. S.C.Gupta,2008. Thermodynamics, 1st Ed, Pearson

Education(Singapore) Pte. Ltd 3. Sonntag, R.E., Borgnakke. C, Van. and Gordon J., 2008.

Fundamentals of Thermodynamics, 7th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.New York.

4. Zoran, M.,Duan G., 2008, Applied Industrial Energy and Environmental Management, Wiley-IEEE.


UTeM

149

145

BTMU 2623 FLUID MECHANICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Use fluid and its properties equation in the context of fluid

mechanics application. 2. Apply fluid mechanics equations in solving fluid statics and

dynamics problems. 3. Respond to the procedure that has been given in

laboratory as a team. 4. Interpret experimental data accordingly and to report the

results in the appropriate scientific manner.

Synopsis The introduction to the basic physical properties of fluids. Definition of pressure and head. Derivation of hydrostatic equation and its application in pressure measurement, static forces analysis on immersed surface and buoyancy analysis. The introduction to fluid dynamics and fluid flow analysis. Derivation of flow equations. The application of energy equation and Bernoulli equation in the calculation of flow velocity, discharge, and head lost in piping systems. Dimensional analysis and its application. References 1. Munson, B. R., Young D. F. and Okiishi, T. H., 2006,

Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, 5th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Asia.

2. Som, S. K. and Biswas, G., 2004, Introduction to Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines, 2nd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.

3. Douglas, J. F., Gasiorek J. M. and Swaffield, J. A., 2001, Fluid Mechanics, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, Spain.

4. Cengel, Y. A. and Cimbala, J. M., 2006, Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, International Edition, McGraw-Hill, Singapore.

5. Streeter, V. L. and Wylie, E. B., 1983, Fluid Mechanics, First SI Metric Ed., McGraw-Hill, Singapore.

BTMU 4922 ENGINEERING ETHICS & OSHA Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Recognize the fundamental principles of Professional Ethics

and various behaviors or conducts that need to be observed and controlled by a professional engineer.

2. Identify moral problems that related to engineering ethics and able to solve the problem using various appropriate methods.

3. Explain the concepts of engineering ethics and to relate it with the actual phenomena.

4. Comprehend the responsibilities of engineers in the scope of their function in any organization either as an employee or as an employer and have a feeling of being a responsible and public safety and environmental conscious engineer.

5. Define the Occupational Health concept and identify the critical occupational safety health hazard that the workers might exposed themselves in the factory working environment in order to prevent or at least minimize these hazards.

Synopsis Engineering Ethics. Analysis of ethics case study. Introduction to professional ethics. Responsible engineer. Integrity. industrial hygiene and safety management, hazardous material and emergency planning, Conflict. Responsibility to environment. Occupational Health and Safety (OSH). Risk and prevention. Good safety practices. Case Study. References 1. Charles, E. H., Michael, J. R., 2000, Engineering Ethics:

Concepts and Cases, 2nd Edition, Thompson. 2. Sugimoto, T. and Taki, S., 2002, Introduction to Engineering

Ethics, Maruzen. 3. Johari, M. J., 2001, Etika Profesional, Edisi Pertama,

Universiti Teknologi Malaysia. 4. Akta Pendaftaran Jurutera 1967 (Akta 138). 5. Occupational Safety and Health Handbook, NIOSH Malaysia


150

146

BTMU 4952 TECHNOENTREPRENEUR Learning Outcomes At the end of the course, the student should be able to: 1. Examine and evaluate theories governing

entrepreneurship, entrepreneur revolution, its historical development, perspectives, disciplines, and entrepreneur’s contributions towards society.

2. Recognise and apply entrepreneurial skills such as creativity, innovativeness, proactiveness, risk-talking, opportunity recognition, marketing, and networking to enter the global market.

3. Develop and present an effective Business Plan.

Synopsis The course will facilitate students with key entrepreneurship motivation and skill as well as learn and acquire the principles and practices needed to form, enhance and expand their business. The “how” , “how-to” teaching and learning activities, which incorporates theories and practices, will help student acquire and develop necessary competencies before embarking on any business project. References 1. Ab Aziz Yusof, 2003, Prinsip Keusahawanan, Prentice Hall. 2. Nor Aishah Buang, 2002, Asas Keusahawanan, Fajar Bakti

Sdn. Bhd. 3. Kuratko, D.F. and Hodgetts, R.M., 2001, Enterpreneurship:

A Contemporary Approch, 5th Edition, South-Western, Ohio.

4. Morris, M.H. and Kuratko, D.F., 2002, Coporate Entrepreneurship, Harcouth Collage Publisher, Orlando.

5. Sue Birley, 1999, Entrepreneurship, Ashgate Publishing Limited, England.

BTMU 2113 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify the language elements and syntax used in C++ 2. Describe and solve the problem into appropriate solution

using problem solving techniques 3. Construct programs by applying appropriate programming

techniques 4. Design and implement a simple program using

programming structures such as conditionals, loops, and functions

5. Use a computer system to edit, compile and execute a program.

Synopsis Throughout the course, students will be introduced with basic principles of computers and software development methodology. The course also consists of basic programming principles such as syntax, semantic, compiling, and linking. Programming techniques using C++ such as data type and operator, selection, repetition, function, array, file, and pointer are learnt towards the end of this course. References 1. Daniel Liang, Y, 2009, Introduction to Programming with

C++, Pearson Education. 2. Abdullah, N. et. al, 2006, Lab Module Computer

Programming BITG 1113, 3rd Edition, FTMK, KUTKM. 3. Malik, D. S., 2010, C++ Programming: From Problem

Analysis to Program Design, Thomson Online Technology. 4. James Allert, 2008, Programming with C++, Concepts and

Projects, McGraw Hill. 5. Jesse Liberty, Siddhartha Rao and Bradley L. Jones , 2008,

Teach Yourself C++ in One Hour a Day,6th Edition, Sams.


UTeM

151

147

BTMU 2123 MICROPROCESSOR TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify the fundamental concept of digital system in

architecture of microprocessor. 2. Describe and classify the operation between

microprocessor and input/output interfacing devices. 3. Apply the programming technique by using assembly

language program for the microprocessor system. 4. Complete experiments in laboratory and present technical

report Synopsis This course will essentially divide into two sections; digital electronics and microprocessor. The first section covers topics on digital electronic that include Introduction to Digital Concepts, Logic Gates, Combinational Logic and Data Control Devices Flip Flops and Sequential Logic Circuits. The next section will deals with topics such as Microprocessor Fundamentals, Introduction to Intel 8085 Microprocessor Hardware, Introduction to Intel 8085 Microprocessor Software and Programming Techniques with Additional Instructions. References 1. Ronald J. Tocci, Neal S. Widmer, Gregory L. Moss, 2010,

Digital Systems: Principles and Applications,11th Edition, Prentice Hall.

2. Sumit Kumar S., 2008, Fundamental of Digital electronics and Microprocessors, M.D Publications Pvt. Ltd.

3. Jean-Loup Baer.Norman Balabanian, 2009, Microprocessor Architeture : from Simple pipeline to hip Multiprocessors, Cambridge University Press.

4. Ian Grout, 2008, Digital systems Design with FPGAs and CPLDS,.Newnes.

5. John F. Wakerly, 2005, Digital Design: principles and Practices Package, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall.

BTMU 2233 MODELING AND COMPUTER ANALYSIS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Produce engineering drawing according to specific

standard. 2. Produce orthographic, isometric, section cut, assembly

and exploded drawing using CAD software. 3. Analyze the assemblability of a product in assembly

workbench command. 4. Develop part and assembly drawing according to

mechanical engineering drawing standard. Synopsis Introduction to the Sketcher Workbench. Drawing basic profiles. Editing the profiles and constraints. Introduction to Part Design Workbench. Solid Modelling commands. Editing solid models in computer. Advanced components design. Introduction to Assembly Workbench. Using the Generative Drafting Workbench. References 1. Solidwork Corporation, 2006, “Solidworks 2006 Official

Training Manual”, Massachusetts USA. 2. Solidwork Corporation, “Cosmoworks Designer 2008’’,

Massachusetts USA. 3. Solidwork Corporation, “Solidworks 2007:Advanced

Surface Modeling 2006”, Massachusetts USA. 4. Dassault Systeme, 2006, Cosmos Work 5. Matt Lombart, “Solidworks 2007 Bible”, USA.


152

148

BTMU 2523 DYNAMICS & MECHANICS OF MACHINES Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Using the concept of displacement, velocity, acceleration,

work, energy, impulse and momentum to solve problems related to the movement of particles and rigid bodies.

2. Analyzing the rigid body by using the methods of absolute and relative speed and acceleration method for plane motion.

3. Applying the principles of kinematics to solve the problem of flat belts and V

4. Using free-body diagrams to solve problems in the flywheel and governor.

5. Formulate and determine the natural frequency of free vibration in the system using either the method of conservation of energy, equivalent, or Newton's laws.

Synopsis Introduction to basic principles based on kinematic and kinetic dynamics. The concept of displacement, distance, velocity, speed and acceleration. Application of Newton's second law. The principle of work and energy, impulse and momentum of particles and rigid bodies. Transmission system based on the friction of motion, such as belts, brakes and dibble. Based delivery systems such as chains and gear teeth, etc. References 1. Hibbeler, R. C. 2010. Engineering Mechanics, Dynamics,

12nd Edition. Prentice Hall. 2. Beer, F. P., Johnson, E.R. and Clausen, W. E 2007. Vector

Mechanics for Engineers, Dynamics SI Units, 8th Edition. McGraw-Hill.

3. Bedford, A. And Fowler, W. 2008. Engineering Mechanics: Dynamics (SI units). 5th Edition.Prentice Hall.

4. Meriam, J. L. And Kraige, L. G. 2009. Engineering Mechanics, SI Version, 6th Edition. John Wiley.

BTMU 3523 CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand the concept and control applications. 2. Determine the types of control systems. 3. Identify the dynamic behaviour and the details of the

system through the analysis of the response system, response and stability of frequency.

4. Understanding the basic concepts of measurement and instrumentation.

5. Understanding the signal conditioning applications, data acquisition and process measurement and instrumentation.

6. Understand the concept of sensor elements / transducer through learning and application of the device behaviour.

Synopsis Introduction to Control System. Mathematical Modelling. Time Response. Stability of linear feedback system. Improve transient response and steady-state error: PID control. Root locus. Introduction to measurement and instrumentation. Static nature of performance measurement and instrumentation. Analysis of experimental data. Experimental uncertainty analysis. Signal Measurement system. References 1. Katsuhiko Ogata, 2009, Modern Control Engineering , 5th

Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Farid Golnaraghi, Benjamin C. Kuo, 2009, Automatic

Control Systems, 9th Edition, Wiley. 3. Sudhir Gupta, Elements of Control Systems, Pearson

Education. 4. Beckwith, T.G., Marangoni, R.D., Lienhard, J.H.V., 2006,

Mechanical Measurements, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

5. Northrop, R.B., 2005, Introduction to Instrumentation and Measurements, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, U.S.


UTeM

153

149

BTMA 3714 ENGINE TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explaining the operating characteristics concept of the

internal combustion engine 2. Explaining the function of the components in the internal

combustion engine. 3. Dismantle and assemble the major components of internal

combustion engines 4. Produce the specifications of the machine based on the

power requirements. 5. Analyzing the performance characteristics of internal

combustion engines. Synopsis This module aims to expose students to the operation of the internal combustion engine technology. The course also discusses how the service, repair, maintenance, design and test the performance of conventional internal combustion engines. In addition, students have to solve engineering problems in real time by leveraging their knowledge and learn new information to solve problems of related engines. References 1. Lechner, G. and Naunheimer, H. (2004). Automotive

Transmission. 2nd ed. Springer Verlag, Germany. 2. Erjavec, J. (2005). Automatic Transmission. 1st ed. Cengage

Learning Publisher, USA. 3. Birch, T.W. (2005). Automatic Transmission and

Transaxles. Prentice Hall. 4. Malcolm James Nunney, 2006, Light and

heavy vehicle technology, Macmillan Company, UK. 5. Anthony E. Schwaller, 2004, Total Automotive Technology,

Thomson Delmar Learning, USA.

BTMA 3723 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify the components of the electrical and electronics

in automotive system. 2. Explain the functions and operations of automotive

electrical and electronic system. 3. Operate electrical and electronic equipment in automotive

applications. 4. Determine the components in the electrical and electronic

automotive applications. 5. Construct of automotive electrical and electronic system.

Synopsis This course focuses on theory, operation and application of electrical and electronic automotive system. Topics covered include vehicle electrical wiring system, sensors and actuators, battery charging system, starter system, lighting system, chassis electrical system, additional system, mechatronics, automotive network and the CAN-bus system. References 1. Halderman, Juames D., 2009, Hybrid and Alternative Fuel

Vehicles, Pearson Prentice Hall 2. Bosch, R., 2008, Automotive Electrics-Automotive

Electronics : Systems and Components, 5th Edition, Stuttgart, Professional Engineering publishing.

3. Bosch, R., 2006, Bosch Automotive Handbook Bosch, 7th Edition, Bentley Publishers.

4. Hans-Hermann Braess, Ulrich Sieffert, 2005, Handbook of Automotive Engineering, SAE International.

5. Stone, Richard, 2004, Automotive Engineering Fundamentals, SAE International.

BTMA Course Core Subjects (K)


154

150

BTMA 3733 VEHICLE DYNAMICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain the basics of vehicle handling and primary factors

that affect it. 2. Develop mathematical and physical model to predict the

dynamic response of a vehicle. 3. Employ the computer software in modeling vehicle

dynamics (Carsim, Simulink). 4. Design the vehicle components and related subsystem

that meet certain vehicle dynamics performance creteria. Synopsis To discuss an introduction to basic concepts of vehicle dynamics, general and specialized knowledge to design a theoretical model of vehicle dynamics and simulation, knowing the response based on various input drive vehicles, the environment, the burden of road and tire properties. Understand the relationship between the 'ride and handling’, steering and suspension system on the performance of a vehicle. References 1. Hibbeler R.C (2010), Engineering Mechanics – Static, 12th

edition. Si Units Pearson 2. Wong. J.Y. ( 2001) , Theory of Ground Vehicle , 3rd edition.

John Wiley & Son 3. Johnston. B. (1999) , Vector Mechanics for Engineer –

Dynamics, 3rd edition. McGraw Hill Ryerson 4. Miliken W.F. and D.L ( 1995) , Race Car Vehicle Dynamics,

Society of Automotive Engineers 5. Thomas D. Gillespie ( 1992) Fundamental of Vehicle

Dynamics, Society of Automotive Engineers.

BTMA 3743 AUTOMOTIVE HVAC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Define the functions and basic concepts of automotive

HVAC system. 2. Practice analytical and design skills needed in designing

modern HVAC system for automotive. 3. Apply the skills to test, evaluate, repair and upgrading the

automotive HVAC system. Synopsis The objective of this course is to provide students with comprehensive knowledge in the field of automotive heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) system. Topics include: automotive heating and cooling system, basic air-conditioning system, air conditioning and control components and type of cooling agents. Apart from that, regulations set by Department of Environment (DOE) is also exposed to the students. Hands on training in servicing heating and cooling system, test and repair of cooling system and computerized control system. References

1. Donald W. Patten, John Remling, 2002. Automotive Service Basics. 4th Edition Upper Saddle River, Prentice Hall: NJ.

2. Roger W. Haines, C. Lewis Wilson, 2003. HVAC systems design handbook McGraw-Hill: New York.

3. Guy W. Gupton. 2002. HVAC controls: operation & maintenance. Fairmont Press: Lilburn, GA .

4. Boyce H. Dwiggins. 2001. Automotive heating and air conditioning. Delmar Thomson Learning: Albany,NY .

5. Bosch, R. 2005. Automotive Handbook. SAE 7th Edition. John Wiley and Sons. USA.


UTeM

155

151

BTMA 3754 VEHICLE ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Analyse the history and future trends in automotive

engines and transmission system. 2. Describe the working principle of engine and transmission

system. 3. Determine the basic principles and design of engine and

transmission system. 4. Analyse the principle of engine and transmission in

performance testing. 5. Perform the engine and transmission performance tests

using the dynamometer.

Synopsis History of vehicle engines and transmissions. Engine geometry. Performance parameters of gas exchange for 4-stroke and two stroke. Spark ignition engine combustion. The market situation for the development of vehicles, gearboxes and components. The selection of the transmission ratio of the vehicle. Basic approach to the performance of automotive engines, power conversion, adjustment of the engine and transmission, transmission system design principles. References 1. Bosch, R., 2008, Automotive Electrics-Automotive

Electronics : Systems and Components, 5th Edition, Stuttgart, Professional Engineering publishing.

2. Victor Hillier, Peter Coombes, 2005: Fundamentals of motor vehicle technology, Green Gate Publishing Service.

3. U. Kiencke, Lars Nielsen, 2005, Automotive control systems: for engine, driveline, and vehicle, Springer.

4. Farazdak Haideri, 2006, Transmission System Design, Nirali Prakashan Publishing.

5. Hüseyin Abut, John H. L. Hansen, Kazuya Takeda, 2007, Advances for in-vehicle and mobile systems, Springer Science.

BTMA 3763 POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify the components in the powertrain management

system. 2. Explain the functions and operations of the engine and

transmission management system. 3. Interpret the code in On-Board Diagnosis (OBD). 4. Operate equipment for testing and development of

electronic control units. 5. Design a flow chart for the engine and transmission

management system. Synopsis This course focuses on theory, operation and application of the engine and transmission management system. Topics covered include electronic fuel injection system (EFI), diesel engine management systems, electronic control unit (ECU), OBD system, electronic transmission control systems, sensors and actuators in the powertrain management system. References 1. Bosch, R., 2006, Gasoline-Engine Management : Systems

and Components, 3rd Edition, Wiley. 2. Bosch, R., 2006, Diesel-Engine Management : Systems and

Components, 4th Edition, Wiley. 3. Bosch, R., 2006, Bosch Automotive Handbook Bosch, 7th

Edition, Bentley Publishers. 4. Denton, T., 2000, Automobile Electrical & Electronic

System, 2nd Edition, Oxford : Butterworth-Heinemann. 5. Ribbens, William B. (1998), Understanding Automotive

Electronics, Warrendale (Society of Automotive Engineers International)


156

152

BTMA 3813 VEHICLE BRAKE SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explaining the concept, operation, application and

maintenance of existing automotive brake system and a combination of new regenerative braking system.

2. Design the automotive brake system. 3. Analyze and improve the noise of the brake. 4. Evaluate the damage to the braking system Synopsis This subject provides an introduction of basic knowledge of hydraulic brake system comprising the existing system and a combination of regenerative braking control. This subject will assist students to understand the basic theory of operation of brakes, diagnosis, identify problems and repair procedures. This subject will also touch on the phenomenon of vibration and noise on the brakes in practice and theory and also identify ways to repair that necessary. Physical tests using the ''Dynamometer & Modal Testing'' and verification tools, ''Finite Element Simulation” will be used to increase the practical understanding of the subject. Among the topics to be enclosed are: Basic braking system and operations, maintenance of brake system, mechanical brake, hydraulic brake control, anti-lock brake system with electronic brake distribution, control of regenerative braking, brake noise and vibration issues. References 1. Bill, K. H. & Breuer, B. 2008. Brake Technology Handbook.

1st Edition. SAE International. 2. Crolla, D. A. 2009. Automotive Engineering: Powertrain,

Chassis System and Vehicle Body, 1st Edition, Elsevier, Oxford, UK.

3. Dietsche, K. H. & Klingebiel, M. 2008. BOSCH Automotive Handbook, 7th Edition, Bentley (Robert) Inc. USA.

4. Birch, T.W. 2000, Automotive Chassis Systems. Delmar Publishers. Albany, New York.

5. Gillespie. T.D. 2001. Fundamental of Vehicle Dynamics, Society of Automotive Engineer (SAE).

6. William C. Orthwein, 2004. Clutches and Brakes: Design and Selection. 2nd Edition. Marcel Dekker. Basel, New York.

BTMA 3823 VEHICLE DESIGN AND TESTING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Describe the history and future trend in vehicle engine

design. 2. Describe the process of engine design in automotive

industry. 3. Determine important parameters in the engine design. 4. Measure the performance of internal combustion engines. 5. Perform the engine performance tests using engine

dynamometer. Synopsis This course covers the design concept and testing of the internal combustion engine with the principles of design and development process in accordance with the current and future trends in the automotive industry. It covers the fundamental approach to the design and testing engines in accordance with changes in technology. References 1. Julian Happian-Smith. 2002. An Introduction to Modern

Vehicle Design. Butterworth-Heinemann. 2. John, B.H. (1998). Internal Combustion Engine

Fundamentals. McGraw-Hill Science. 3. Richard, D.A. (2009). An Introduction to Engine Testing and

Development. SAE International. 4. Martyr, A.J. and Plint, M.A. (2007). Engine Testing Theory

and Practice. Elsevier. 3rd edition. 5. Victor Hillier, Peter Coombes (2005). Fundamentals of

Motor Vehicle Technology, GreenGate Publishing Service.


UTeM

157

153

BTMA 3833 AUTOMOTIVE ERGONOMICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Describe the characteristics and importance of ergonomics

in automotive design technology. 2. Identify relevant automotive design standards with regard

to ergonomics. 3. Design a vehicle system based on automotive design

standards with regard to ergonomics. 4. Analyze vehicle design performance related to ergonomic

aspect.

Synopsis This course provides an introduction to students about the nature and importance of ergonomics in the automotive design technology. Ergonomic aspects of the relevant international standards in automotive design also introduced. Students will be exposed to the vehicle design process especially in ergonomic aspects such as using human antopometric and the student also learn to analyze vehicle design performance related to ergonomic by using Catia V5 software. References 1. Julian Happian-Smith. 2002. An Introduction to Modern

Vehicle Design. Butterworth-Heinemann. 2. SAE Standards: Human Factors and Ergonomics. Society of

Automotive Engineers International. http://standards.sae.org/human-factors-ergonomics/standards/.

3. Vivek D. Bhise, 2011, Ergonomics in the Automotive Design Process, CRC Press

4. B. Peacock, Waldemar Karwowski, 1993, Automotive Ergonomics, CRC Press

BTMA 3883 AUTOMOTIVE PROJECT 1 Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Carry out a research project or study to resolve

engineering problem academically. 2. Work independently, manage time wisely and plan and

perform the work entrusted with a systematic and efficient method.

Synopsis Hardware uses is emphasized through case studies and outcome based approach. Students are required to plan and implement an individual project that has to do with design or engineering process. Conduct research or studies to solve the engineering problems faced by the industry in particular. Students should identify the problem by making scientific research including problem statement, objectives, literature review, provide solutions and prepare or develop equipment, tools and procedures that can lead to achievement the objectives. Students are required to provide the Automotive Project Report I to be evaluated by their supervisor.


158

154

BTMA 4843 VEHICLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Apply kinematics and dynamics principle to determine

suspension forces due to chassis loads and tire contact forces.

2. Solve the problems related with the effects of suspension parameters to the chassis dynamics in vertical, lateral and longitudinal directions.

3. Undertake some basic tests for determining suspension parameters in the form of force-velocity and force displacement characteristics.

4. Undertake some basic tests for determining the performance criteria in suspension design.

5. Explain the concept and the working principles of some advanced suspension systems such as active and semi-active suspension system.

Synopsis Introduction to chassis load and tire contact forces. Modelling of chassis dynamics in vertical, lateral and longitudal directions. Performance criteria in suspension design. The use of suspension test machine for investigating the suspension characteristics. Effects of suspension parameters to the chassis dynamics. Semi-active and active suspension system. References 1. John C. Dixon, 2009, Suspension Analysis and

Computational Geometry, 1st Edition, Wiley – Professional Engineering Publishing Series.

2. Emanuele Guglielmino, Tudor Sireteanu, Charles W. Stammers, Gheorghe Ghita. Marius Giuclea, 2008, Semi-Active and Active Suspension Control, 1st Edition, Springer.

3. August P. Staiforth, 1999, Design, Construction and Tuning of Car Suspension, Hayness Press.

4. Bosch, R. 2005. Automotive Handbook. SAE 7th Edition. John Wiley and Sons. USA.

BTMA 4854 VEHICLE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify types of vehicle power transmission, history and

future technology of the transmission. 2. Explain the basis of vehicle transmission system. 3. Explain the principle characteristics of the vehicle

transmission performance. 4. Apply the principles of general and specific design on

vehicle transmission system. 5. Conduct vehicle transmission performance test using

chassis dynamometer.

Synopsis Vehicle transmission design engineering has been enriched with many variations, such as automatic transmissions, continuously variable transmissions (CVT), the torque converter clutch transmission, dual clutch transmission, four wheel drive transmission. The purpose of this subject is to explain the development of a motor vehicle transmission as part of the development of vehicle systems. The aim is to explain the basic relationship between the drive unit, motor and transmission system and transmission system functions such as selecting the appropriate gear, the right gear, power profile, fuel consumption, life and reliability. References 1. Abut, H., Hansen, J. and Takeda, K. (2007), Advances for in-

vehicle and mobile systems, Springer Science. 2. Haideri, F. (2006), Transmmision System Design, Nirali

Prakashan Publishing. 3. Erjavec, J. (2005). Automatic Transmission. 1st ed. Cengage

Learning Publisher, USA. 4. Birch, T.W. (2005). Automatic Transmission and

Transaxles. Prentice Hall. 5. Lechner, G. and Naunheimer, H. (2004). Automotive

Transmission. 2nd ed. Springer Verlag, Germany.


UTeM

159

155

BTMA 4863 AUTOMOTIVE SAFETY & COMFORT SYSTEM Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify components in modern automotive systems 2. Describe function and operation of driver assisting system

and automotive comfort. 3. Arrange equipment for testing and development of

automotive and safety systems 4. Install tools for simulation in automotive and comfort

system. 5. Construct comfort system for automotive application.

Synopsis This course will focus on theory, operation and application for electrical and electronic system in modern vehicle and comfort system. Topics discussed include antilock braking system, traction control system, electronic stability program, adaptive cruise control, passenger protection system, driving assistance system, and X-by wire system. References 1. Bosch, R., 2007, Safety, Comfort and Convenience Systems,

3rd Edition, Wiley. 2. Bosch, R., 2006, Bosch Automotive Handbook Bosch, 7th

Edition, Bentley Publishers. 3. Bosch, R, 2003, ACC Adapative Cruise Control, Robert

Bosch GmbH. 4. Denton, T., 2000, Automobile Electrical & Electronic

System, 2nd Edition, Oxford : Butterworth-Heinemann. 5. Ribbens, William B. (1998), Understanding Automotive

Electronics, Warrendale (Society of Automotive Engineers International)

BTMA 4873 DESIGN AND SIMULATION VEHICLE SYSTEM Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Operate an industry standard dynamic analysis program

(ADAMS) using Graphical User Interface (GUI) and programming approach

2. Plan, model, simulate and analyze kinematic and dynamic problem for simple mechanical system as well as for vehicle sub-system

3. Explain the underlying theory and mathematical formulation used in solving multi-body systems simulation

4. Explain testing and modelling technique required to produce a full vehicle model

5. Evaluate and interpret the simulation results based on mechanical engineering knowledge.

Synopsis This module is intended to expose student in modeling, simulating and analyzing vehicle system using Multi-body System Software (MBS).It will covers general simple kinematics and dynamic problem, kinematics problem of a vehicle sub-system such as simple engine component, suspension system and anti-roll bars and also behavior of a vehicle using full vehicle model system. This module will also briefly cover the theoretical aspect in MBS modeling which is the mathematical formulation of a model and the relationship with computer modeling. Student will be introduced to the most well known of these programs; ADAMS (Automatic Dynamic Analysis of Mechanical Systems) References 1. Blundell M.V and Harty D. 2006. Multibody System

Approach to Vehicle Dynamics, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann

2. Thomas D. Gillespie. 1992. Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics, Society of Automotive Engineers.

3. Wong J. Y. 2001. Theory of Ground Vehicles, 3rd Edition. John Wiley & Sons.

4. Johnston, B. 1999. Vector Mechanics for Engineer -Dynamics, 3rd Edition. McGraw-Hill Ryerson.

5. Hibbeler R C. 2002. Engineering Mechanics – Static, 2nd Edition. Pearson


160

156

BTMA 4893 AUTOMOTIVE PROJECT 2 Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Conducting a research project or research to solve a

problem scientifically. 2. Work more independently, manage time wisely and plan

and perform the work entrusted to him by a systematic and efficient.

3. To train students to prepare technical reports, working papers for the work carried out investigations and then present them in a seminar arranged.

Synopsis Automotive Project 2 emphasizes the implementation of more rigorous experiments with instruments, equipment and procedures made during the Automotive Project I. It involves the processing, data collection and analysis, and lead to the survey results, graphs, charts, tables, data, decision analysis, discussion, conclusions and recommendations for further study. Students are required to provide reports Automotive Project II to be evaluated by their supervisor. Bound thesis which includes writings Automotive Projects Automotive Projects I and II should be submitted to the FTK at the end of Semester 2 in partial fulfilment of the requirements for award of the degree.


UTeM

161

157

BTMH 2713 FUNDAMENTAL OF HVAC AND REFRIGERATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand the basic cycle of thermal and heat transfer. 2. Explain, discuss and apply the underlying thermodynamics

principles to the field of refrigeration and air conditioning systems.

3. Differentiate and apply the vapour and absorption refrigeration systems.

4. List and discuss the relevancy of the working fluids such as refrigerants that are available in the respective industries.

Synopsis This subject deals with an introduction to the refrigeration and air conditioning system. Carnot cycle and thermodynamics properties phase diagrams such as p-h, T-s and p-v. Vapour compression and absorption refrigeration system. Working media used in the heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) system. References 1. Mcquiston. F. C. and Parker J. D. 1982. Heating Ventilation

and Air Conditioning: Analysis and Design. 2nd Ed. New York: John Wiley.

2. Yunus A.C. & Michael A.Boles. 1994. Thermodynamic An Engineering Approach. 2nd Ed. Singapore: Mc Graw Hill Inc.

3. Jones W.P. 1980. Air Conditioning Applications and Design. New York: Edward Arnold (Publisher) Ltd.

4. Jones W.P. 1985. Air Conditioning Engineering. New York: Edward Arnold (Publisher) Ltd.

5. Johnson W.M. 1997. Practical Cooling Technology. New York: Delmar Publisher USA

BTMH 3623 HEAT TRANSFER Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concepts of conduction, convection and

heat radiation and heat and mass transfer applications in the industry.

2. Analyze problems related to performance evaluation and design of heat and mass transfer equipment.

3. Problem solving (analytical and numerical), based on theoretical concepts such as laminar and turbulent boundary layer.

4. Combining the knowledge gained in a variety of design systems.

Synopsis The introduction of the concept and definition of heat transfer engineering, energy, work, material thermal properties, mass transfer, the laws of the theory, empirical and analytical relationships. Numerical rules. Unsteady state conduction. Numerical analysis. Heat Transfer Simulation solution. Natural convection. Forced convection in laminar and turbulent flow in the plane and pipes. Phase change heat transfer. Thermal radiation on the body and a black surface. Low rate of heat transfer. Evaporation and condensation. References 1. Holman, J.P (2001). Heat Transfer. 8th SI Edition. McGraw

Hill: Singapore. 2. Incopera, F.P. & Dewitt, D.P. (2002). Fundamental of Heat

and Mass Transfer. 4th Edition, John Wiley and Sons: Toronto.

3. Cengel, Yunus A. (2003). Heat transfer: A Practical Approach. 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill: New York.

BTMH Course Core Subjects (K)


162

158

BTMH 3723 BASIC COMPONENTS OF AIR CONDITIONING & REFRIGERATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify and distinguish the basic components of the

cooling machine and air conditioning. 2. Understand the functions and how to manage the basic

components of refrigeration and air conditioning machines.

3. Know the needs and use of accessories in the refrigeration and air conditioning systems.

Synopsis Explanations to the components in configuring refrigeration and air conditioning systems equipped as compressors, piping, condensers, valves, etc. ducts and piping systems, pumps and fans, cooling and dehumidification coil; compression control equipment; throttling valve, the condensation and evaporation. References 1. McQuiston and Parker, 1998, Heating, Ventilation and Air

Conditioning Analysis and Design, 3rd Edition, Wiley. 2. Edward G Pita, 2000, Air Conditioning Principles and

System: An Energy Approach, 4th Edition, John Wiley. 3. Jan F. Kreider and Ari Rabl, 1987, Heating and Cooling of

Buidings: Design For Efficiency, McGraw Hill. 4. ASHRAE Handbooks Volume 1,2,3 & 4.

BTMH 3733 CLASSIFICATION OF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Recognize, distinguish types of systems and absorption

cooling system steam. 2. Apply design-systems and absorption cooling system to

suit the use of steam. 3. Understand the function and method of handling each

type of refrigeration and air conditioning systems. Synopsis Introduction to the components in configuring refrigeration and air conditioning systems equipped as compressors, piping, condensers, valves, condensation, and so on. References 1. McQuiston and Parker, 1998, Heating, Ventilation and Air

Conditioning Analysis and Design, 3rd Edition, Wiley. 2. Edward G Pita, 2000, Air Conditioning Principles and

System: An Energy Approach, 4th Edition, John Wiley. 3. Jan F. Kreider and Ari Rabl, 1987, Heating and Cooling of

Buidings: Design For Efficiency, McGraw Hill. 4. ASHRAE Handbooks Volume 1,2,3 & 4.


UTeM

163

159

BTMH 3753 HEATING & COOLING LOAD Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Using medium heat loss calculation procedure. 2. Know the nature of the material terms of the building, the

influence of air infiltration and ventilation. 3. Understanding the basic concepts and methods for

determining the cooling load, the effect of the windows, walls, roof, partition the load and internal load base types.

4. Using the method CLTD. Synopsis The burden of cooling and heating can take place using various means of conduction, convection and radiation. Other factors such as weather, the nature of the materials used and the ventilation system also plays a role in cooling and heating load calculations. References 1. ASHRAE Press, 2007, Air Conditioning System Design

Manual, 2nd Edition, Butterworth-Heinneman. 2. Jan, F.K., Peter S.C., and Ari R., 2009, Heating and Cooling

of Buildings: Design for Efficiency, 2nd Edition, CRC Press. 3. McQuiston F.C., Jerald D.P., and Jeffrey D.S., 2004,

Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Analysis & Design, 6th Edition, Wiley.

4. Howard D.G. and Esko T., 2001, Industrial Ventilation Design Handbook, 1st Edition, Academic Press.

5. Thomas E.M., 1997, HVAC Principles and Applications Manual, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Professional.

BTMH 3763 HVAC SOFTWARE & CFD Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand the operations and processes that occur in

HVAC software. 2. Apply the use of several types of HVAC software. 3. Knowing the advantages and limitations in the use of

numerical simulation in the channel. 4. Identify critical evaluation method simulation results. 5. Apply a systematic approach to simulate fluid flow in the

channel system. 6. Perform the numerical simulation of fluid flows easily. Synopsis HVAC software is related to the software psychometric, sizing piping and others. Introduction to computer-aided fluid dynamics (Computational Fluid Dynamics, CFD). Law of conservation of fluid flow and boundary conditions. Finite volume methods for diffusion problems. Finite volume methods for diffusion-flow problems. Solution algorithm for pressure-velocity relationship for steady flow. Solution to discredited equation. Finite volume method for unsteady flow. The use and role of the boundary method. References 1. Peerless HVAC (C-20) Software Only, 2009. 2. Versteeg, H.K. and Malalasekera, W., 2007, An

Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The Finite Volume Method, 2nd Ed, Pearson Education Limited, Great Britain.

3. Anderson, J.D.A, 1995, Computational Fluid Dynamics, McGraw Hill Books Company, New York.

4. Tannehill, J., 1997, Computational Fluid Dynamics and Heat Transfer, 2nd Ed, Taylor and Francis.

5. Date, A.W., 2005, Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge University Press.


164

160

BTMH 3773 TRANSPORTATION AIR-CONDITIONING & REFRIGERATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Know the concept and design of the vehicle cooling

system and coolant. 2. Identifying the specific components in the vehicle air

cooling systems. 3. Detailed explanation of the problem and repair the

vehicle cooling system Synopsis Detailed explanation of the reality of vehicle cooling systems in learning to adapt to various cooling systems. References 1. Thomas S.B., 2009, Automotive Heating & Air

Conditioning, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. John H., 2000, Haynes Automotive Heating and Air

Conditioning Systems Manual, 3rd Edition, Haynes Manuals Inc.

3. Boyce D., 2001, Automotive Air Conditioning, 8th Edition, Delmar Cengage Learning.

4. James H., 2005, Marine Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Cornell Maritime Press.

5. John V.A., and Milton R., 1991, Auto Air Conditioning Technology, Goodheart-Wilcox Publisher.

BTMH 3813 MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explaining the maintenance of the pipe system and

ventilation. 2. Describe the components and systems technology in air

movement. 3. Identify the maintenance system in cooling devices such

as cooling towers, compressors, condensation units and chillers.

4. Elaborating on the factors and the impact of air quality in heating and air conditioning systems.

5. Applying maintenance management system Synopsis Environment in the HVAC, the average temperature. Energy Economics: units, day-degrees, the thermal terms. Calculation of heat loss in district heating, heat pump, absorption, storage heaters. Ventilation and air-cooled heat is felt, mechanical ventilation. Supply of hot water and cold water. References 1. Robert C.Rosaler, 1998, HVAC Maintenance and Operation

Handbook, McGraw-Hill Professional. 2. David W. Bearg, 1993, Indoor Air Quality and HVAC

System, Lewis Publishers. 3. Guy W.Gupton, 2002, HVAC Control: Operation and

Maintenance, the Fairmont Press, Inc. 4. Samuel C.Sugarman, 2005, HVAC Fundamentals, the

Fairmont Press, Inc. 5. Samuel C.S., Samuel C.M., 1992, HVAC System:

Operations, Maintenance and Optimization, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall.


UTeM

165

161

BTMH 3823 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify and explain the definitions and terminology of the

airways. 2. Designing a measurement of the airway with Aspect Ratio

and Ductulator. 3. Determine the types of materials and coating materials

and the type of diffuser and grill for HVAC industry. 4. Providing SLD and layout as well as understand the

concept of CAV and VAV.

Synopsis Introduction to the definition and airway terminology, channel design, channel measurement method with Aspect Ratio and Ductulator, Diffuser selection and grilles, material and coating material for the channel HVAC industry, the preparation of Single Line Diagram (SLD) and the layout, and concept of CAV and VAV References 1. S. Don Swenson, HVAC – Heating, Ventilating, and Air

Conditioning, ATP. 2. ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook. 2001, Chapter 34,

"Duct Design." Atlanta, GA: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

3. Awbi H.B., 2000, Air Distributions in Rooms, 1st Edition, Elsevier Science.

4. Naima, 1997, A Guide To Insulated Air Duct Systems. 5. Lama, Airflow in Ducts, Lama Book.

BTMH 3883 HVAC PROJECT 1 Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Conducting a research project or research to solve a

problem scientifically. 2. Work more independently, manage time wisely, plan and

perform the work entrusted to him by a systematic and efficient.

Synopsis Students are required to plan and implement an individual project that has to do with design or engineering process. Conduct research or studies to solve the engineering problems faced by the industry in particular. Students should identify the problem by making scientific research including problem statement, objectives, literature review, and provide solutions or develop equipment and procedures that can lead to the achievement of objectives. Students are required to provide HVAC Project Report I to be evaluated by their supervisor.


166

162

BTMH 4843 GREEN TECHNOLOGY HVAC Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Understand and explain the concept of

"Green HVAC" applied in the current industry. 2. Describe the air quality impact of factors within a

building by adopting the concept of "Green HVAC" 3. Discuss and explain the advantages of

using "Green HVAC" to customers. 4. Identify problems that occurred in

the existing HVAC system and discuss a new method to replace the old system by applying the concept of "Green HVAC".

Synopsis "Green HVAC" means a health system for consumers as well as more favourable to consumers and reduces environmental pollution and global warming, save energy and also save long term costs. References 1. David J. And Kim M., 2004, Green Remodeling: Changing

the World One Room at A Time, New Society Publishers. 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air

Conditioning Engineers, 2006, ASHRAE Green Guide: The Design, Construction, and Operation of Sustainable Buildings, 2nd Ed, Butterworth-Heinemann.

3. HVAC Excellence and Ferris State University, 2008, Green Mechanical System, 1st Edition, Esco Press.

4. Jayamaha L., 2006, Energy Efficient Building Systems: Green Strategies for Operations and Maintenance, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Professional.

5. ASHRAE Press, 2007, Air Conditioning System Design Manual, 2nd Edition, Butterworth-Heinneman.

BTMH 4863 APPLIED ACOUSTIC & VIBRATION FOR HVAC Learning Outcomes 1. Able to identify the nature of the acoustics in

understanding the concept of including the echo. 2. Can take into account the term noise and vibration in

the cooling and refrigeration system design. 3. Noise control principles can be applied to

technology absorption, silencers and sound barrier. 4. Analyze the data distribution of sound waves in

the cooling system and reduce the sound. Synopsis Explaining the acoustical design gives an overview of basic understanding of how noise and vibration associated with refrigeration and air conditioning systems, topics include terminology, the acoustics, design criteria, the selection of equipment /user applications. In addition, special noise problems suggested solutions. References 1. Hall, F., Greeno, R., Building Services Handbook, 5th

Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, U.K. 2. Strakosch, G.R., Caporale, R.S., 2010, The Vertical

Transportation Handbook, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New Jersey.

3. Chadderton, D.V., 2007, Building Services Engineering, Spon Press.

4. Wood, B., 2009, Building Maintenance, Wiley-Blackwell. 5. Chanter, B., Swallow, P., 2007, Building Maintenance

Management, 2nd Edition, Wiley-Blackwell.


UTeM

167

163

BTMH 4873 ELECTRICAL & CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Designing electrical systems in the

heating ventilation and air cooling. 2. Describe the configuration of the heat pump's electrical

system. 3. Identify electrical equipment in air-cooled. 4. Can use accurate modelling, optimization methods and

software to predict the optimum operating parameters of the selected control method.

5. Able to design HVAC control systems can provide thermal comfort and air quality with energy efficiency.

Synopsis Introduction to electricity in the HVAC system. Electrical components and measurement equipment. Analysis in the heat pump circuit. Phases and complex numbers, filters, transformers. References 1. Dale R. Patrick, Stephen W. Fardo ,Electrical Distibution

System, 2nd Ed. The Fairmont Press, Inc 2. Steven J. Marrano, Craig DiLouie, The Electrical System

Design & Specification Handbook For Industrial Facilities, The Fairmont Press, Inc

3. Robert McDowall, 2008, Fundamentals of HVAC Control System, Elsevier

4. Roger W. and Douglas C., 2006, Control Systems for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Birkhäuser.

5. Thomas E.K., 2007, Electricity, Electronics and Control System for HVAC, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall.

BTMH 4893 HVAC PROJECT 2 Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Conducting a research project or research to solve a




Synopsis HVAC Project 2 emphasizes the implementation of more rigorous experiments with instruments, equipment and procedures that made the HVAC Project 1. It involves the processing, data collection and analysis, and lead to the survey results, graphs, charts, tables, data, decision analysis, discussion, conclusions and recommendations for further study. Students are required to provide HVAC 2 Project Report for review by their supervisor. Bound thesis project that includes writing HVAC Project I and II should be submitted to the FTK at the end of Semester 2 in partial fulfilment of the requirements for award of the degree.


168

164

BTMT 2433 MACHINE TOOL TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify the characteristics of machining in a

variety of machining processes. 2. Calculate and determine the machining

parameters to produce the products according to specifications.

3. Build a logical sequence in producing a product. 4. Identify and maintain the tool & die by the

specifications. Synopsis Introduction to the latest technology of machine tools such as Electro Discharge Machine (EDM), Chemical Attack (CM & ECM), Laser Cutting, and Computerized Numerical Control (CNC). Application of criteria such as speed machining cut, feed rate, and other machining geometry. Machining is not only used as the main method in the process of cutting, even as a method for the production of appliances and machines. Exposure to the specifications of tool and die. References 1. Kibbe, R.R., Neely, J.E., White, W.T, & Meyer, R.O., 2010,

Machine Tool Practices, 9th Edition, Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.

2. Prakash Joshi, 2007, Machine Tools Handbook, McGraw Hill Professional

3. DeGarmo, E. P., Black, J. T. and Kohser, R. A., 2002, Materials and Processes in Manufacturing, 9th Edition, Wiley, New York.

4. Kalpakjian, S., and Schmid, S. R., 2001, Manufacturing Engineering Technology, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall International.

5. Schey, Introduction to Manufacturing Process, 1999, McGraw-Hill.

BTMT 2443 FUNDAMENTAL OF MACHINE COMPONENTS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify and explain the machine components found in

industry. 2. Understand the uses and functions of the machine

components in the industry. 3. Discuss the problems that often arise in the machine

components. 4. Identify the size and shape best suited for machine

components based on the critical parameters. 5. Report and explain any problems to specific machine

components.

Synopsis An introduction to machine components and functions such as gears, bearings, clutch, valve and so on. Static and fatigue failure. Flat Belts and V shape. Clutch, brake drums and discs. Spring, chain and sprocket. Students will also be exposed to the causes of machine failure. References 4. Dym, C. L. and Little, P., 2004, Engineering Design: A

Project-Based Introduction, John Wiley, New York. 5. Haik, Y. 2003, Engineering Design Process, Thomson

Learning, New York. 6. Norton, R. L., 2002, Design of Machine Elements, Prentice

Hall, New York. 7. Shigley, J. E. and Mischke, C. R. 1994, Mechanical

Engineering Design, 6th Metric Edition McGraw-Hill, New York.

8. Bhandari, V. B., 1994, Design of Machine Elements, Tata McGraw-Hill, Calcutta.

BTMT Course Core Subjects (K)


UTeM

169

165

BTMT 2533 BASIC CONTROL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Differentiate between open-loop system and closed-loop

system. 2. Interprets the basic concepts and terms used in control

system: transfer function, block diagram, poles, zeros etc.

3. Utilize Laplace transform theory as well as differential equation in control system.

4. Derive a mathematical model of dynamic systems. Synopsis Introduction to control systems. Revision on complex variable and functions, Laplace transform, inverse Laplace transform. Linear, time-invariant, differential equations. Transfer function, block diagram, linearization. Mathematical modelling of dynamic systems. Transient response and steady-state response analysis: impulse response, 1st order systems, 2nd order systems, higher order systems, characteristic equation, Routh’s stability criterion, effects on integral and derivative control actions on system performance, steady-state error analysis in unity-feedback control systems. Polar plot, Nyquist stability criterion, Bode plot. Root locus analysis. References 1. Dorf, R.C., H. Bishop, R.H. 2001. Modern Control Systems,

9th Edition. Prentice Hall. 2. Ogata, K. 2002. Modern Control Engineering, 4thh Edition.

Prentice Hall. 3. Nise, N.S. 2004. Control System Engineering, 4th Edition.

John Wiley & Sons. 4. Kuo, B.C. 1995. Automatic Control Systems, 7th Edition.

John Wiley & Sons. 5. Sudhir Gupta. 2002. Elements of Control Systems. Pearson

Education, Inc.

BTMT 2553 DYNAMICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course the students should be able to: 1. Describe clearly the concept of position; velocity and

acceleration in determine the motion of particle and rigid body.

2. Calculate the problem involving rectilinear and curvilinear motion of particle and rigid body accurately.

3. Apply appropriate principle of force and acceleration, work energy and energy, impulse and momentum in solving the particle and rigid body problems.

4. Analyze the motion of the rigid body in particular of absolute and relative velocity and acceleration methods in plane motion.

Synopsis This course introduces to the principle of dynamics based on kinematics and kinetic. Understand the concept of position, velocity and acceleration, application of Newton second law, Principle of Work and Energy, Principle of Impulse and Momentum for particle and rigid body References 1. Beer, F. P. 2004. Vector Mechanics for Engineers,

Dynamics SI Units, 7th Edition. McGraw-Hill. 2. Hibbeler, R. C. 2002. Engineering Mechanics, Dynamics,

2nd Edition. Prentice Hall. 3. Meriam, J. L. And Kraige, L. G. 2003. Engineering

Mechanics, SI Version, 5th Edition. John Wiley & Sons. 4. Little, R. S. and Inman, D. 1999. Engineering Mechanics,

Dynamics. Prentice Hall.


170

166

BTMT 2633 PNEUMATIC AND HYDRAULIC TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Describe fundamental principles that govern the behaviour

of fluid power systems. 2. Explain the common hydraulic and pneumatic components,

their use, symbols and their applications in industry. 3. Analyze mathematical models of hydraulic and pneumatic

circuits in order to produce efficient and desired fluid power system.

4. Design, simulate and analyze various hydraulic and pneumatic systems by using related computer software.

5. Construct, operate and troubleshoot the hydraulic and pneumatic system with manual and electrical control.

Synopsis This course covers the introduction of the hydraulic and pneumatic systems, types of pump, compressor and their working principles, types of valve, actuator and their usage, performance of the fluid power system, others fluid power system ancillaries and sensors, fluid power system circuit design and analysis with manual control and electrical control, fluid power symbols, the usage of computer software to design and simulate the fluid power system circuit, the usage of programmable logic controller in fluid power system circuit design and the application of fluid power in robotic and mobile hydraulic. References 1. Ilango S. 2007. Introduction to Hydraulics and Pneumatics.

Prentice Hall-India. New Delhi. 2. Esposito A. 2003. Fluid Power with Applications .6th Ed.

Prentice Hall. New Jersey. 3. Johnson, J.L. 2002. Introduction to Fluid Power. Delmar.

New York. 4. Majumdar SR. 2002. Oil Hydarulic System Principles and

Maintenance. Tata-McGraw Hill. New York. 5. Hehn A.H. 1993. Fluid Power Handbook.Vol 1. Gulf

Publishing Company. Texas.

BTMT 2643 BASIC TRIBOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain the current principles of tribology and its

importance in mechanical system. 2. Interpret tribological surface roughness measurement

precisely. 3. Differentiate between friction and wear and analyze factors

which lead to wear of metallic materials. 4. Determine the minimum thickness of bearing lubrication

based on principles of lubrication. 5. Evaluate condition monitoring of machine through oil

analysis accurately. Synopsis Introduction to basics and principles of Tribology, characterization of solid surface, interaction between solid surfaces, friction and wear, lubrication regimes and lubricants, rolling element bearing, tribological components failure, lube oil condition monitoring, micro/nano-Tribology. References 1. Raymond G., Bayer G. 2004. Mechanical Wear

Fundamentals and Testing, 2nd Edition. Marcel Dekker, New York.

2. Strafford K.N., Datta P.K., Grag J.S. Surface Engineering Practice, Ellis Horltoow.

3. Suh, N. P. 1986. Tribophysics. Englewood Cliffs, NJ. Prentice-Hall.


UTeM

171

167

BTMT 2712 INTRODUCTION TO MAINTENANCE

Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understanding the principles in planning and implementing

a maintenance work. 2. Explaining the approach used in maintenance. 3. Explaining the existing maintenance practices with current

issues in the maintenance. 4. Combining an effective and productive maintenance

practices. 5. Selecting the appropriate techniques to be applied in

certain circumstances of maintenance work. Synopsis Introduction to the principles of engineering and maintenance management, Preventive Maintenance, Total Productive Maintenance, Total Quality Control, Total Employee Involvement and system for equipment maintenance. Revolution and issues in system maintenance as well as maintenance practices.

References 1. Mobley, R.K., Higgins, L. , Wikoff, D. , 2008, Maintenance

Engineering Handbook, McGraw-Hill Professional 2. Smith, R., Mobley,R.K., 2003, Industrial Machinery Repair:

Best Maintenance Practices Pocket Guide (Plant Engineering), Butterworth-Heinemann.

3. Mobley, R. K., 2002, An Introduction to Predictive Maintenance, 2nd Edition, Butterworth- Heinemann.

4. Joel Levitt, 2002, Complete Guide to Predictive and Preventive Maintenance, Industrial Press

5. Seiichi Nakajima , Norman Bodek, 1988, Introduction to TPM: Total Productive Maintenance, Productivity Press.

BTMT 3723 MAINTENANCE TECHNOLOGY & ASSET MANAGEMENT Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand the method and strategy for maintenance and

asset management. 2. Understand the quantitative analysis methods in economy,

risks and reliability data. 3. Explain the maintenance best practices. 4. Formulate the methods for accident prevention, fire

protection and lost control. 5. Apply maintenance software in maintenance management

system. Synopsis Students will be introduced to the maintenance strategy, calculating the life of each unit machine and instrument. Identifying maintenance workshop and scheduling, maintenance organisation, effective use of maintenance resources, maintenance system, maintenance best practices, engineering economy such as weibull and pareto analysis, cost estimation, asset replacement analysis, risk analysis and control, application of reliability data, accident prevention, fire protection and cost control. References 1. Terry Wireman, Benchmarking Best Practices in

Management Maintenance, Industrial Press, 2010. 2. John D. Campbell, Andrew K.S. Jardine, Joel McGlynn, Asset

Management Excellence: Optimizing Equipment Life-Cycle Decisions, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2010.

3. Nicholas Anthony John Hastings, Physical Asset Management, Springer, 2009.

4. John S. Mitchell, John E. Hickman, J.E. Amadi-Echendu and H. Paul Barringer, Physical Asset Management Handbook, 2006.

5. Terry Wireman, Developing Performance Indicators for Managing Maintenance, 2nd Edition, Industrial Press Inc., 2005.


172

168

BTMT 3733 CONDITION BASED MAINTENANCE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand and describe the condition based maintenance

(CBM) philosophy and methods. 2. Clarify the CBM methods to monitor and identify

engineering problems. 3. Outline the analysis techniques by using vibration, thermal,

lubricant and corrosion monitoring methods. 4. Analyse and diagnose the abnormality from the collected

CBM data. Synopsis Introduction of CBM and maintenance management, vibration monitoring method and fault detection, lubricant condition monitoring and fault detection, thermal monitoring condition, CBM in electrical machines, corrosion monitoring and non-destructive test (NDT) and non-destructive evaluation (NDE). References 1. Robert Bond Randall, Vibration-based Condition

Monitoring: Industrial, Aerospace and Automotive Applications, John Wiley and Sons, ISBN 978-0-470-74785-8, 2011.

2. R. Keith Mobley, Lindley R. Higgins, Darrin J. Wikoff, Maintenance Engineering Handbook, McGraw Hill, ISBN 978-0-071-54646-1, 2008.

3. Yardley, E.D., Condition Monitoring-Engineering the Practices, The Institution of Mechanical Engineer, ISBN 1-86058-361-X, 2002.

4. Alan Davies, Handbook of Condition Monitoring: Techniques and Methodology, Chapman and Hall, ISBN 0-412-61320-4, 1998.

5. Rao, B.K.N., Handbook of Condition Monitoring, Elsevier Science, ISBN 1-85617-234-1, 1996.

BTMT 3743 VIBRATION ANALYSIS AND MONITORING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand and describe the machinery vibration

monitoring methods and purposes. 2. Apply the frequency spectral analysis and other signal

processing methods to predict the machinery health condition.

3. Apply the computerised method of vibration monitoring for condition monitoring and fault diagnosis.

4. Outline the method of signal processing and identify machinery faults.

Synopsis Principle of vibration analysis, principle of vibration measurement and instrumentation, signal processing (sampling rate, filtering, time domain and frequency domain, power spectral density etc.) model testing, vibration based condition monitoring on gear, shaft, bearing and motor. References 1. Robert Bond Randall, Vibration-based Condition

Monitoring: Industrial, Aerospace and Automotive Applications, John Wiley and Sons, ISBN 978-0-470-74785-8, 2011.

2. Allan G. Piersol, Thomas L. Paez, Cyril M. Harris, Harris’ Shock and Vibration Handbook, McGraw Hill Professional, ISBN 978-0-071-50819-3, 2009.

3. Clarence W. De Silva, Vibration Monitoring, Testing and Instrumentation, CRC Press/Taylor & Francis, ISBN 978-1-420-05319-7, 2007.

4. Kenneth G. McConnel, Vibration Testing: Theory and Practice, John Wiley and Sons, ISBN 0-471-30435-2, 1995.

5. Victor Wowk, Machinery Vibration - Measurement and Analysis, McGraw Hill, ISBN 0-07-071936-5, 1991


UTeM

173

169

BTMT 3813 TRANMISSION TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain the basic component in transmission system. 2. Understand the function of transmission system. 3. Combined the quality and cost factor in designing

transmission system. 4. Apply proper method in analyzing transmission system

maintenance. Synopsis Introduction to gear drive: arrangement and tooth forms. Gearbox rating. Bearings and seals. Lubrication systems. Materials and heat treatments. Gear quality. Effect of quantity on cost. Planetary gear arrangement analysis. Gearbox installation. Gear unit operation: testing, start-up, condition monitoring. Maintenance analysis: scheduled maintenance References 1. Jack Erjavec, Today’s Technician: Manual Transmissions and

Transaxles, 5th Edition, Delmar Cengage Learning, 2010. 2. Lynwander, Gear Drive System: Design and Application,

BBS, 2009. 3. Thomas S. Birch and Chuck Rockwood, Automatic

Transmissions & Transaxles,4t.h Edition, Prentice Hall, 2009. 4. Illes Dudas, The Theory and Practice of Worm Gear Drives,

Butterworth-Heinemann, 2004. 5. Robert L. Mott, Machine Elements in Mechanical Design,

4th. Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.

BTMT 3823 MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain and understand the principles and techniques of

machine diagnostics. 2. Apply and understand the methods of monitoring and

diagnostics data processing. 3. Using the methods of data analysis and diagnostics for

maintenance. 4. Report a result of diagnostics and troubleshooting and

suggest for improvement. Synopsis Students will be exposed to basic diagnostics techniques and methods used in identifying the failure of the machinery system. Fault tree analysis method is important for the purpose of monitoring data for maintenance of a machine system as well. This course will also discuss the diagnostics data processing and distribution of statistical diagnostics for smooth management of maintenance work. References 1. Fatih Camci, Process Monitoring, Diagnostics and

Prognostics in Machining Process: Condition Based Maintenance: Manage Failures by Monitoring, Detecting Lap, Lambert Academic Publishing, 2010.

2. J.H. Williams, A. Davies, P.R. Drake, Condition Based Maintenance and Machine Diagnostics, Springer, 2009.

3. Keith Mobly, Maintenance Engineering Handbook, McGraw Hill, 2008.

4. Geoff Klempner and Isidor Kerszenbaum, Handbook of Large Turbo Generator Operation and Maintenance, IEEE Press Series on Power Engineering, 2008.

5. D.C. Palmer, Maintenance Planning and Scheduling Handbook, McGraw Hill, 2005.


174

170

BTMT 3833 INDUSTRIAL MOTOR Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Define basic principles that affected motor behaviour and

component of controller circuit. 2. Describe commonly use motor and driver components: its

functions, symbol and application in industry. 3. Apply motor controller and its components to observe how

the system work and its application in industry. 4. Analyse various motor controller system and its

relationship with other motor basic components. 5. Identify major factor in motor failure.

Synopsis This course mainly focuses on introduction of motor types. Symbols and schematic diagrams. Solid state relays. Rectifiers. SCR drivers. Variable frequency drivers with input and output to programmable controllers. Component side and its work principles. Pressure sensor. Limit switches. Temperature sensing devices. References 1. Jonathan Wood, The British Motor Industry, Shire, 2010. 2. Stephen L. Herman, Industrial Motor Control, Delmar

Cencage Learning, 2009. 3. Jay F. Hopper, Introduction to Industrial Motor Control,

Caroline Academic Press, 2009. 4. Riazollah Firoozian, Servo Motor and Industrial Control,

Springer US, 2009. 5. Rex Miller, Industrial Electricity and Motor Controls,

McGraw Hill, 2007.

BTMT 3843 MECHANICAL MACHINE MAINTENANCE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. List and apply the machine maintenance techniques. 2. Conduct alignment and rotational balancing. 3. Disassemble, check, repair and reassemble mechanical

component. 4. Do preventive maintenance for mechanical machine. Synopsis The student will be exposed to the maintenance techniques, troubleshooting and fault diagnosis for mechanical equipment. Among the basic maintenance methods are: condition based monitoring, vibration analysis, alignment dynamic balancing and mechanical seals. Students also will be learned about troubleshooting and maintenance of various machines and components such as valve, pump, compressor, gear and turbine. The essential steps of disassemble, check, troubleshoot, repair and reassemble of mechanical components will be stressed in this course. All the works done will be written in the given report format. Some of the project or practical work will be done in group. High assessment mark will be given to assignment that implemented by following the procedure and completed in a period of time. References 1. Joel Levitt, TPM Reloaded: Total Productive Maintenance,

1st Edition, Industrial Press, 2010. 2. Larry Chastain, Industrial Mechanics and Maintenance, 3rd

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. Richard R. Knotek, Mechanical Principles and Systems for

Industrial Maintenance, Prentice Hall, 2005. 4. R. Keith Mobley, Maintenance Fundamentals, 2nd Edition,

Butterworth-Heinemann, 2004. 5. Daniel E. Whitney, Mechanical Assemblies: Their Design,

Manufacture and Role in Product Development, Oxford University Press, 2004.


UTeM

175

171

BTMT 3863 INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Clarify the importance of calibration in order to get the

precise data. 2. Identify instruments need for scheduled calibration. 3. Show on how sensor and general calibrator functioned. 4. Perform industrial equipment calibration based on

acceptable standard. Synopsis Basically focuses on introduction to calibration whereby students are exposed to the importance of gathering precise and consistent data from test equipment. Students are also will be taught on how to maintain high quality calibration system. References 1. Icon Group, Self Calibration, Icon Group International,

2010. 2. Anthony J. Wheeler & Ahmad R. Ganji, Introduction to

Engineering Experimentation, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2009.

3. Jay L. Butcher, The Quality Calibration Handbook: Developing and Managing a Calibration Program, 1st Edition, ASQ Quality Press, 2006.

4. Mike Cable, Calibration: A Technician’s Guide, ISA: The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society, 2005.

5. Tormod Naes, User Friendly Guide to Multivariable Calibration and Classification, NIR Publication, 2002.

BTMT 3873 PLANT INSPECTION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain and solve problems by systematically using tools

and appropriate technique related to plant inspection issues.

2. Apply and use appropriate inspections methos and techniques as well as analysis for the identified problem in related industries.

3. Using procedures or specific standards of inspections and compliance with government laws relating to factory inspection.

4. Report a problem identified from the inspection and suggest for improvements.

Synopsis Students will be exposed to basic plant facilities, equipment and plant operations as well as various methods of plant inspection and essential practical skills necessary to ensure smooth operation of a plant. Through this subject, students will acquire information and the latest methods of inspection related to the power plant, heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems, water sources and disposal requirements, mechanical power transmission, instrument and automatic control, pollution and waste control . References 1. Kevin Ruelle, Rick Kaletsky, OSHA Inspections: Preparation

and Response, 10th Printing, National Safety Council, 2006. 2. Clifford Matthews, Handbook of Mechanical In-Service

Inspection: Pressure Systems and Mechanical Plant, Wiley, 2004.

3. Ricky Smith & R. Keith Mobley, Industrial Machinery Repair: Best Maintenance Practices Pocket Guide (Plant Engineering) 1st Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2003.

4. Robert Rosaler, Standard Handbook of Plant Engineering, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Professional, 2002.

5. Britta Stengl & Reinhard Ematinger, SAP R/3 Plant Maintenance, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2001.


176

172

BTMT 3883 MAINTENANCE PROJECT 1 Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Analyze types of maintenance problem. 2. Distinguish suitable maintenance methods that related to

maintenance issues. 3. Perform and solve maintenance issues with the aid of

available equipments. 4. Apply the knowledge of sciences, mathematics and

engineering in solving problems occurred from the project. 5. Suggest the cost saving of maintenance. 6. Complete the maintenance project progress report. Synopsis Students need to plan and implement the project individually related to the maintenance engineering field. The students should implement a project or study to solve the maintenance problems especially related with industrial machines or equipments. At the end, students should write a problem based learning report that covers problem statement, literature review and methodology to overcome the problem. The students need to achieve the objectives of the project and presented it in report.

BTMT 4763 RELIABILITY, MAINTAINABILITY AND RISK Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Collect valuable data on reliability, maintainability and risk

engine. 2. Applying statistical methods used for failure analysis and

component reliability. 3. Demonstrate methods of maintainability analysis.

Synopsis Component failure statistics, decision analysis (Pareto analysis and trend analysis), analysis and access the component reliability (Weibull distribution and analysis, graphics), maintainability analysis, Fault Tree Analysis and Event Tree, design of security systems. References 1. Gulati, R, and Smith, R., 2009, Maintenance and Reliability

best practices, Industrial Press Inc 2. Stephen J, 2005, Improving maintenance and reliability

through culture change, Industrial Press Inc. 3. Narayan, V., 2004, Effective Maintenance Management:

Risk and reliability strategies for optimizing performance,Industrial Press Inc.

4. David John Smith, 2001, Reliability, Maintainability and Risk: Practical Methods for Engineer, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann.

5. Dhillon B.S., 1999, Engineering Maintainability: How to Design for Reliability and Easy Maintenance, Gulf Publishing Company, ISBN 0-88415-257-X.


UTeM

177

173

BTMT 4773 BUILDING MAINTENANCE Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Describe the system and the quality of electric power

supply to the building and the protection required. 2. Describing the carrier system and technology, HVAC,

water supply, fire protection and sewage. 3. Identification of national standards related. 4. Do building maintenance effectively.

Synopsis Basically in buildings: thermal comfort, the average temperature of the radiation, the index of the cold. Energy Economics: units, degree days, thermal conductivity. Calculation of heat loss: the thermal resistance, conductivity terms, polietana. Heating: district heating, heat pump, absorption, storage heaters. Ventilation and air cooling: thermal taste, mechanical ventilation. Water supply, hot and cold water: ball valve, zeolite, the secondary circulation. Sewage systems: close, sanitary equipment, ventilation flue. Irrigation: underground storage tanks, load flow, the flow holes, the pipe material. Underground irrigation: vapour barriers, vapour pressure, psychometric chart. Condensation in Buildings. Lighting: luminary, colour temperature, the fluorescent lights. Gas: gas pipelines, manometer, gas meter. Electrical installation: the excess flow device, distribution box, circuit loop. Room acoustics: sound pressure level, sound power level, the absorption coefficient. Fire Protection: Hydrant dry, smoke detectors. Service area and the plant: electricity sub-stations, mechanical aerators. References 1. Brian Wood, 2009, Building Maintenance, Wiley-Blackwell 2. Ryan Cuzan, 2009, Manager’s guide to building preventive

maintenance, CRC press. 3. Chanter B., and Swallow,P., 2007, Building Maintenance

management, Blackwell 4. Bernard L, and Richard P., 2007, Facilities Manager

maintenance handbook, McGraw Hill Book. 5. Liska, R.W., and Morrison, J., 2001, Building Maintenance:

Forms, Checklists and Procedures, Prentice Hall

BTMT 4783 OIL AND WEAR DEBRIS ANALYSIS Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Collecting data in the form of particle content in

the lubricating oil in machinery components such as gears and bearings.

2. Determining the failure of machinery components through data analysis and oil debris analysis.

3. Determining the causes of increasing content of any dirt or debris in a lubricant

4. Determine the remaining time (onset of failure) life expectancy through the analysis engine oil components.

5. Propose actions to be taken against the machine components in a timely manner.

Synopsis Analysis of oil in terms of density, oil pollution, temperature, viscosity, and changes during the machine operation. Collecting samples at rates of regular oil. See the shape, number, and colour, surface debris resulting from the bearing or gear to fix the machine. Determine the onset of failure and make the maintenance of machinery components that are appropriate. References 1. Camci, F., 2010, Process Monitoring, Diagnostics and

Prognostics in Machining Processes: Condition Based Maintenance : Manage Failures by Monitoring, detecting. LAP Lambert Academic Publishing

2. Hunt, M.T., Evant, John S., 2008, Oil Analysis Handbook, Cooxmoor Publishing Company

3. Bartz, W. J.; Batchelor, A.W. ,2000, Engineering Tribology, 2nd Edition, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann

4. Roylance, B.J.; Hunt, M. T., 1999, Wear Debris Analysis: Machine & Systems Condition Monitoring Series, Coxmoor publishing company.


178

174

BTMT 4852 MAINTENANCE AWARENESS IN DESIGN Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Identify factors that can increase the maintainability and

reliability. 2. Applying aspects of maintainability and reliability in the

design of an equipment or tools. 3. Measure of maintainability and reliability and can suggest

improvements. Synopsis Parameters that can be used when designing the MTTR, MTBF, MWT, learn from failure-feedback information to the machine design, FMEA, QFD, the house of quality, analysis of serial and parallel system, Redundancy concept, multiple criteria and resource allocation. References 1. Stephen J, 2005, Improving maintenance and reliability

through culture change, Industrial Press Inc 2. David John Smith, 2001, Reliability, Maintainability and

Risk: Practical Methods for Engineer, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann

3. John Moubray, 1997, Reliability-Centered Maintenance, Industrial Press Company, ISBN 0831131-462.

4. Mohamed Modarres, 1999, Reliability Engineering and Risk Analysis: A Practical Guide, Marcel Dekker, ISBN 0-8247-2000-8.

5. Dhillon B.S., 1999, Engineering Maintainability: How to Design for Reliability and Easy Maintenance, Gulf Publishing Company, ISBN 0-88415-257-X.

6. Hunt, M. T.,1992, Handbook Of Wear Debris Analysis And Particle Detection In Liquids, Elsevier Science Publisher.

BTMT 4893 MAINTENANCE PROJECT 2 Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Conducting a research project or research to solve a




Synopsis Maintenance Project 2 emphasizes the implementation of more rigorous experiments with instruments, equipment and procedures that made the Maintenance Project 2. It involves the processing, data collection and analysis, and lead to the survey results, graphs, charts, tables, data, decision analysis, discussion, conclusions and recommendations for further study. Students are required to provide Maintenance Project 2 Report for review by their supervisor. Bound thesis project that includes writing Maintenance Project 1 and 2 should be submitted to the FTK at the end of Semester 2 in partial fulfilment of the requirements for award of the degree.


UTeM

179

175

BTMU 4936 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Acquire on-job training or in-plant training in a working

environment relevant to the field of mechanical engineering.

2. Develop appropriate soft skills and professional engineering environment exposure throughout the duration of industrial training.

3. Apply all knowledge in order to solve common industrial problems as an individual and as a leader in a group or a member of a team.

4. Practice the ethics of social, environmental and cultural responsibilities appropriately during industrial training.

Synopsis Students in their 6th semester are required to undergo industrial training for a minimum of 20 weeks at the designated organisation. During the industrial training, students are given continuous supervision by an industrial supervisor as well as supervisor appointed by the faculty. Daily activities throughout the industrial training must be recorded in a log book provided by the faculty, which will be evaluated by the supervisors. Six credit-hours are given for this industrial training. Students must show satisfactory attendance and discipline in order to pass this course. The faculty’ supervisor will visit the students every five week during their training period.

BTMU 4946 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING REPORT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Acquire on-job training or in-plant training in a working

environment relevant to the field of mechanical engineering.

2. Develop appropriate soft skills and professional engineering environment exposure throughout the duration of industrial training.

3. Apply all knowledge in order to solve common industrial problems as an individual and as a leader in a group or a member of a team.

4. Practice the ethics of social, environmental and cultural responsibilities appropriately during industrial training.

Synopsis During the training the student is required to prepare a progress report for every five weeks for evaluation purposes. The report should indicate all training and experience gathered from the industry, by following the format outlined by UTeM. These reports will be evaluated and will be graded. During the training student has to record all activities that being done every days in the provided log book. The log book also will be evaluated and will be graded.

BTMx Course Core Subjects (K)


180

176

BTPM 1113 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Find the multivariable function together with its domain

and range 2. Use the techniques of integration to calculate the area and

the volume of the region 3. Apply the integrals of the function with double and triple

integral by using various techniques 4. Apply the knowledge of vector-valued function in physical

and engineering fields

Synopsis This course consists of three chapters: Functions of Several Variables, Multiple Integrals and Vector-valued Functions. The syllabus is developed by introducing the concepts of the functions with several variables, integration and also vector-valued function, followed by learning various techniques in solving the problems and its application in physical and engineering fields.

References 1. Finney R.L., Weir M.D. and Giordano F.R. (2001) Thomas's

Calculus,10th Edition, Pearson 2. Anton H. (1992) Calculus, 8th Edition, John Wiley. 3. Smith R.T. and Minton R.B., (2002) Multivariable Calculus,

McGraw-Hill. 4. Stroud K.A. (2001) Engineering Mathematics, 5th Edition,

Palgrave Macmillan 5. Steward J. (2001) Calculus-Concepts and Contexts,

Brooks/Cole, 2nd Edition

BTPU 1123 ENGINEERING STATICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe the basic principles of engineering statics. 2. Calculate the forces, torsion, and bending. 3. Apply the principles of statics in manufacturing

engineering. 4. Demonstrate the principles of statics through laboratory

experiments. Synopsis The subject of statics deals with forces acting on rigid bodies at rest, covering coplanar and non-coplanar forces concurrent and non-concurrent forces, friction forces, hydrostatics forces, centroid and moments of inertia, resultant forces for a variety of force systems, as well as analyzing forces acting on bodies to find the reacting forces supporting those bodies. References 1. Hibbeler, R.C. (2009) Statics and Mechanics of Materials, SI

Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 2. Morrow, H.W. and Kokernak, R.P. (2007), Statics and

Strength of Materials, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 3. Cheng, F.H. (1997) Statics and Strength of materials, 2nd

Edition, McGraw Hill, New York. 4. Gere, J.M. (2006) Mechanics of Materials, 6th Edition,

Thomson Canada Limited, Canada

SUBJECT DETAILS FOR JTKP PROGRAMMES



UTeM

181

177

BTPU 1114 ENGINEERING DRAWINGS & CAD Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic graphic principles in generating an

engineering drawing. 2. Generate free sketching 3. Construct engineering drawing in CAD software 4. Create clear and legible sketches to represent roughly the

idea or object in mind. Synopsis The purpose of this course is to provide students with an understanding of the importance of engineering graphic communication to the design process and interpreting the engineering drawings. Student will gain hands-on experience creating freehand technical sketches, CAD technical drawings using orthographic projections, sections auxiliary views and isometric drawings. Emphasis is placed on creating drawings that are neat, correctly dimensioned using industry standards. Students will use freehand sketches methods and CAD software to develop visualization skills and create the engineering drawings. This course consists of lecture and practical session. A major part of the course consists of performing structured laboratory exercises. Classroom activities will complement and support the lab exercises with explanations and demonstrations of required activities. References 1. Giesecke, M., Spencer, H. & Dygdon, N. (2008) Technical

Drawing, 13th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Riley, D. (2006) Discovering AutoCAD 2006, Pentice Hall. 3. McAdam, D. & Winn, R. (2003) Engineering Graphics, 2nd

Edition, Pearson Education Canada Inc. 4. Marjom, Z. & Attan, H. (2008) Engineering Graphics &

CADD, for Engineering Students, FKP, UTeM.

BTPU 1133 MANUFACTURING PRACTICE Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe and demonstrate proper use of basic engineering

equipments and requirement. 2. Produce product based on technical drawing. 3. Fabricate products that meet specific tolerance.

Synopsis The practice consists of introduction to basic knowledge of using manual hand tools, cutting tools, machine tools, welding, fabrication, fitting, casting and milling. This course introduces common equipments for performing manufacturing works, such as: Lathe and milling machine, arc welding, TIG/MIG welding, sheet metal forming, basic foundry, etc. References 1. Kalpakjian, S. and Schmid R. (2006), Manufacturing

Engineering and Technology, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Amstead, B.H. (1997) Manufacturing Processes, 3rd Edition,

John Wiley & Son. 3. Mikell, P. G. (1996) Fundamental of Modern

Manufacturing, Prentice Hall International Edition. 4. Kibbe, R., Meyer, R.O., Needy, J.E., and White, W.T. (1995)

Machine Tools Practice, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall.


182

178

BTPM 1213 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Solve second order linear differential equations with

constant coefficients by using Undetermined Coefficient and Variation of Parameters methods.

2. Solve linear differential equations with constant coefficients by using Laplace Transform method

3. Find the Fourier series of a periodic function and solving partial differential equations using the separation of variable method.

4. Apply the knowledge of ordinary and partial differential in solving engineering problems.

Synopsis This subject consists of five chapters: Introduction of ordinary and partial differential equations, second order linear differential equation with constant coefficients, Laplace Transform, Fourier series and Partial Differential Equations. The syllabuses are developed based on these three different stages which are exposing the students to fundamental concept of differential equation, various techniques to solve different type of differential equation and also various solving techniques in the engineering problems. References 1. Dennis G. Zill & Micheal R. Cullen (2005) Differential

Equations with Boundary-Value Problems, 6th Edition. Thomson Learning, Inc.

2. R. Kent Nagle, Edward B. Saff & Arthur David Snider (2008) Fundamentals of Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, 5th Edition. Pearson Education Inc.

3. C. Henry Edwards & David E. Penney (2008) Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, 4th Edition. Pearson Education Inc.

4. Werner Kohler & Lee Johnson (2004) Elementary Differential Equations with Boundary Value Problems, Pearson Education Inc.

BTPU 1213 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe the basic principles of strength of materials. 2. Calculate the shear, stress and strain. 3. Apply the principles of strength of materials in

manufacturing engineering. 4. Demonstrate the principles of strength of materials

through laboratory experiments. Synopsis The subjects contains topics of introduction, Stress, Strain, Hooke’s Law, Bending, Mechanical Properties, Transformation of stress, Axial Load, Transformation of Strain Torsion, Beam Bending, Transverse Shear, Combined Loadings, Deflection of Beams and Shafts and Mohr’s Circle. References 1. Hibbeler, R.C. (2009) Statics and Mechanics of Materials, SI

Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 2. Morrow, H.W. and Kokernak, R.P. (2007), Statics and

Strength of Materials, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 3. Gere, J.M. (2006) Mechanics of Materials, 6th Edition,

Thomson Canada Limited, Canada


UTeM

183

179

BTEG 1213 PRINCIPLE OF ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the principle of electrical and electronics, the

theoretical and application methods of electrical circuit analysis.

2. Analyze various types of currents and voltages 3. Design, simulate and analyze using various types of simple

analog and digital circuits 4. Measure the outcome of various types of circuits through

lab sessions 5. Study and work either individually or in groups through

assignments and presentations Synopsis This subject will discuss electric and electronic principles; electric charge, electric force, Coulomb’s Law, Ohm’s Law, Lenz’s Law, transformer, capacitor, electrical power and energy, direct current generation, Alternating current generation and charge movement in solid, conductor, isolator and semiconductor. References 1. Thomas L. Floyd (2003) Principles of Electric Circuits, 7th

Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Edward Hughes (2002) Electric and Electronic Technology,

Prentice Hall. 3. H. Robbins and W.C. Miller (2004) Circuit Analysis: Theory

and Practice, 3rd Ed, Thomson Delmar.

BTIG 1213 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain and convert problems into appropriate solutions. 2. Solve problems by using software engineering principles. 3. Produce program codes that applies suitable programming

structure. Synopsis In this course, students will be exposed to the basic principles of computer and software development methodology. The course also includes basic principles of programming such as syntax, semantic, compiling, and linking. Students will also learn programming techniques using C++ such as data type, operator, selection, repetition, function, array, file, and pointer. References 1. Malik, D. S. (2004) C++ Programming: From Problem

Analysis to Program Design, Thomson Online Technology. 2. Diane Zak (2008) An Introduction to Programming with C++,

5th Edition 3. John R.Hubbard (2007) Programming with C++”, McGraw

Hill. 4. D’ Orazio, T.B. (2004) Programming in C++: Lessons and

Application, McGraw Hill.


184

180

BTPU 1223 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify characteristics and capabilities of various

manufacturing processes. 2. Explain the fundamental concepts of manufacturing

processes. 3. Differentiate the ability of various manufacturing

processes. 4. Construct various skills of manufacturing techniques as an

individual or a group. 5. Produce products using related equipment and machinery. Synopsis In this module, students will be introduced to various manufacturing processes that can be categorized into three major focus areas; metal removal processes, near-net shape and forming processes and joining processes. For the metal removal processes, the students will be exposed to turning, milling and abrasive machining. In the area of near-net shape and forming processes, wide range of processes will be introduced such as casting, rolling, forming, forging and extrusion. In addition to that near-net-shape processes for plastic, ceramic and metal powder will also be covered. And finally, the joining processes will familiarize the students to fusion and solid state welding. References 1. Kalpakjian, S. and Schmid, R. (2006) Manufacturing

Engineering and Technology, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Timing, R. and Tooley, M. (2001) Basic Manufacturing, 2nd

edition, Newnes. 3. Rao, P.N. (2000) Manufacturing Technology – Metal Cutting

and Machine Tool, Mc Graw Hill. 4. Schey, J.A. (2000) Introduction to Manufacturing Processes,

3rd edition, Mc Graw Hill.

BTPM 2113 STATISTICS AND PROBABILITIES Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Find probability by using probability concept and

probability distributions 2. Solve inferential statistics problem by using estimation and

hypothesis testing concept 3. Produce the linear relationship between two variables and

measure the strength of the linear relationship 4. Solve statistics problem using statistical software 5. Relate statistics to information technology

Synopsis Students are exposed to the concept of probability and inferential statistics. The course starts with Probability followed by Discrete Random Variables, Continuous Random Variables and Sampling Distribution. Main topics for Inferential statististics will start with Estimation. This will be followed by Hypothesis Testing, Estimation and Hypothesis Testing: Two Populations, Anova, Simple Linear Regression and Correlation. Besides that, this course will give some exposure to statistical software. Statistical software is used as a tool to obtain better accuracy for related problems. References 1. Sh. Sara, Hanissah, Fauziah, Nortazi, Farah Shahnaz (2008)

Introduction to Statistics & Probability A Study Guide, Pearson Prentice Hall

2. Douglas C. Montgomery, George C.Runger (2002) Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers, 3rd Edition, John Wiley

3. Richard A. Johnson (2005) Probability and Statistics for Engineers, 7th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall

4. Jay L. Devore (2000) Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences, 6th Edition, Thomson – Duxbury


UTeM

185

181

BTPU 2133 ENGINEERING MATERIALS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concept of Engineering Materials in term

of interatomic bonding and crystal structure. 2. Classify engineering materials based on its properties and

structure. 3. Demonstrate appropriate test to determine mechanical

properties of engineering materials according to the ASTM standard.

4. Apply the basic understanding of engineering materials properties to determine appropriate processing method.

Synopsis This course introduces basic concepts of engineering materials that covers introduction to engineering materials, interatomic bonding, crystalline structure and imperfections in solid. Explanation on different type of engineering materials (i.e. metal, polymer, ceramic, composite and semiconductor), its mechanical properties, basic application and processing are also included. Introduction to the binary phase diagrams (composition and microstructure correlation) is also given. References 1. Callister, W.D. Jr. (2006) Materials Science and Engineering

- An Introduction, 5th Edition. John Wiley & Sons Inc. 2. Smith, W.F. (1996) Principle of Materials Science &

Engineering, 3rd Edition, Mc. Graw Hill. 3. Shackelford, J.F. (2000) Materials Science and Engineering -

An Introduction, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall. 4. Bolton, W. (2001) Engineering Materials Technology, 3rd

Edition, BH Publisher. 5. Vernon, J. (2001) Introduction to Engineering Materials, 4th

Edition, Palgrave MacMilan.

BTPU 2144 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe the principles of product design and development. 2. Analyze problems and synthesis solutions in design process. 3. Design the product through the principles of product

design and development. 4. Demonstrate ability to develop prototype. Synopsis This course blends the perspectives of marketing, design and manufacturing into a single approach to product development. This subject provides the students with real industrial practices and essential roles played by various members of product development teams. Throughout this subject, various attempts are used to strike a balance between theory and practical. References 1. Ulrich, K.T. & Eppinger, S.D. (2008) Product Design and

Development, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Irwin. 2. Chitale, A.K. & Gupta, R.C. (2006) Product Design and

Manufacture, 3rd Prentice Hall, New Delhi, India. 3. Kalpakjian, S. & Schmid, S.R. (2001), Manufacturing

Engineering & Technology, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall.


186

182

BTPU 2123 MECHANICS OF MACHINES Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the concept of kinetics and kinematics motion of a

particle. 2. Apply the basic principles of mechanics of rigid body on

machines and its mechanism. 3. Solve problems related to rigid body in motion using

Newton’s Second and Third Law methods. 4. Analyze the mechanics of machines elements and measure

its performance. Synopsis This course consists of two parts namely Dynamics and Mechanics of Machines. Topics covered in Dynamics are kinematics of particles, kinetics of particles, kinematics of rigid bodies and kinetics of rigid bodies. Mechanics of Machines consists of power transmission system which includes belt drive, gear drive, dynamic balancing, governor, gyroscope and vibrations. References 1. Hibbeler, R. C. (2007) Engineering Mechanics Dynamics,

11th Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., Singapore. 2. Roslan A. R., Che Abas C. I. & Mohd Yunus A. (2003)

Mekanik Mesin, Universiti Teknologi Malayaisa, Johor. 3. Ramamurti, V. (2005) Mechanics of Machines, 2nd Edition,

Alpha Science International Ltd, U.K. 4. Vinogradov, O. (2000) Fundamentals of Kinematics and

Dynamics of Machines and Mechanisms, CRC Press, United States of America.

BTPU 2112 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH MANAGEMENT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able: 1. Explain the different requirements of Factory and

Machinery Act, Occupational Safety and Health Act and Environmental Quality Act and its regulations.

2. Identify various safety, health and environment hazards that affect human being.

3. Apply various requirements on safety and health principles on working environment.

4. Analyse scenarios in manufacturing industries that are subjected to Factory and Machinery Act, Occupational Safety and Health Act and Environmental Quality Act and its regulations.

5. Evaluate potential workplace safety, health and environment hazards and propose methods to eliminate reduce or control them.

Synopsis The aim of this course is to expose students to industrial Laws in Malaysia specifically Factory and Machinery Act, Occupational Safety and Health Act and Environmental Quality Act and its regulations. Furthermore students will be thought safety, health and environment hazard that affects human being. The skills and knowledge of this area are crucial for students to accommodate them in the future. References 1. Goetsch, D. L. (2004). Occupational Safety and Health for

Technologists, Engineers, and Managers, 5th Edition, Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.

2. Reese, C. D. (2003). Occupational Health and Safety Management, A Practical Approach. Lewis Publishers, A CRC Press Company.

3. Undang-undang Malaysia, (2005). Akta Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 dan peraturan-peraturan, MDC Publishers Sdn Bhd.

4. Undang-undang Malaysia, (2005). Akta Kilang dan Jentera 1967 dan peraturan-peraturan, MDC Publishers Sdn Bhd


UTeM

187

183

BTPU 2213 QUALITY CONTROL Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the basic quality principles and practices, quality

solving techniques, and product reliability related to manufacturing practices.

2. Apply the quality solving techniques such as SPC, QFD, FMEA, Six Sigma and PDSA in order to improve quality.

3. Analyze the manufacturing process and capability using variable and attributes control;

4. Design sampling method for quality control. Synopsis There are four main sections consist in Quality and Reliability subject: quality principles and practices; quality solving techniques; reliability and additional quality tools. In quality principle and practices, its covers quality basic, quality gurus, introduction to total quality management, and quality awards. Quality solving techniques will cover statistical process control (7 QC tools). In reliability, it explains life and reliability testing plans for product and process. Additional quality tools are Quality Function Deployment (QFD), Failure Mode Effect & Analysis (FMEA), Six Sigma and PDSA. References 1. Besterfield, D. H. (2008) Quality Control, 8th Edition,

Prentice Hall. 2. Fryman, M.A. (2002) Quality and Process Improvement,

Thomson Learning. 3. Besterfield, D.H., Besterfield-Minhna, C., Besterfield, G. H.

and Besterfield-Sacre, M.(2003) Total Quality Management, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall.

4. Montgomery D. C., (2005) Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, 5th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

BTPU 2223 CONTROL SYSTEMS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify basic control system theory such as transfer

function, Laplace Transform, stability analysis, linear equation, time respond and others.

2. Model linear and time invariant system using frequency domain and state space method.

3. Model linear, time in variant electrical, mechanical, and electromechanical systems by manipulating block diagrams and signal flow diagram.

4. Apply commercially available mathematical software to solve control theory problems.

Synopsis This subject focuses on the fundamental of control system theory. The system includes translational mechanical system, rotational mechanical system and electromechanical system, in linear and time invariant state. Student will also be exposed to solve stability and steady state problems in a system. Some of the methods used in solving these problems are dynamic system modelling, Laplace transform, block diagram and Routh-Huwirtz stability. Practical application on how to use commercially available mathematical software to solve control problem will also be introduced. References 1. Nise, Norman S. (2003) Control System Engineering, 4th

Edition, John Wiley. 2. Ogata, Katsuhiko (2002) Modern Control Engineering, 4th

Edition, Prentice Hall. 3. Palm W. J. (2002) Control System Engineering, John Wiley 4. Bishop, Dorf (2005) Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,

Prentice Hall.


188

184

BTPU 3114 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the fundamental concepts, tools and techniques

applied in Industrial Engineering. 2. Analyze and solve problems that are related to Industrial

Engineering (IE). 3. Conduct experiments or laboratory tasks related to topics

discussed in IE. 4. Solve manufacturing operation scenarios using Industrial

Engineering tools and techniques. Synopsis This course is an introduction to Industrial Engineering (IE) . The course introduces fundamental concepts and technique in IE covering two major areas that are production systems and optimization. In production system, student will be taught to productivity concept, work study and measurements, facility planning, forecasting, material requirement planning, inventory control and production scheduling. In optimization , students will be exposed to queueing theory , simulation and modeling, lean manufacturing and project management. References 1. Heizer, J., and Render, B. (2008) Operations Management,

9th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Krawjewski, J.L., and Ritzman, P.L. (2008) Operation

Management; Process Value Chains, 8th Edition, Prentice Hall.

3. Salvendy, G. (2001) Handbook of Industrial Engineering: Technology and Operations Management, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall.

BTPU 3123 THERMO-FLUIDS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the thermodynamic properties of pure substances

using property data tables. 2. Apply the thermodynamic First Law and Second Law for

common steady-flow devices. 3. Use the Bernoulli Equation to solve various fluid flow

problems. 4. Demonstrate the principles of thermodynamics and fluid

mechanics through laboratory experiments. Synopsis The course introduces the students to the basic engineering of thermodynamics that involved study on the energy transformation, working fluids, theory and application of first and second laws of thermodynamics. The course also covers explanation on the steam and gas power plant as a direct application of the thermodynamic theory. Students will be exposed on refrigeration system as an application on the thermodynamics principles. The second part of this course is to introduce the students to the basic of fluid mechanics. This consists of fluid's static and dynamic analysis, buoyancy and stability, Bernoulli equation, momentum principle, flow behavior in pipe and also covers the basic principle of dimensional analysis. References 1. Cengel, Y.A., Turner, R. H. & Cimbala, J. M. (2008)

Fundamentals of Thermal-Fluid Sciences, 3rd Edition in SI Units, Mc Graw Hill.

2. Kaminsky, D. A. & Jensen, M.K. (2005) Introduction to Thermal and Fluid Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

3. Cengel, Y.A. & Michael, A.B. (2002) Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach, 4th Edition, Mc Graw Hill.

4. Eastop, T.D. & McConkey, A. (2004) Applied Thermodynamics for Engineering Technologist, 5th Edition, Longman.


UTeM

189

185

BTPU 3214 BACHELOR DEGREE PROJECT I Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify the setting of project goals based on the problem

statements. 2. Initiate and layout problem solving elements - objectives &

scope. 3. Work independently to design, analyze, fabricate. 4. Evaluate any form of system or experimental rig using

available facilities including laboratory equipments, software and library resources.

5. Apply his/her knowledge in science, mathematics and engineering to solve the problems.

Synopsis Individual project in the student’s area of specialization under the guidance of supervisors. The work includes designing, evaluating, and analyzing components, assemblies, and systems. Develop products/manufacturing techniques demonstrating state-of-the-art technology. A written proposal, one or more written progress reports, and final written report are required. An oral presentation is required upon completion of the course.

References 1. Manual Projek Sarjana Muda (PSM), Fakulti Kejuruteraan

Pembuatan, Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka.

BTPG 3212 TECHNOPRENEURSHIP Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain key entrepreneurship issues, including, ideas,

theory and practice of new venture creation and entrepreneurship processes, and innovation and technology management for new ventures.

2. Assess and evaluate viable business ideas, sources of new ideas, methods for generating ideas and screening, and creative problem solving.

3. Develop understanding of important areas of business and management with respect to the new product development process and the entrepreneurial business plan, including key sources of business support and finance, market and the steps required to research a market and protect the intellectual property for a business opportunity, the management of people and operations, and financial forecasts

Synopsis The course will facilitate students with the key entrepreneurship motivation and skills to inculcate entrepreneurial behaviors and competencies, incorporating theories and practices for new venture creation. Other topics include familiarizing students with the concepts, issues and techniques of venture creation and entrepreneurship. It will also explore issues concerning marketing and strategic management, risks and uncertainties, business sustainability and global opportunities by going international. The course will facilitate students’ understanding on the importance of protecting intellectual property. References 1. Thomas W. Zimmere & Norman M. Scarborough (2004)

Essentials of Entrepreneurship & Small Business Management, 4th Edition. New York, Prentice Hall

2. Kuratko, D. F. and Hodgets, R. M. (2004) Entrepreneurship Theory, Process and Practice, 6th Edition. New York, Thomson South Western.

3. Mankani, D. (2004) Technopreneurship, Singapore, Prentice Hall.

4. Dollinger, M. J. (2003) Entrepreneurship: Strategies and Resources, 3rd Edition, New Jersey, Prentice Hall


190

186

BTPU 4134 BACHELOR DEGREE PROJECT II Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Work independently to design, analyze, fabricate. 2. Evaluate any form of system or experimental rig using

available facilities including laboratory equipments, software and library resources.

3. Apply his/her knowledge in science, mathematics and engineering to solve the problems.

4. Develop the first practical experience or project conducted by the student before venturing into the real world working experience.

Synopsis Individul project in the student’s area of specialization under the guidance of supervisors. The work includes designing, evaluating, and analyzing components, assemblies, and systems. Develop products/manufacturing techniques demonstrating state-of-the-art technology. A written proposal, one or more written progress reports, and final written report are required. An oral presentation is required upon completion of the course. References 1. Manual Projek Sarjana Muda (PSM), Fakulti Kejuruteraan

Pembuatan, Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka.

BTPU 4112 ENGINEERING ETHICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify the principles of engineering ethics, law, and

professionalism. 2. Distinguish the relevant acts, authorizing body (Board of

Engineers Malaysia, BEM) and role of the professional engineering body (Institute of Engineers Malaysia, IEM.

3. Relate the engineering ethics, law, and professionalisms with current industrial situation.

4. Respect & uphold the importance of engineering ethics, law, and professionalism in the welfare and safety of society and industrial organization.

Synopsis Basically, the course structure will offer students to learn, understand and apply knowledge in engineering ethics and professionalisms in their future career. Engineering as a professional career, requires certain policy, guidelines, regulations, ethical codes and requirements so that an engineer (practitioner) can contribute effectively in industrial practices. Additionally engineers should be aware of the laws in engineering for example, Contract Law, Tort Law and Intellectual Property. References 1. Akta 138: Akta Pendaftaran Jurutera. 2. Peraturan-peraturan Pendaftaran Jurutera. 3. Johari, Mohd Janib (2001) Etika Profesional, Penerbit UTM,

Skudai. 4. Martin, Mike W. (2005) Ethics in Engineering, McGraw Hill. 5. Logeswaran, R. et. al (2006) Engineers in Society, 2nd

Edition, McGraw Hill. 6. Dyson, J.R. (1997) Accounting for non Accounting Students,

4th Edition, Pitman Publishing, London


UTeM

191

187

BTPU 4123 SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Describe the elements of design for Dematerialization,

Detoxification, Revalorization and Renewal 2. Design, various product type with minimum environmental

effect 3. Analyze the environmental effect of product throughout its

lifecycle Synopsis Sustainable design or green product design is to incorporate product design to eliminate negative environmental impact completely through skillful, sensitive design. Manifestations of sustainable design require no non-renewable resources, impact the environment minimally, and relate people with the natural environment. References 1. Frederic P Miller, Agnes F Vandome, John McBrewster,

(2010) Design for Environment, VDM Publishing House Ltd. 2. Joseph Fiksel, Joseph R. Fiksel, (2009) Design for

environment: a guide to sustainable product development. McGraw Hill

3. Fabio Giudice, Guido La Rosa, Antonino Risitano, (2006) Product design for the environment: a life cycle approach, Taylor and Francis.

BTPU 4246 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Apply theory and skills acquired in class, workshop and labs

in actual industrial environment. 2. Solve the given technical problem during the industrial

training 3. Describe relevant process in company through report

writing, interview and presentation session 4. Describe relevant process in company through report

writing, interview and presentation session 5. Adopt professional practice and ethics in work. Obey

company rules and regulations. 6. Seek additional relevant information from various sources

related to the problem independently to make improvement

Synopsis Industrial training is a compulsory component for degree program students at Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka (UTeM). The experiences and skills acquired from a period of placement can be invaluable and provide the advantage to the students when applying for employment after graduation. During the training period with the relevant industry, students are expected to involve in the following areas of training in order to achieve the underlying objectives, such as; Manufacturing / production process and / or its optimization process, Mechanical design and product / system development, Maintenance and repair of machineries or equipments, and Product testing & quality control. After completing those training, the students are expected to possess a certain level of “hands – on practical experience” related to their own field of studies particularly. References 1. Faculty Of Manufacturing Engineering Student ‘s Log

Book, (2008) FKP 2. Faculty Of Manufacturing Engineering Industrial

Training Guide Book, (2007) 2nd Edition, FKP.


192

188

BTPP 2214 CAD/CAM Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain CAD/CAM systems and applications in industrial

manufacturing. 2. Apply basic principal CAD/CAM methodology into 2D, 3D,

surface modeling and CAM operation. 3. Plan machining strategies and toolpath methods for milling

and turning operations. 4. Investigate and simulate machining operations prior to the

machining process. Synopsis This course is an introducing to the CAD/CAM system and its application in industry. The students will be exposed to the application of high-end CAD/CAM software for generating geometric modeling and also part programming. The course covers generating 2D Graphic Elements, Geometric Modeling Systems, Generative/Interactive Drafting, CAD and CAM Integration and CAD/CAM Programming. By doing a group project, student will understand the link from CAD to CAM operation. Using CAD/CAM software, students will know how to simulate the part programming before start the machining operation. References 1. Karam, F. (2004) Using CATIA V5, Tomson (Delma Learning). 2. Rao, P.N. (2004) CAD/CAM Principles and Applications, 2nd

Edition, McGraw Hill. 3. Chang T.C., Wysk, R.A. & Wang, H.P. (2006) Computer-

Aided Manufacturing, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall. 4. McMahon, C. & Browne, J. (1998) CADCAM Principle,

Practise and Manufacturing Management, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall.

BTPP 2223 MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Recognize the basic elements of common measurement

systems 2. Predict the behavior and applications for measurement

different physical quantities. 3. Evaluate measurement performance of a measurement

system. 4. Proposed and explain suitable measurement methods and

sensors

Synopsis This course provides the overall picture of measurement elements, which is divided into two main sections. The first section is regarding measurement performance which includes standards, characteristics, calibration, errors, measurement system analysis, signal, noise and etc. The second section, students will be introduced with various measurement methods such as pressure, fluid flow, strain, temperature etc. In this section also, the different sensors technology is taught. Student will have adequate knowledge in understanding the behaviors of measurement output and in selecting appropriate measurement tools for a specific measurement task. References 1. S. Morris, (2001), Measurement & Instrumentation

Principles. 1st Edition. Butterworth 2. T.G.Beckwith, R.D. Maragoni, J.H. Lienhard, (2006),

Mechanical Measurements. 6th edition, Pearson-Prentice Hall.

3. J.P. Bentley, (1995), Principles of Measurement System. 3rd Edition. Longman.

4. Robert, B., Northrop, (2005), Introduction to Instrumentation and Measurements. 2nd Edition. CRC Press.


BTPP Course Core Subjects (K)


UTeM

193

189

BTPP 2233 MATERIAL SELECTION Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic relationship between properties,

processing and performance of materials. 2. Analyze materials selection attributes in product design

and manufacturing. 3. Justify the suitability of a particular processing method for

a specific selected material and design activity using data, charts and software.

4. Select the right materials and processes to be used for products fabrication and commercialization.

Synopsis This course integrates all types of engineering materials (metals, polymers, ceramics and composites) and its properties (modulus, strength, hardness and toughness etc) for materials selection in any engineering design. Various processing techniques (shaping, joining and finishing etc) are also summarized. Case study and project work are used to reinforce the concept and capabilities in applying selection of materials utilizing materials properties charts, data and software. References 1. Ashby, M.F. (2005) Materials Selection In Mechanical

Design, 3rd Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann. 2. Mangonon, P.L. (1998) The Principles of Materials Selection

for Engineering Design, Pearson Education. 3. Cranes, F.A.A. & Charles, J.A. (1984) Selection and Use of

Engineering Materials, Butterworths, London. 4. Mahmoud M.F. (1989) Selection of Materials and

Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Design, Prentice Hall.

5. Kenneth G.B. (1988) Engineering Materials: Properties and Selection, Prentice Hall.

BTPP 3114 ADVANCED MACHINING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic operation principles and control systems

of CNC machine. 2. Construct CNC Programming for turning and milling

operations 3. Analyze problem related with CNC Program using linear

moves, circular moves and canned cycles. 4. Use CNC lathe and CNC milling machines

Synopsis This course covers the knowledge of CNC technology and basics of CNC machining operations. Students will learn CAD/CAM and CNC machining using Mastercam software on PC based computers. The students will be exposed to the operation of CNC machines and methods of producing programming by using G-codes and M-codes. References 1. Krar, S., Gill, A., and Smid, P. (2000) Computer Numerical

Control Simplified, Industrial Press Inc. 2. Madison, J. (1996) CNC Machining Handbook, Industrial

Press Inc. 3. Thyer, G.E. (1991) Computer Numerical Control of Machine

Tools, 2nd Edition, Newnes. 4. Mattson, M. (2002) CNC Programming Principles and

Applications, Delmar.


194

190

BTPP 3123 MATERIALS TESTING AND FRACTURE ANALYSIS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the various methods of materials testing and the

fundamental and characteristics of different types of failures in materials.

2. Analyze the effects of external forces on the behavior of materials, and the test methods employed in determining various mechanical properties.

3. Classify the types of failure and fracture of materials in manufacturing and service

4. Demonstrate materials testing and fracture analysis through laboratory sessions.

Synopsis The course will introduce the student on how Identify the various methods of materials testing and able to explain the effects of external forces on the behavior of materials, and the test methods employed in determining various mechanical properties. Among the scope of the course are fundamental and characteristics of different types of failures in materials to apply the fracture mechanics principles to identify the types of fracture surfaces of different materials and able to perform failure analysis, to differentiate the types of failure and fracture of materials in manufacturing and service. References 1. The mechanical testing of metals and alloys, By P. Field

Foster, SIR ISAAC PITMAN & SONS, LTD., USA 2. Hand book of advanced materials testing, Nicholas P

Cheremisinoff, and Paul N Cheremisinoff, III SERIES, Materials engineering, MARECEL DEKKER INC., USA.1995

3. Mechanical Behavior of Materials: Engineering Methods for Deformation, Fracture & Fatigue (2nd Edition), by Norman E. Dowling, Publisher: Prentice Hall; 2nd edition (September 2, 1998)

BTPP 3133 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING PROCESSES Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the principles and operation of the advanced

manufacturing processes. 2. Select the most appropriate process for a given product

design, application requirements and cost constraint. 3. Recognize the safety measures in handling advanced

manufacturing machines. 4. Apply the knowledge of advanced manufacturing processes

by completing a design and fabricating project. Synopsis The course consists of non-traditional manufacturing processes and material removal methods, which include manufacturing processes using lasers technology, electron beam, abrasive water jet, electro discharge machining and electro chemical machining. Moreover, it will also include the introduction to aerospace material machining, automotive stamping, coating technology and electronic manufacturing processes. References 1. Mikell, P.G. (2007) Fundamental of Modern Manufacturing

Process, 3rd Edition, Prentice hall. 2. Gregg, R. (2004) Modern Materials and Manufacturing

Processes, Prentice Hall. 3. Degarmo, B.K. (1997) Materials and Processes in

Manufacturing, 8th Edition, Prentice hall.


UTeM

195

191

BTPP 3213 JIG & FIXTURES Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain requirements for jigs and fixtures. 2. Design and construct jigs and fixtures. 3. Determine and implement locating and clamping principles. Synopsis This course starts with an introduction of jigs and fixtures that is used to facilitate production works, making interchangeable pieces of work possible at a savings in cost production. Jigs and fixture are used to locate and hold the work that is to be machined. Also, the use of this device can result in such a degree of accuracy that workpieces can be assembled with a minimum amount of fitting. A jig and fixture can be designed for a particular job. The form to be used depends on the shape and requirement of the workpiece to be machined. References 1. E.G. Hoffman (2004) Jig and Fixture Design 5th edition,

Thomson Delmar Learning Publisher. 2. E.K. Henriksen (1973) Jig and Fixture Design Manual,

Industrial Press, New York.

BTPP 3223 PLASTIC TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the fundamental principles of engineering polymers

in term of classification and application. 2. Describes the relationship of structure, behavior and

properties of polymer with its processing and final application.

3. Justify the selection of appropriate polymer for specific applications by considering its properties and processing techniques.

Synopsis This course provides an introduction to engineering polymers, which covers its classifications (thermoplastic, thermoset and elastomer), mechanical, rheological and physical properties as well as polymer product processing. Basic concept of polymer blends and raw materials formulation are also included. Emphasis is made on polymer based product manufacturing, relations between processing and final properties as well as environmental effects (disposal and recycling). References 1. McCrum, N.G., Buckley, C.P. and Bucknall, C.B. (2004)

Principles of Polymer Engineering, Oxford Science Publication.

2. Brent, S.A. (2006) Plastics Materials and Processing, 2nd Edition, Butterworth Heinemann.

3. Bahadur, P. and Sastry, N.V. (2005) Principles of Polymer Science, 2nd Edition, Alpha Science.

4. Fried, J.R. (2003) Polymer Science & Technology, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall

5. Crawford, R.J. (2001) Plastic Engineering, Butterworth Heinemann.


196

192

BTPP 3233 JOINING TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify types of joining processes applied in manufacturing

sector. 2. Explain the characteristics of joining in terms of process,

equipment and setup. 3. Analyze the quality of joints using some testing methods. 4. Practice the joining processes using certain equipment to

make variety of joints. Synopsis Joining Process is another very important element in manufacturing and assembly processes. Where nearly all products, from a relatively simple to the most complex, are assembled from single parts or components. Therefore, this subject shall covering each of related joining process and its equipment, inclusive welding, brazing, soldering, adhesive bonding and mechanical fastening. Furthermore, its also provides an engineering applications of using some of the equipment and tools of joining processes. References 1. Serope Kalpakjian & Steve Schmid, (2006) Manufacturing

Process and Technology, Prentice Hall 2. Klas Weman & Gunnar Linden, (2006) MIG welding guide,

Woodhead Publishing Limited. 3. Jeffus L, (2004) Welding Priciples and Aplication, Thomson. 4. Howard C., (2002) Modern Welding Technology, Prentice

Hall.

BTPP 3243 LEAN MANUFACTURING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the philosophy and foundation of lean

manufacturing. 2. Use appropriate analytical technique to identify and

eliminate the types of wastes apparent in a manufacturing system.

3. Apply Value Stream Mapping to appraise the current state and to develop a vision for the future.

4. Construct work flow based on lean manufacturing principles.

Synopsis Lean Manufacturing is based upon the principle of eliminating waste at all levels throughout the manufacturing system. This module reviews the skills and techniques required to analyse manufacturing systems and to design improved methods and layouts. It will use Value Stream Mapping to understand and appraise the current state ; future state mapping will be used to develop a vision of value added flow. The focus of this module will be on the application of the technique through case studies and industrial experience, and will identify the benefits to be gained by their successful. References 1. William, M.F. (2000), Lean Manufacturing: Tools,

Techniques, and How to Use Them, St. Lucie Press 2. Tapping, D., Luyster,T. and Shuker, T (2002) Value Stream

Management, Productivity Press. 3. Womack, J. P. and Jones, D.T., (1999) Lean Thinking,

Simon & Schuster. 4. Shingo, S. (1989) A study of the Toyota Production System

from an Industrial Engineering Viewpoint, Productivity Press

5. Womack, J.P., Jones, D.T. and Roos, D. (1995) The Machine That Changed the World: The Story of Lean Production, Rawson Associates


UTeM

197

193

BTPP 4113 SHEET METAL TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the application of sheet metal technology. 2. Recognize and work safely in the sheet metal shop 3. Use all automation machines such as laser cutting, turret

punch and press brake to produce complex finish product. Synopsis This subject covers the introduction to safety, tools, machinery, materials, and fasteners used in the sheet metal trade. It covers processes such as cutting, forming and joining methods in fabrication of sheet metal and also including application of advanced machine such as CNC Tube Bending, CNC Laser Cutting, CNC Turret Punch and CNC Press Brake. References 1. Vukota, Boljanovic, (2004) ”Sheet Metal Forming Processes

and Die Design”, Industrial Press Inc. 2. R.E Wakeford, (2002) Sheet Metal Work, Biddles Ltd. 3. Steve D. Benson, (1997) Press Brake Technology: A Guide to

Precision Sheet Metal Bending, Society of Manufacturing Engineers.

4. Leo A. Mayer, (1995) Sheet Metal, American Technical Publishers Inc.

BTPP 4124 MANUFACTURING SYSTEM Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Describe and apply the principles and techniques of

simulation. 2. Construct models of discrete event simulation for

manufacturing systems. 3. Use simulation software to design and analyse

manufacturing systems using statistical technique. 4. Construct and deduce result for simulation based

experiments. Synopsis Modeling and simulation introduces the students to principles and techniques of discrete event simulation. This is a powerful system tool for analyzing a wide variety of complex engineering and business problems. Students will learn to model a real system, use the main computational and programming instruments, and simulation language, to program the model. Student also will be exposed to design and evaluate simulation experiments. References 1. Harrington, H.J. and Kerim T. (2000) Simulation Modeling

Methods: To Reduce Risks and Increasing Performance, McGraw Hill.

2. Severance, F. L. (2001) System Modeling and Simulation: An Introduction, John Wiley & Sons.

3. Averill, L. and Kelton, W.D., (1999) Simulation Modeling and Analysis (Industrial Engineering and Management Science Series), 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Science/Engineering/Math.


198

194

BTPP 4134 AUTOMOTIVE COMPONENT MANUFACTURING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the proper use of hand tools, power tools, electric

tools and machines and PPE. 2. Identify the different automotive joining process such as

welding, adhesive bonding and mechanical fastening 3. Describe the finishing process involved in automotive

manufacturing. 4. Apply the knowledge of surface treatment such as blasting

and painting technology. Synopsis This subject provides strong fundamental concepts and techniques related to various type of finishing method that are applied in automotive industries. This subject covers three major techniques used in finishing process such as machine process, joining process and surface treatment. The subject is practical oriented where students apply their knowledge as well as capable to operate the relevant equipment. References 1. Serope Kalpakjian, (2002) Manufacturing Engineering &

Technology, 4th edition, Prentice Hall 2. R.L. Timings, (1998) Manufacturing Technology, vol 1, 3rd

edition , Wesley Longman 3. P.N RAO, (2000) Manufacturing Technology-Metal cutting

& Machine Tools, McGraw Hill. 4. H.S .Bawa, (2004) Manufacturing processes, McGraw Hill 5. Robert. GmBH, (2005) Automotive Handbook, 6th edition.

Society of Automotive Engineer (SAE)


UTeM

199

195

BTPD 2213 COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain CAM systems and applications in industrial

manufacturing. 2. Apply basic principal CAM methodology into 2D, 3D,

surface modeling and CAM operation. 3. Plan machining strategies and toolpath methods for milling

and turning operations. 4. Investigate and simulate machining operations prior to the

machining process. Synopsis This course is an introducing to the CAD/CAM system and its application in industry. The students will be exposed to the application of high-end CAD/CAM software for generating geometric modeling and also part programming. The course covers generating 2D Graphic Elements, Geometric Modeling Systems, Generative/Interactive Drafting, CAD and CAM Integration and CAD/CAM Programming. By doing a group project, student will understand the link from CAD to CAM operation. Using CAD/CAM software, students will know how to simulate the part programming before start the machining operation. References 1. Karam, F. (2004) Using CATIA V5, Tomson (Delma Learning). 2. Rao, P.N. (2004) CAD/CAM Principles and Applications, 2nd

Edition, McGraw Hill. 3. Chang T.C., Wysk, R.A. & Wang, H.P. (2006) Computer-

Aided Manufacturing, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall. 4. McMahon, C. & Browne, J. (1998) CADCAM Principle,

Practise and Manufacturing Management, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall.

BTPD 2224 ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWINGS & CADD Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic graphic principles in generating an

engineering drawing. 2. Apply the suitable design tools and reate clear and legible

sketches to represent roughly the idea or object in mind. 3. Generate engineering drawing in CAD software that can be

interpreted by engineering professionals. 4. Apply engineering tools and methodology in producing

technical drawing of a product.

Synopsis The purpose of this course is to provide students with an understanding of the importance of engineering graphic communication to the design process and interpreting the engineering drawings. Student will gain hands-on experience creating freehand technical sketches, CAD technical drawings using orthographic projections, sections auxiliary views and isometric drawings.Emphasis is placed on creating drawings that are neat, correctly dimensioned using industry standards. Students will use freehand sketches methods and CAD software to develop visualization skills and create the engineering drawings. This course is consists of lecture and practical session. A major part of the course consists of performing structured laboratory exercises. Classroom activities will complement and support the lab exercises with explanations and demonstrations of required activities. References 1. Giesecke, Mitchell, Spencer, Hill, Dygdon and Novak,

(2008), Technical Drawing, 13th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Dix R., (2006), Discovering AutoCAD 2006, Pentice Hall. 3. McAdam, D. and Winn, R., (2003), Engineering Graphics,

2nd Edition, Pearson Education Canada Inc. 4. Zolkarnain M., and Hassan A., (2008), Engineering Graphics

& CADD, for Engineering Students, FKP, UTeM.

BTPD Course Core Subjects (K)


200

196

BTPD 2233 ERGONOMICS DESIGN Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Describe human capabilities and limitations in performing

the jobs/activities; 2. Apply ergonomics principles to create safe, healthy,

efficient and effective activities in the workplace; 3. Analyze the effectiveness of the work system designed; 4. Design a work system by taken into consideration human

capabilities and limitations. Synopsis This course provides the students with the rationale for providing an occupationally safe and healthy work environment in industry. Three main elements of this course: human, equipment and work environment. These three elements are classified into different areas, however correlations of them are discussed and exemplified in each topic. Through human study, students will be explained about the human anthropometric, physiology, psychology as well as capabilities and limitations of human. Meanwhile, through ergonomic design of equipment, students will learn on how to design the hand tools and workstations that are safe to the users. Last but not least, the students also will be exposed on how to manage work environment such as thermal comfort, noise, etc. This will contribute better understanding to occupational health of industries. References 1. Wickens, C.D. (2007) An Introduction to Human Factors

Engineering, 2nd Edition, Pearson education International. 2. Salvendy, G. (2006) Handbook of Human Factor and

Ergonomics, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons. 3. Kroemer, K.H.E, K.B Kroemer and K.E Kroemer (2000)

Ergonomic : How To Design For Ease and Efficiency, Prentice Hall.

4. Karwowski, W. and Marras, W. S. (2003) Occupational Ergonomics: Principles of Work Design, CRC Press.

5. Peter, V. (2004) Comfort and Design. Principles and Good Practice, CRC Press

BTPD 3113 CNC TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe the concept of CNC system. 2. Produce correct programming code. 3. Create product modeling. 4. Produce product using CNC machine. Synopsis This course covers the knowledge of CNC technology and basics of CNC machining operations. Students will learn CAD/CAM and CNC machining using Mastercam software on PC based computers. The students will be exposed to the operation of CNC machines and methods of producing programming by using G-codes and M-codes. References 1. Krar, S., Gill, A., and Smid, P. (2000) Computer Numerical

Control Simplified, Industrial Press Inc. 2. Madison, J. (1996) CNC Machining Handbook, Industrial

Press Inc. 3. Thyer, G.E. (1991) Computer Numerical Control of Machine

Tools, 2nd Edition, Newnes. 4. Mattson, M. (2002) CNC Programming Principles and

Applications, Delmar.


UTeM

201

197

BTPD 3123 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the principles of DMFA in product design. 2. Apply the concept of DFMA in design process. 3. Analyze the product through DFMA approach. 4. Produce product design improvement and demonstrate the

ideas through presentation. Synopsis The Design for Manufacture and Assembly (DFMA) is an approach of a decision making in improving product design from the earliest concept design stages of a new product, based on concurrent engineering philosophy. The course structure exposes students to learn, understand and apply requirements of DFMA in ensuring the design of product that is ease and less expensive to manufacture and assemble, with retaining quality of product. References 1. Boothroyd, G., Dewhurst, P. & Knight, W. (2002) Product

Design For Manufacture and Assembly, 2nd Edition Revised and Expanded, Marcel Dekker.

2. Corrado, P. (2001) Design for Manufacturing A Structured Approach, Butterworth Heinemann.

3. Ulrich, K.T. & Eppinger, S.D. (2004) Product Design and Development, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Irwin.

4. Lindbeck, J.R. & Waygant, R.M. (1995) Product Design and Manufacture, Prentice Hall.

BTPD 3133 RAPID MANUFACTURING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the process for rapid tooling activities. 2. Select the best rapid prototyping technology for a

particular part or design. 3. Perform various types of rapid prototyping technologies

such as selective laser sintering, stereolithography and etc. 4. Perform reverse engineering activities for rapid

reproduction and design alteration Synopsis Product development requires the building and testing of prototypes. A prototype is an approximation of the product on one or more dimensions of interest. Prototypes are used for learning, communication, integration and milestones. This course will provide the study of different prototyping methodologies and technologies. References 1. Hopkinson, N., Hague, R.J.M. & Dickens, P.M. (2006) Rapid

Manufacturing: An Industrial Revolution for the Digital Age, Chicester, John Wiley & Sons.

2. Wright, P.K. (2001) 21st Century Manufacturing Practice, Prentice Hall.

3. Pham, D.T. (2001) Rapid manufacturing the Technologies and Applications of Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Tooling, London: Springer.

4. Azapagic, A., Millington, A. & Collett, A. (2004) Sustainable Development in Practice: Case Studies for Engineers and Scientists, John Wiley & Sons.


202

198

BTPD 3213 PRODUCTION TOOL DESIGN Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic principles and methods of designing

production tool in manufacturing field. 2. Apply the basic principles and methods of designing with

current industrial practice. 3. Design efficient production tools for manufacturing,

assembly and inspection processes. 4. Demonstrate an ability to organize and communicate

thoughts and ideas on device through oral presentation for manufacture.

Synopsis This course is an introduction to the basic principles and methods of designing production tools such as jigs and fixtures for material removal processes, manual work operations, joining processes and inspection processes. The students will be exposed to the application of industrial work holding devices, drawings and designs. The working drawings will be aided by engineering drawing standards, company catalogs and handbooks. The jigs and fixtures focus on the locating elements such as; clamping elements, tool guiding and setting elements. In this course, students will also use CAD software. References 1. Hoffman, E.G. (2002) Jig & Fixture Design, 5th Edition,

Delmar Publisher. 2. Joshi, P.H. (2003) Jigs and Fixtures Design Manual, 2nd

Edition, McGraw-Hill. 3. Orady, E. (2008) Jigs & Fixtures Design, Workshop Material,

BATC UTM.

BTPD 3223 INDUSTRIAL DESIGN Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain a systematic approach to the design process in all

studio projects. 2. Apply design and creative skills learned in one studio to

problems encountered in the new context of a successive studio.

3. Develop an understanding of and familiarity with the tools and methods of the design trade.

4. Demonstrate proficiency in model-making techniques using various materials.

Synopsis Industrial design deals with the planning and development for production of a variety of objects and interrelated systems. Consumer appliances, tools, safety equipment, business machines, furniture, medical equipment, architectural products, and transportation devices make up a partial list of those areas of specialization in industrial design. Industrial design falls within a broader category of design, which is the professional area of activity concerned with planning and developing a wide variety of objects and spaces. Relationships among the users of the designed item, the efficient production of the designed item, and the aesthetic characteristics of the designed item are of particular importance. References 1. Chengalur, S.N., Rodgers, S.H. & Bernard, T.E. (2004)

Kodak’s Ergonomic Design for People at Work, 2nd Edition, Wiley.

2. Wickens, C.D. (2004) An Introduction to Human Factors Engineering, 2nd Edition, Pearson education International.

3. Cacciabue, P.C. (2004) Guide to Applying Human Factors Methods: Human Error and Accident Management in Safety-Critical Systems, Springer.

4. Radwin, R.S. (2007) Lecture Notes on IE 564 (Ergonomics and Occupational Safety), University of Wisconsin – Madison.

5. Smith, M. (2006) Lecture Notes on IE 342 (Introduction to Human Factors), University of Wisconsin – Madison.


UTeM

203

199

BTPD 3233 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe the basic theory of common machine elements. 2. Apply the theory of common machine elements to design

machine elements. 3. Analyze machine elements using finite element analysis. 4. Optimize the design of machine elements using finite

element analysis. Synopsis The course introduces students to the design and theory of common machine elements including clutches, brakes, bearings, springs and gears. It also gives students experience in solving design problems involving machine elements. Finite element analysis approach will also be introduced to analyze, evaluate and optimize the mechanical structure of machine elements.

References 1. Juvinall, R. C., and Marshek, K. M., (2006), Fundamental of

Machine Component Design, 2nd Ed., Wiley. 2. Nortan, R. L., (2004), Design of Machinery, Tata McGraw-

Hill Book Co. 3. Logan, D. L., (2002), A First Course in the Finite Element

Method, 3rd Edition, Brooks/Cole, Pacific Grove, CA. 4. Chandrupatla, T. R., and Belgundu, A. D., (1997),

Introduction to the Finite Elements in Engineering, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

BTPD 3244 DESIGN PROJECT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Define problem, objectives and scope of the project. 2. Conduct a literature review and produce a project

methodology. 3. Design and analyze the project using appropriate tools. 4. Demonstrate the project findings in a group design project. Synopsis This course develops the student’s competence and self-confidence as designers. Design projects are drawn from manufacturing engineering problems. The aims of this course is to expose students with design and research methodology which consists of project background, literature review, project methodology, design, analysis and presentation. The design projects must incorporate engineering standards and realistic constraints that include economic, environmental, sustainability, manufacturability, ethical, health and safety. References 1. Walker, D.J. (2000) Creative Techniques in Product and

Engineering Design: A Practical Workbook, Woodhead Publication, Abington, Cambridge.

2. Matthews, C. (1998) Case Studies in Engineering Design, London: Arnold.

3. Ulrich, K. (2004) Product Design and Development, McGraw Hill.


204

200

BTPD 4113 CAE Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic principles of finite element analysis. 2. Apply finite element modeling and equation to solve

mechanical structure,heat transfer and fluid flow analysis problems in design.

3. Design the finite element models using CAD. 4. Demonstrate and analyze finite element models using CAE

software.

Synopsis The course will introduce the students to the fundamental concepts of the finite element method and analysis in the context of practical application with emphasis on the engineering issues References 1. Chandrupatla T.R and Belgundu, A.D (1997), Introduction to

the Finite Elements in Engineering, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey

2. Huebner K.H and Dewhirst D.L(2001), The finite Element Method for Engineers, 4th Edition,John Wiley and Sons Inc, Toronto Canada

3. Cook R.D (1995), Finite Element Modeling for Stress Analysis, John Wiley and Son Inc

4. Logan D.L (2002), A First Course in the Finite Element Method, 3rd Edition Brooks/Cole, Pacific Grove, CA

BTPD 4134 AUTOMOTIVE COMPONENT MANUFACTURING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the proper use of hand tools, power tools, electric

tools and machines and PPE. 2. Identify the different automotive joining process such as

welding, adhesive bonding and mechanical fastening 3. Describe the finishing process involved in automotive

manufacturing. 4. Apply the knowledge of surface treatment such as blasting

and painting technology. Synopsis This subject provides strong fundamental concepts and techniques related to various type of finishing method that are applied in automotive industries. This subject covers three major techniques used in finishing process such as machine process, joining process and surface treatment. The subject is practical oriented where students apply their knowledge as well as capable to operate the relevant equipment. References 1. Serope Kalpakjian, (2002) Manufacturing Engineering &

Technology, 4th edition, Prentice Hall 2. R.L. Timings, (1998) Manufacturing Technology, vol 1, 3rd

edition , Wesley Longman 3. P.N RAO, (2000) Manufacturing Technology-Metal cutting

& Machine Tools, McGraw Hill. 4. J.L.Stauffer, (1993) Finishing Systems design &

Implementation, Published by association of Finishing process of the Society of Manufacturing Engineers.(SME)

5. H.S .Bawa, (2004) Manufacturing processes, McGraw Hill 6. Robert. GmBH, (2005) Automotive Handbook, 6th edition.

Society of Automotive Engineer (SAE)


UTeM

205

201

BTPD 4124 MOULD DESIGN Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Identify design components requirements for mould 2. Design and fabricate mould 3. Determine the runner and gating system for mould Synopsis This course is an introduction to the basic principles and method of designing mould components such as cavity, core, sprue, cooling system, gate and ejectors system. The students will be exposed to the application of industrial work holding devices, drawing engineering standard, design catalogs and mold design handbooks. References 1. Herbert Rees, Mold Engineering 2nd Edition, 2. Hoffman, E.G. (2002) Jig & Fixture Design, 5th Edition,

Delmar Publisher. 3. Joshi, P.H. (2003) Jigs and Fixtures Design Manual, 2nd

Edition, McGraw-Hill. 4. Orady, E. (2008) Jigs & Fixtures Design, Workshop Material,

BATC UTM.


206

202

Assoc. Prof. MOHD RAHIMI BIN YUSOFF Dean : [email protected] : 06-234 6510 : Dean’s Office, 2nd Floor

AHMAD ZUBIR BIN JAMIL Deputy Dean (Academic) : [email protected] : 06-234 6511 : GD1, 2nd Floor

ROHANA BINTI ABDULLAH Deputy Dean (Research & Postgraduate Studies) : [email protected] : 06-234 6512 : TDP’s Office, 2nd Floor

Engr. ASRI BIN DIN Head of Department (Electric) : [email protected] : 06-234 6506 : D8, 2nd Floor

ROSTAM AFFENDI BIN HAMZAH Head of Department (Electronic & Computer) : [email protected] : 06-234 6508 : D10, 2nd Floor

NUR RASHID BIN MAT NURI @ MD DIN Head of Department (Mechanical) : [email protected] : 06-234 6517 : D13, 2nd Floor

FACULTY STAFF

Administration


UTeM

207

203

Engr. ZOLKARNAIN BIN MARJOM Head of Department (Manufacturing) : [email protected] : 06-234 6523 : D15, 2nd Floor

AZHAR BIN MOHD SALLEH Principal Assistant Registrar : [email protected] : 06-234 6527 : D5, 2nd Floor

MOHAMAD FUAD BIN JA’AFAR Senior Assistant Administrative Officer : [email protected] : 06-234 6524 : D7, 2nd Floor

NOR'EMYLIA BINTI MOHAMED Office Secretary : [email protected] : 06-234 6528 : Admin, 2nd Floor

ZULRIDAH BINTI ZULKEFLE Assistant Accountant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

HASLINA BINTI ABU Account Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

FADZLY BIN NORDIN Administrative Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

NOOR HAFIZA BINTI OTHMAN Administrative Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

AZHAN BIN ABDUL RAUB Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

MOHD HEDZUAN BIN HASBULLAH Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

204

IZWAN BIN HAMDAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

AZIZI BIN OSMAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

MOHD SYAKIR BIN MOHTARUDIN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

MOHD SAUFI BIN ALIMAT Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

FAKHRULNAIM BIN IBRAHIM Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

JANATUL HAFIZ BIN BASIR Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

AHMAD FITRI BIN ADAM General Office Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor


208

205

AHMAD ZUBIR BIN JAMIL Deputy Dean (Academic) / Lecturer M.Sc. (Automatic Control and System Engineering), University of Sheffield, UK P.Grad Diploma (Industrial Education and Training) RMIT, Melbourne B.Eng. (Hons) Electrical & Electronic, University of Strathclyde, UK Area of Interest : Industrial Automation, Industrial Education and Training (VTET) Computer Maintenance Management System : [email protected] : 234 6631/234 6505 : BP2/D08

Engr. ASRI BIN DIN Head of Department / Lecturer M.Eng. (Electrical Energy & Power System) Universiti Malaya B.Eng. (Electrical Engineering), UTM Area of Interest : Electrical Power System, Renewable Energy, Energy Efficiency. : [email protected] : 234 6632 : BP1, 1st Floor

SULAIMAN BIN SABIKAN Lecturer M.Sc Electrical Engineering, Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka B.Eng in Electrical Engineering (Mechatronics) Universiti Teknologi Malaysia Area of Interest : Mechatronics Systems, Machine Vision System, Automated Guided Vehicle and Robotics : [email protected] : 234 6548 : BP3, 1st Floor

MOHD FARRIZ BIN HJ MD BASAR Lecturer M.Eng. Electrical Engineering (High Voltage), UTM B.Eng. Electrical Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Renewable Energy Technologies and Applications : [email protected] : 234 6588 : BP10, 1st Floor

AMINURRASHID BIN NOORDIN Lecturer M.Eng. (Electrical - Mechatronics and Automatic Control), UTM B.Eng. (Electrical - Mechatronics), UTM Area of Interest : Robotics, Automatic Control, Artificial Intelligence : [email protected] : 234 6625 : BP14, 1st Floor

MOHD RAZALI BIN MOHAMAD SAPIEE Lecturer M.Eng. (Electrical - Mechatronics and Automatic control), UTM B.Eng (Hons.) Mechatronics, University of Leeds Area of Interest : Mechatronics, Adaptive Control : [email protected] : 234 6578 : BP24, 1st Floor

MUHAMMAD SHARIL BIN YAHAYA Lecturer M.Sc. Power Distribution Engineering, Newcastle University, UK B.Eng. (Hons) Electrical Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Power System, Power Distribution, High Voltage : [email protected] : 234 6625 : BP14, 1st Floor

MOHD YUNOS BIN ALI Senior Teaching Engineer B.Eng Electrical Electrical Engineering (Power System), Universiti Teknologi Malaysia Area of Interest : Power Electronics, Electric Motor & Drives. : [email protected] : 234 6640 : BP5, 1st Floor

Department of Electrical Engineering Technology


UTeM

209

206

MOHD HATTA BIN JOPRI Teaching Engineer Msc. Electrical Power Engineering, Rheinisch-WestfälischeTechnische Hochschule, Aachen, Germany B.Eng. in Electrical Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Power System Eng., Electrical Machine, Power Electronics, Actuator and Drives : [email protected] : 234 6587 : BP9, 1st Floor

MUSTAFA BIN MANAP Teaching Engineer B.Eng. in Electrical Engineering (Control and Instrumentation), UTM Diploma in Electrical Power Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Instrumentation, PLC, SCADA : [email protected] : 234 6546 : BP4, 1st Floor

ZULKIFLI BIN IBRAHIM Teaching Engineer M.Sc in Electrical Power Engineering, TU Darmstädt, Germany B.Eng.(Hons.) in Electrical Power Engineering, UNITEN Area of Interest : High Voltage,Energy Conversion : [email protected] : 234 6591 : BP12, 1st Floor

MOHD HANIF BIN CHE HASAN Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Mechatronics), UTM Area of Interest : VB Programming, Embedded System, PC & PLC Based Automation, SCADA, System Integration, Design & Application : [email protected] : 234 6639 : BP6, 1st Floor

SYAHRUL HISHAM BIN MOHAMAD @ ABD. RAHMAN Teaching Engineer B.Eng. Electrical and Electronic (Hons), Uniten Area of Interest : Power Electronic and Drives, Electrical and Electronic System, Embedded, System, PC & PLC Based Automation, SCADA : [email protected] : 234 6589 : BP11, 1st Floor

KHALIL AZHA BIN MOHD ANNUAR Teaching Engineer B. Eng. In Electrical(Electronic) Engineering UTM Area of Interest : Electronics, Embedded Control Design & Application : [email protected] : 234 6593 : BP13, 1st Floor

MOHD FIRDAUS BIN MOHD AB HALIM Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Electrical Engineering), UNITEN Area of Interest : Power Electronics, Electric Motor & Drives, Reliability of Power Electronics : [email protected] : 234 6638 : BP8, 1st Floor

MADIHA BTE ZAHARI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) Electrical & Electronics, UTP Area of Interest : Control & Instrumentation : [email protected] : 234 6586 : BP15, 1st Floor

MUHAMAD FAIZAL BIN YAAKUB Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Electrical-Electronic), UTM Area of Interest : Power Electronics, Automotive Electronics, Renewable Energy : [email protected] : 234 6637 : BP7, 1st Floor

SUZIANA BINTI AHMAD Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons) Electrical Engineering (Telecommunication), UTM Area of Interest : Power Systems, Power Quality & Management : [email protected] : 234 6585 : BP16, 1st Floor


210

207

RAMLAN BIN LATIP Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons) Electrical Engineering (Control & Instrumentation), UTM Area of Interest : Power System, Control & Automation. : [email protected] : 234 6560 : BP19, 1st Floor

CHE WAN MOHD FAIZAL BIN CHE WAN MOHD ZALANI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) Electrical Engineering (Power), UTM Area of Interest : Power System, High Voltage, Transmission Line. : [email protected] : - : BP93, 2nd Floor

203

Engr. ZOLKARNAIN BIN MARJOM Head of Department (Manufacturing) : [email protected] : 06-234 6523 : D15, 2nd Floor

AZHAR BIN MOHD SALLEH Principal Assistant Registrar : [email protected] : 06-234 6527 : D5, 2nd Floor

MOHAMAD FUAD BIN JA’AFAR Senior Assistant Administrative Officer : [email protected] : 06-234 6524 : D7, 2nd Floor

NOR'EMYLIA BINTI MOHAMED Office Secretary : [email protected] : 06-234 6528 : Admin, 2nd Floor

ZULRIDAH BINTI ZULKEFLE Assistant Accountant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

HASLINA BINTI ABU Account Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

FADZLY BIN NORDIN Administrative Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

NOOR HAFIZA BINTI OTHMAN Administrative Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

AZHAN BIN ABDUL RAUB Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor

MOHD HEDZUAN BIN HASBULLAH Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor


UTeM

211

208

ROSTAM AFFENDI BIN HAMZAH Head of Department / Lecturer M. Sc (Electronic System Design Engineering), USM B. Eng (Electrical & Electronics Engineering),UTM Area of Interest : Embedded System, Digital Image Processing, Stereo Vision : [email protected] : 06-234 6508 : D10, 2nd Floor

KHAIRUL AZHA BIN A AZIZ Lecturer M. Eng (Electrical-Mechatronics & Automatic Control), UTM B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering, USM Area of Interest : Control & Automation : [email protected] : 06-234 6536 : BP61, 1st Floor

ELIYANA BINTI ROSLAN Lecturer M. Eng in Engineering (Electric-Electronic & Telecommunication), UTM B. Eng in Electrical Engineering, UM Area of Interest : RF, Microwave & Antenna Propagation : [email protected] : 06-234 6570 : BP30, 1st Floor

ABDUL HALIM BIN DAHALAN Senior Teaching Engineer B. Eng. in Electrical Engineering (Communication), UTM Area of Interest : Mobile Radio & Satellite Communication : [email protected] : 06-234 6544 : BP50, 1st Floor

Engr. MOHD SYAHRIN AMRI BIN MOHD NOH Senior Teaching Engineer B. Eng. in Electrical Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Microelectronics : [email protected] : 06-234 6535 : BP60, 1st Floor

SAIFULLAH BIN SALAM Teaching Engineer B.Eng. Electrical Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Control System : [email protected] : 06-234 6550 : BP46, 1st Floor

Ir. NIK AZRAN BIN ABDUL HADI Teaching Engineer B.Eng (Hons) Electrical & Electronic, University of Plymouth Area of Interest : Biomedical & Instrumentation : [email protected] : 06-234 6534 : BP59, 1st Floor

NORLEZAH BINTI HASHIM Teaching Engineer B. Eng. in Telecommunication Engineering, UM Area of Interest : Optical Communication & Wireless Communication : [email protected] : 06-234 6571 : BP31, 1st Floor

Department of Electronic & Computer Engineering Technology


212

209

HASRUL’ NISHAM BIN ROSLY Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering (Computer), UTeM Area of Interest : Programmable Devices & Computer System : [email protected] : 06-234 6551 : BP47, 1st Floor

MOHD SAAD BIN HAMID Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons) Electronics (Computer), MMU Area of Interest : Programmable Devices & Computer System : [email protected] : 06-234 6561 : BP36, 1st Floor

SHAMSUL FAKHAR BIN ABD GANI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Computer Engineering, UniMAP Area of Interest : Programmable Devices & Computer System : [email protected] : 06-234 6552 : BP48, 1st Floor

Engr. AHMAD FAUZAN BIN KADMIN Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering, USM Area of Interest : Network System : [email protected] : 06-234 6542 : BP61, 1st Floor

Engr. SITI HALMA BINTI JOHARI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering (Industrial Electronic), UTeM Area of Interest : Industrial Electronic : [email protected] : 06-234 6608 : BP32, 1st Floor

MOHD FAUZI BIN AB RAHMAN Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering, Tokai University, Japan Area of Interest : Control & Automation : [email protected] : 06-234 6545 : BP49, 1st Floor

ROSELIZA BINTI YATIM Teaching Engineer B. Eng (Hons) Electrical & Electronic, USM Area of Interest : Microelectronics : [email protected] : 06-234 6609 : BP33, 1st Floor

Engr. AHMAD SAYUTHI BIN MOHAMAD SHOKRI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering (Computer), UTeM Area of Interest : Medical Image Processing, Programming, Network, Digital Signal Processing : [email protected] : 06-234 6562 : BP35, 1st Floor

NURLIYANA BINTI ABD MUTALIB Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electrical Engineering, UTHM Area of Interest : Microelectronics : [email protected] : 06-234 6605 : BP34, 1st Floor

EFFENDY ONN BIN SIAM Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic & Computer, UPM Area of Interest : Industrial Electronic, Control & Automation : [email protected] : 06-234 6569 : BP29, 1st Floor


UTeM

213

210

MD ASHADI BIN MD JOHARI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering (Industrial Electronic), UTeM Area of Interest : Optic Sensors & Telecommunication : [email protected] : 06-234 6535 : BP63, 1st Floor

NADZRIE BIN MOHAMOOD Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering, USM Area of Interest : Computer Networking : [email protected] : 06-234 6557 : BP40, 1st Floor

204









214

211

NUR RASHID BIN MAT NURI @ MD DIN Head of Department / Lecturer M.Eng. (Mechanical), UTM B.Eng. (Mechanical) Okayama University, Japan Area of Interest : Vehicle Aerodynamics, Vehicle Control & Dynamics. : [email protected] : 234 6517 : BP39/D13

MOHD IRMAN BIN RAMLI Lecturer MSc (Manufacturing Systems Engineering) Coventry University. B. Eng (Mechatronics and Precision Engineering), Tohoku University, Japan. Area of Interest: Maintenance, Welding and Metal Joining, Green Technology : [email protected] : 234 6557 : BP26

MAZLAN BIN AHMAD MANSOR Lecturer M. Innovation & Engineering Design, UPM B. Eng. (Mechatronics & Precision Engineering), Tohoku University, Japan. Area of Interest: Automotive Structure & Design. : [email protected] : 234 6624 : BP25

NOR AZAZI BIN NGATIMAN Lecturer M. Eng. (Manufacturing Systems Engineering), UPM. B. Eng. (Hons.) Mechanical Engineering, UKM. Area of Interest: Powertrain, Hybrid Car. : [email protected] : 234 6582 : BP18

OMAR BIN ASAROON Senior Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons.) Mechanical Engineering, UTM. Area of Interest : Maintenance, Welding Metal Joining. : [email protected] : 234 6569 : BP29

AHMAD NIZAM BIN JAMALUDIN Teaching Engineer B. Eng (Mechanical/Systems), Hons., UPM. Area of Interest: Maintenance Management, Green Technology and Renewable Energy. : [email protected] : 234 6553 : BP42

Department of Mechanical Engineering Technology


UTeM

215

212

MUHAMMED NOOR BIN HASHIM Teaching Engineer B. Eng (Mechanical), Kitami Institute Of Technology, Japan. Area of Interest: Green Technology, Robocar & Human Powered Vehicle. : [email protected] : 234 6559 : BP38

AZRIN BIN AHMAD Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons.) Mechanical Engineering, UTP. Area of Interest: Plant Maintenance & Product Design. : [email protected] : 234 6581 : BP20

MOHD FARUQ BIN ABDUL LATIF Teaching Engineer B. Eng Mechanical (Design & Innovation), Hons. UTeM. Area of Interest: Green Technology, Automotive Product design, Plastic Injection Molding, & Material Tolerances. : [email protected] : 234 6554 : BP41

MOHD. FARID BIN ISMAIL Teaching Engineer B. Eng (Hons.) Aerospace Engineering, USM. Area of Interest: Design Simulation, Reverse Engineering, Aerostructure Maintenance, Renewable Energy. : [email protected] : 234 6564 : BP28

MUHAMMAD NUR BIN OTHMAN Teaching Engineer B. Eng Mechanical (Automotive). Hons. IIUM. Area of Interest: Green Technology, Solar & Hybrid Car, Renewable Energy : [email protected] : 234 6563 : BP27

MUHAMMAD FAIRUZ BIN ABU BAKAR Teaching Engineer B. Eng Mechanical (Thermal Fluids), Hons. UTeM. Area of Interest: Thermal and fluid application, Automotive. : [email protected] : 234 6580 : BP21

204








204








204








204









216

213

ROHANA BINTI ABDULLAH Deputy Dean (Research & Industrial Link) / Lecturer M.Sc Manufacturing Engineering, Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka B.Sc in Industrial Engineering, State University of New York, USA Area of Interest : Work Study, Productivity, Lean Six Sigma : [email protected] : 234 6512 : BTD2

Engr. ZOLKARNAIN BIN MARJOM Head of Department / Lecturer M.Eng. Manufacturing Systems Engineering, UPM B.Eng. (Hons) Manufacturing Systems Engineering, University of Portsmouth, UK Diploma of Mechanical & Manufacturing Engineering, UiTM Area of Interest : CADCAM, Rapid Manufacturing, Product Design & Development : [email protected] : 234 6523 : BKJ4

NUZAIMAH BINTI MUSTAFA Lecturer M.Sc in Materials Engineering,USM B.Eng. (Hons) Materials Engineering, USM Area of Interest : Composite, polymer. : [email protected] : - : BP17

MOHD FA’IZ BIN WAHID Lecturer M.Sc. Innovation & Engineering Design, UPM B.Eng. (CAD/CAM), UM Area of Interest : Product Design, CAD/CAM : [email protected] : - : BP92

KHAIRUM BIN HAMZAH Lecturer M.Sc Mathematics, USM B.Sc Mathematics, UITM Diploma Science, UITM Area of Interest : Pure Maths, CAGD, Fuzzy Maths : [email protected] : - : BP94

Engr. HASSAN BIN ATTAN Senior Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons) Manufacturing Systems Engineering, University of Portsmouth, UK Diploma of Manufacturing Technology, PPD. Area of Interest : CADCAM, Product Design & Development, Metal Fabrication : [email protected] : 234 6531 : BP58

Department of Manufacturing Engineering Technology


UTeM

217

214

HAMBALI BIN BOEJANG Senior Teaching Engineer M.Sc In Rapid Product Development (De Montfort, UK) B. Mech Engineering (Pennstate University USA) Area of Interest :Product Design & Rapid Prototyping, Tooling and Manufacturing Reverse Engineering. : [email protected] : 234 6539 : BP14

KHAIRUL ANUAR BIN RAHMAN Senior Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Electronics Information) Gifu University, Japan Area of Interest : Vision System, Image Processing, : [email protected] : 2346532 : BP57

SYAHRUL AZWAN BIN SUNDI @ SUANDI Senior Teaching Engineer M.Sc. In Manufacturing Engineering, UTeM B.Eng.(Mechanical), USM Area of Interest : Machining, CAD/CAM : [email protected] : - : -

MUHAMMAD SYAFIK BIN JUMALI Teaching Engineer B.Eng. Mechanical and Manufacturing Systems , UNIMAS Area of Interest : CNC Machining, Cutting Tool : [email protected] : 234 6645 : BP43

HAIRUL EFFENDY BIN AB MAULOD Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Materials) Hons, USM Area of Interest : Composite Processing, Composite Materials, : [email protected] : 2346549

: BP45

Engr. HANIZAM BIN HASHIM Teaching Engineer B.Eng. Manufacturing System with Mechanical Engineering, Bradford University of United Kingdom Area of Interest : Thin Film Coating, Printed Circuit Boards Assembly, Box Build Assembly : [email protected] : 234 6533 : BP58

Engr. MOHD SOUFHWEE BIN ABD RAHMAN Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Mechanical) Industry, UTM Area of Interest : Quality Control & Management and Industrial Engineering : [email protected] : 234 6541 : BP52

Engr. MOHD FAIZAL BIN HALIM Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons), Mechanical- Manufacturing, UTM Diploma of Mechanical engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Concurrent Engineering, Product Design & Development. : [email protected] : 2346575 : BP44

SALLEH BIN ABOO HASSAN Teaching Engineer (Certified Six Sigma Black Belt) B.Eng.(Agricultural), UPM Area of Interest : Plastic Processing, Quality System & Six Sigma : [email protected] : 234 6540 : BP53

NOORIRINAH BT OMAR Teaching Engineer M.Sc in Materials Engineering,USM B.Eng. (Hons) Materials Engineering, USM Area of Interest : Application of nanotechnology and nano composite. : [email protected] : 234 6582 : BP18


218204









UTeM

219

215

FACULTY of MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (FKM) LAB LOCATIONS:

1. Main Entrance 2. Fabrication & Fitting Workshop 3. Welding Workshop 4. Computer-Aided Drawing Studio 2

5. Computer-Aided Drawing Studio 1 6. Material Science & Technology Lab 7. Computer-Aided Drawing Studio 3 8. Prayer Room, Toilet

MAPS & LOCATIONS


220

216

FACULTY of MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (FKM) LECTURE ROOMS:

216

FACULTY of MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (FKM) LECTURE ROOMS:


UTeM

221

217

FACULTY of ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY (FTK) LAB LOCATIONS:

1. JTKP Lab 2. JTKM Lab 3. JTKE Lab 4. JTKEK Lab 5. JTKP Lab 6. JTKM Lab

FKM Labs: 7. Engineering Drawing Studio 1 8. Engineering Drawing Studio 2 9. Chemical Lab 10. Static Lab 11. Experiment Technique Lab


222

218

FACULTY of ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY (FTK) ACADEMIC BUILDING:

13. Admin Office 14. KPP Room 15. KJ JTKE Room 16. KJ JTKEK Room 17. KJ JTKM Room 18. KJ JTKP Room 19. Dean’s Office 20. Dean’s Room 21. TDA Room 22. TDP1 Room 23. TDP2 Room

24. BK1/BK5 25. BK2/BK6 26. BK3 27. BK4 28. UTeM Holdings

6. JTKP Lecturer Rooms 7. JTKM Lecturer Rooms 8. JTKEK Lecturer Rooms 9. JTKE Lecturer Rooms 10. Language Lab 11. JTKEK Lab 12. JTKE Lab

1. Main Lobby 2. UTeM Hall 1 3. Prayer Room 4. JTKM Lab 5. JTKP Lab


UTeM

223

219

FTK PUBLICATION COMMITTEE:

ADVISOR

Assoc. Prof. Mohd Rahimi bin Yusoff

CHAIRMAN Rostam Affendi bin Hamzah

EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE

Ahmad Zubir bin Jamil Rohana binti Abdullah

Engr. Asri bin Din Nur Rashid bin Mat Nuri @ Md Din

Engr. Zolkarnain bin Marjom Azhar bin Mohd Salleh

SECRETARY

Shamsul Fakhar bin Abd Gani

COMMITTEE Aminurrashid bin Noordin

Muhammad Faizal bin Mohd Yaakub Mohd Saad bin Hamid Siti Halma binti Johari

Saifullah bin Salam Muhammed Noor bin Hashim

Mazlan bin Ahmad Mansor Muhammad Syafik bin Jumali

Salleh bin Aboo Hassan

CREDITS

fakulti teknologi kejuruteraan academic handbook 20112012

Documents